MagiCAD 2008.5 Users Guide

User’s Guide

MagiCAD 2008.5

MagiCAD® Copyright © 1998-2008 Progman Oy. All rights reserved. MagiCAD is a registered trademark of Progman Oy. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

MagiCAD 2008.5 User’s Guide

What is new in MagiCAD 2008.5

What is new in MagiCAD 2008.5 Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. Common features 1 Unicode......................................................................................................................................1 Save as 2007.11 format..............................................................................................................1 Provision for Voids....................................................................................................................2

Rounding of the provision for voids............................................................................2 Status settings ............................................................................................................................3

Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation 4 Substation (Heat Exchanger) .....................................................................................................4 Options for adding components and devices fast.......................................................................5 R/D value for flexible pipes.......................................................................................................5 Connection Node Report ...........................................................................................................6 Dimension texts .........................................................................................................................6 Change Properties ......................................................................................................................6 Model Drawings dialog is now resizable...................................................................................7 IFC.............................................................................................................................................7 Other changes ............................................................................................................................7 Resolved issues..........................................................................................................................7 Changes made in version 2007.11 SR-1 .................................................................................... 9

Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical 10 Cable number...........................................................................................................................10 Drawing functions ...................................................................................................................11

General ......................................................................................................................11 Cable drawing............................................................................................................11 Conflict situations......................................................................................................12 Settings of cable packets ...........................................................................................13

System description dialog........................................................................................................14 Default cable..............................................................................................................14

Product data dialog ..................................................................................................................14 Default cable..............................................................................................................14 Calculation data.........................................................................................................14 Upside down mirror...................................................................................................15

Project management.................................................................................................................15 Change Properties ....................................................................................................................16 Part Properties..........................................................................................................................16 Dimension texts .......................................................................................................................16 IFC exports ..............................................................................................................................17

Original IFC export ...................................................................................................17 New IFC export and import for calculations .............................................................17

Other changes ..........................................................................................................................19 Resolved issues........................................................................................................................19

Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room 21 Layer and color settings...........................................................................................................21 Air flow values by area or times per hour................................................................................22

iv • Contents What is new in MagiCAD 2008.5


Chapter 1. Common features • 1

Chapter 1. Common features

Unicode It is now possible to select either National or Unicode character set in MagiCAD HP&V, Electrical and Room. (National was used in the previous versions.) The selection is made in the Project Settings section of the project management dialog.

Save as 2007.11 format It is possible to save the drawings to older MagiCAD format (2007.11). This is necessary, for example, if the subcontractors are still using the older MagiCAD version.

New command MAGISAVEAS200711 (SAVE200711) saves all drawings connected to the same project (under the project folder) to MagiCAD 2007.11 format. The drawings are saved to the given folder, which must not be the same folder or its subfolder. If the drawing is connected also to a MagiCAD Electrical project, Electrical objects are also converted.


2 • Chapter 1. Common features / Provision for Voids

Provision for Voids Provision for Voids now recognizes AcDbPolyFaceMesh objects. Objects of this type of are used, for example, in Tekla Structures.

Rounding of the provision for voids It is now possible to add the rounding value to the provision for voids created by the Automatic Void Provision function.

The values are in millimeters. Rounding value is used to round the value to the nearest multiple of the rounding value upwards. For example, if the Automatic Void Provision function created a provision for voids with size 154x154 and the rounding value were 10, the resulting size would be 160x160 – if the rounding value were 25, the resulting size would be 175x175.

Rounding down value can be used to avoid rounding to produce too large voids. For example, if the offset for rectangular void were 20 mm and a pipe's outer diameter were 114 mm (and 100 mm were the maximum diameter for circular void), the result before rounding would be 114+20+20 => 154 mm x 154 mm. If the rounding value were 25 mm, after rounding the size of the void would be 175 mm x 175 mm. That could be a too wide gap, but with the rounding down value one can round small exceedings of the rounding value downwards. If the rounding value of 5 mm were used, the resulting size would be 150 mm x 150 mm.

Automatic Void Provision functionality (command MAGIAVP) is able to detect the need for voids from partial collisions. For example, the case where the walls do not have an end (that is, the wall is not a complete box), the case where the void would not be completely inside the wall / floor.


Chapter 1. Common features / Status settings • 3

Status settings It is possible to define different kind of status definitions in the project management dialog.

You can set line type, color and line weight settings for the status.

The status can be determined while drawing the duct/pipe or when installing the devices. It is also possible to determine the status afterwards with Change Properties.

-Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.


4 • Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Substation (Heat Exchanger)

Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation

Substation (Heat Exchanger) It is now possible to define and install the heat exchangers.

Start the function from the toolbar or with command MAGIHX.


Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Options for adding components and devices fast • 5

It is possible to edit the information with the command MAGIHXE.

Options for adding components and devices fast Now it is possible to add the duct and pipe components and air devices while drawing a duct/pipe. You can find new options from AutoCAD’s command line and also with right click.

R/D value for flexible pipes It is now possible to use manual Radius for the flexible pipes (heating/cooling, water and sprinkler). The radius is still at least the minimum R/D value defined in the pipe series. In pipe options there is a new option Radius for flexible pipes with radio buttons “Do not use” and “Use”. When “Do not use” is selected, flexible bends have their R/D value like previously. When “Use” is selected, the radius defined in the number field is used instead.


6 • Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Connection Node Report

Connection Node Report A new function has been added for finding the connection nodes.

Dimension texts It is now possible to add the Connection size with phi and Connection size with drawn phi for pipes.

Double-clicking a variable in Available list adds the variable to the Selected list. Double-clicking a variable in Selected list removes the variable. Naturally, double-clicking a constant variable still shows the editing dialog.

New variable Fall has been added for the sprinkler pipes.

Change Properties A new option has been added to Change Properties to change air flows of air devices.


Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Model Drawings dialog is now resizable • 7

Model Drawings dialog is now resizable

Earlier it was not possible to select the desired drawing from the Model drawings list, because the size of the dialog was constant. Now it is resizable, so you can see the drawing names even though the path name is long.

IFC Radiators with different connecions (AB/FE) were presented incorrectly in an IFC file.

ObjectID variable was shown as DeviceID in MagiCAD's own property sets in IFC. Name has been changed to ObjectID. Also, the formula of the object ID was shown in the IFC file instead of the result.

Other changes When drawing a duct from a roof fan, the command now asks if you want to change the duct size to match the fan size.

It is now possible to draw ducts/pipes up to 500 meters high (previously the limit was 50 meters)

It is now possible to take the Collar length and diameter attributes (Air Devices) to MagiCAD Export.

The following new market area selections have been added to the project: Latvia (LVA), Estonia (EST), and China (CHN).

Center snap points have been added for air devices (and more generally, all snap points that can be got for models).

Now it is possible to give direction also to a fan that is installed to the end of the duct.

Resolved issues Connecting to the manifold did not work correctly. If dH in the branch was set, all pipes from the fourth connection used that value, and slanted pipes were created.

MagiCAD Export failed in some cases if the project was without any ductwork systems and all systems were selected.


8 • Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Resolved issues

Sprinkler installation dialog did not remember the selected system.

Radiator selection used User code as an ID, which caused confusion with radiators with the same user code but different product codes.

Earlier it was possible to continue to draw duct and pipe from quick section by using the + grips.

MagiCAD 2007.11 version had a problem which made pipes sometimes disappear.

If different product types were selected to the same dimension text (for example, water point and sewer point) the dimension text was removed when the other object was moved. Now the text is not removed any more.

When you calculated the system, MagiCAD saved all the drawings to the memory during the calculation. If there were many drawings, this feature raised the usage of memory quite big and that caused fatal errors. Now during one system calculation, MagiCAD releases the *.dwg files as soon as it is ready with them. This does not happen if multiple systems are selected.

When using the option “Remove building system parts from file...” in IFC Export, the function did not remove MagiCAD data from the selected IFC file.

Now it is possible to draw ABS ducts properly etc, also if MagiCAD is loaded.

Part Properties of the provision for voids showed world coordinates instead of floor coordinates.

It was not possible to install valves into sewer pipe as it was in some of the earlier versions.

It was not possible to install valves to a pipe smaller than 10 mm.

It was not possible to change pipe material during drawing a vertical pipe.

Search circle found objects also outside of it. Now it shows only the objects which are inside of the circle.

Dimension text variables top of part and bottom of part showed an incorrect value for provision for voids.

The duct symbol options text in the Viewport Preferences dialog is now "2D - Symbols" instead of "1D - Symbols".

Xref drawings were not regenerated after hide or reset hide which could seem that the hide was not working properly with xref drawings.

User variable names are now used also in Change Properties dialog.

The insulation was shown with duct components even though the insulation was invisible.

Copying of sprinkler (or any QModel device) was very slow, because QModels were updated during copying, even when it was not necessary.

Per mil and Connection size with phi dimension text variables were shown as '?'

Exhaust / extract symbol was incorrect when a connection node going upwards was made first and then it was erased (showed X instead of /).


Chapter 2. MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation / Changes made in version 2007.11 SR-1 • 9

Sizing method listed only a limited number of methods correctly. For example, after nine methods all information was shown as 0 when the project dialog was closed and reopened.

When a product was selected to the project from a qpd file, MagiCAD kept the product database reserved until MagiCAD was closed.

If the Show objects as saved in model space setting in Drawing Preferences was active, paste-clip did not work when MagiCAD was loaded.

Changes made in version 2007.11 SR-1 Dimension text referring multiple objects turned target line perpendicular to the reference.

Vertical outdoor and exhaust ducts leading downwards from a distribution box had incorrect symbols.

When using AddPart and selecting e.g. multiple pipes, the program stopped showing the new parts in the dimension text. Now it works properly.

When changing insulation visibility in Viewport Preferences, also xrefs which were unloaded were reloaded.

Negative tolerance in collision control did not work properly with duct and pipe insulation.


10 • Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Cable number

Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical

Cable number You can now give a cable number for a cable when you start to draw one and with part properties. Cable number is editable also in the circuit dialog after installing a circuit.

A cable number is given for the whole cable.

When the next free button is clicked, MagiCAD searches for the next free number from all the model drawings that are connected to the project. MagiCAD recognizes the highest number of digits in cable numbers, and uses the same number when the next free button is used.

When changing a cable number MagiCAD tries to update it for the whole cable. If for some reason MagiCAD cannot change the cable number, the action will be canceled. This can happen if a drawing where the cable is installed is not readable/writable (e.g. when using connection nodes to other drawings that are opened by another user).

Cable number can be used as a part of object ID. It can also be used in dimension texts, reports and on the part property line.

You can easily create cable lists with reports by using the cable number variable. To make your cable numbers similar give the desired amount of digits already for the first cable number.

MagiCAD will not give a warning if you input a duplicate number. You should use the next free button always when inserting a new number.


Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Drawing functions • 11

Drawing functions

General Linetype has now also the selection of by project. This is because of the new status feature. With this option the linetype will follow the settings found in status definitions.

Cable drawing Cables are now handled as whole cables when they are drawn. If linetype, installation, xy-routing, presentation or corners are changed during cable drawing, MagiCAD will split the cable into several entities, but they will be linked together as a whole cable.


12 • Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Drawing functions

Cables have four significant properties: system, material, cable number and status. If one or more of these is changed during cable drawing, the cable will be cut and a junction box is forced to be installed. If a junction box that has two cables connected to it is removed, the cables are connected as a whole cable if the significant properties are the same for both cables. Otherwise they are left as separate cables. The link between two entities of the same cable is also lost if the two connected ends are separated too far from each other (100 * world scale).

If one or more of the significant properties is changed for a piece of cable with Part Properties or Change Properties, MagiCAD will try to change it to other pieces that belong to the whole cable (including the pieces in other drawings if connection nodes are used). If for some reason MagiCAD cannot change the properties, the action will be canceled and there will be a message. This can happen if a drawing where the cable is installed is not readable/writeable (e.g. when using connection nodes to other drawings that are opened by another user).

If a device is installed in the middle of a cable, the cable will be split into two pieces. They will, however, still have the same properties as the original, so if the original cable already had a cable number, both of the two “new” cables will have the same cable number. MagiCAD gives a message if this happens.

If a device is installed in the middle of a cable and the cable already has an IFC GUID, MagiCAD will reset the IFC GUID. New ones will be created in the next IFC Export function.

If the system is changed in cable drawing options when starting to draw a cable, MagiCAD tries to find the default cable that is defined for the system. If a cable type is found from the system, MagiCAD will automatically change the current cable type to that one. If a cable type is not found, the current cable type remains.

Conflict situations The Different Properties dialogs that appear in conflict situations have a new appearance. The available selections are:

• Use all properties of the selected objects

This option will use all the properties shown in the dialog from the selected object.

• Use all properties of the current options

This option will use all the properties shown in the dialog from the currently active settings.

• Copy selected properties from the selected object to options (double-click to select)

With this option on you can select the wanted properties from the selected object to the currently active properties and use those. Use double-click to copy properties.

The properties that are not shown in the dialog are already the same or are taken from the current settings.


Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Drawing functions • 13

Settings of cable packets Cables inside a cable packet can have a cable number. They can be given in the cables owned by packet dialog.

You cannot give the number of similar cables anymore when adding cables to a cable packet. Now you need to add cables one by one because you can give each cable a cable number to make them unique. Part Properties will still sum up the number of similar cables that do not have cable numbers defined.


14 • Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / System description dialog

System description dialog

Default cable A system can now have a definition for the default cable. It can be used for products to help the selection of the default cable and directly in cable drawing options.

Product data dialog

Default cable Default cable can now also be by system, so MagiCAD will find the default cable from the system to which the device is installed. This is useful with devices that are used in several systems.

Calculation data Because of the use of IT systems in some market areas, products now have also the phase definition of 2~.


Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Project management • 15

The current is calculated with the following formula:

2~: I=P/(U * cosφ)

It will be written into IFC when using IFC Calculation Export. It is the current that runs inside the device.

Switchboards are always considered to be 3~ devices in MagiCAD.

Upside down mirror Products can now be mirrored also upside down. To activate the upside down mirror the allow mirroring upside down option has to be selected in the product data dialog. This means that when using the MIRROR command of AutoCAD the product is mirrored completely upside down.

Do not use this option with products that cannot be installed upside down or at least with products that cannot be presented upside down in 3D view. When using only 2D symbols, it is up to the user which symbols are wanted to be mirrored upside down.

Project management You can now select the default power distribution type in project settings. The selectable types are:

• TN-S

• TN-C-S

• TN-C

• IT

• TT

• DC

The selected type is written to every circuit when making the IFC Calculation Export.


16 • Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Change Properties

Change Properties Now it is possible to change the linetype for one or several objects by using Change Properties.

Now it is possible to change the arrow symbol of a connection node by using Change Properties.

Part Properties Linetype is now visible in Part Properties.

Cable number is visible in Part Properties (of a cable and cable packet) and can be changed there.

Status is visible in Part Properties.

Dimension texts Dimension texts now recognize all system codes from cables that are inside a cable packet. With break cable it is possible to get all the system codes inside the break space.

There is now also a selection for the column separator. The available options are:

• none

• space

• use character

With “use character” it’s possible to use any desired character between the variables.

Dimension texts can be now used for voids also. Voids have now their own layer settings in MagiCAD Electrical. Two dimension line variables have been added: Void provision owner and Void provision size. In addition, a void recognizes the following dimension text variables: Top elevation, Top elevation absolute,


Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / IFC exports • 17

Inst.point elevation, Inst.point elevation absolute, Bottom elevation, Bottom elevation absolute, Length, Width, Height, Diameter.

IFC exports

Original IFC export The original IFC Export (MAGIEIFCOUT) now adds also CostQuantity and CostUnit to products if the add cost data option is selected. CostQuantity is the length for objects that are measured in lengths and one for objects that are measured in amount. The CostUnit is MMT for lengths and EA for amounts. The CostData property set can be read into cost estimation software such as Eldata.

New IFC export and import for calculations There are two new buttons in the project/general toolbar: IFC Calculation Export and IFC Calculation Import.

IFC Calculation Export (MEICE)

With this function it is possible to export the whole electrical power system or only the electrical power distribution system to calculation software such as Febdok. After running the command there are two options for export range:


18 • Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / IFC exports

• All circuits This option exports the whole electrical power system with every device connected behind a circuit that is connected to a switchboard.

• Circuits between switchboards This option only exports the switchboards and everything between them This is used when only the distribution system is wanted to be dimensioned.

IFC Calculation Import (MEICI)

With this function you can import your electrical power system back to MagiCAD from calculation software such as Febdok and update all the cables back to your drawings. Additional information is updated also for protective devices. This is shown in the circuit dialog’s PD Code field.

Note:

You have to connect everything you want to export with cables and circuits. You can only have one main switchboard so that MagiCAD and the calculation software know what the “starting point” is. This means that there has to be only one switchboard that is not connected to any other switchboard via cable and circuit. If MagiCAD finds several possible main switchboard candidates, it gives a message and the export is canceled.

To make calculation software read everything correctly, please define the number of used phases for junction boxes and switches also. An incorrect number might be understood wrong by the calculation software. This applies also to all other devices. Switchboards are automatically handled as three-phase devices.

Circuits that are not connected to a switchboard are not exported. You can see the circuits that fail the export in a message when running the export. Also circuits that are not connected to a switchboard but are in the area of a switchboard will not be exported.

If you do not define phases for circuits, the calculation software might handle them wrong. In such cases some software such as Febdok may read the phases from the previous device that is located upstream so because of the handling of switchboards as three-phase devices the circuits without phase information will most likely be handled as three-phase circuits.


Chapter 3. MagiCAD Electrical / Other changes • 19

IFC Schema is 2x3ge. Cable types get their name from cable description. Cable lengths are written for the cables as well as the installation code. Cables have to have exactly the same name in both MagiCAD and in the calculation software to understand the cable types.

Other changes The active power of the switchboard is now recognized by reports, dimension texts and part property line.

The Update drawing data function is now optimized so that it updates only the necessary data that is found from the objects that are in the drawing. This saves time because now MagiCAD does not have to check through every layer definition.

Devices have now checkboxes for all earthing styles in product data dialog: N, PE and PEN. These are for future purposes.

More snap points added for 2D symbols: center and quadrant.

Resolved issues Connection nodes can now be created successfully to other drawings even if a connection node has an elevation that is different from the elevation that the actual storey border has. Previously there were some limits that made the use of connection nodes too precise.

When continuing to draw from a connection node the properties of the selected object are forced to be used by the conflict dialog. You can see the forced properties in the Different Properties dialog.

When texting top and bottom heights MagiCAD shows the outer limit heights of the selected part. Previously it showed the heights from the clicked position and this sometimes lead to some false values with cable tray crossings.

Part property line and dimension texts now show only the installation point elevation from connection nodes when elevations are wanted to be shown. Previously there were some false values shown with top and bottom elevations.

Previously circuit number could hold only six characters. Now it can hold up to 10 characters.

When exporting an object into IFC that has an apostrophe ( ‘ ) inside some product data, the apostrophes are now changed to spaces because previously they made the IFC file unreadable.

The whole product note can now be copied to clipboard from reports. Previously it was limited to some amount of characters.

Now every variable can be shown in a report if needed. Previously there were some limitations.

Previously MagiCAD made a reduction if it was selected in the cable tray options when drawing a bend under 10 and over 2 degrees. Now the reduction “none” is forced in these situations and the trays are cut to straight pieces with slightly slanted installation. With bends less than or equal of 2 degrees MagiCAD interprets it so that the user has wanted to make a direct tray and draws it so.

Description has been added to the product field in Part Properties of a combination box. Previously there was only the product code.

The minimum value of cos phi for switchboards is reduced from 0.6 to 0.

Object ID is now written to the MagiCAD property set in IFC Export.


20 • / Resolved issues

MagiCAD property set is now written into IFC also for cables when they are selected to be exported.

Now object direction and position are taken from the 3D symbol (if an object has one) when making an IFC Export.

The previously hidden function MESCP has now a button: Show Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit Route.


Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room / Layer and color settings • 21

Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room

Layer and color settings It is now possible to define the layers and colors in MagiCAD Room. Default values for colors are the same as they have always been – that is, the drawings made with older Room versions look the same as earlier.

The layer and color settings can be defined in the Project Management dialog.

The Layer Definition dialog contains the following input data:

Layer definitions

• Name – name of the layer

• Color – color of the object. This color setting is the default color which will be created when the object is created to the drawing. These values can be changed also from AutoCAD’s layer management.

2D and 3D presentation

• Color – color of the object, ByLayer selections is available. If ByLayer is selected, the color is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

Colors will be updated automatically when exiting from the Project dialog. The colors are also updated when using Show Room Objects or 2D/3D functions.


22 • Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room / Air flow values by area or times per hour

Air flow values by area or times per hour It is now possible to define the air flow by using different methods. It can still be given manually, but it is now also possible to define airflow according to area, or how many times per hour it should be changed.

These values can be set also in the Project Management dialog. With Shift and Ctrl buttons, several rooms can be edited at the same time.


Common features of MagiCAD applications

Common features of MagiCAD applications Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. Installation 1 Before you begin........................................................................................................................1 Installation and start...................................................................................................................1

Installing the program..................................................................................................1 Starting the program....................................................................................................2 Menu and customization files......................................................................................2 Keeping the program up-to-date..................................................................................2

Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD 3 Demo projects............................................................................................................................3 Template drawings and projects ................................................................................................3

Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu 5 Common menu...........................................................................................................................5 MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences...................................................................................5

Main viewport .............................................................................................................5 “Presentation options” tab ...........................................................................................6 “Dimension texts” tab..................................................................................................7 “Hide options” tab .......................................................................................................8 “Misc” tab ................................................................................................................... 9

MagiCAD Electrical Viewport Preferences.............................................................................10 Clip + Rotate, Restore from Clip + Rotate ..............................................................................10 Error handling (Show messages) .............................................................................................11 Clear Garbage Layer................................................................................................................11 Drawing Cleaning Utility.........................................................................................................11 Help .........................................................................................................................................12

Chapter 4. Provision for Voids 13 Voids menu..............................................................................................................................13 Provision for voids...................................................................................................................13 Automatic void provisions.......................................................................................................13

Settings for automatic void provisions in the project management ...........................14 Import Provision for voids report ............................................................................................15

Chapter 5. Running Index 16 Settings for running index in the project management ............................................................16

Text formats ..............................................................................................................16 Text groups................................................................................................................17

Insert running index.................................................................................................................17 Edit running index ...................................................................................................................18 Remove Running Index ...........................................................................................................19

Chapter 6. Other common features 20 Unicode....................................................................................................................................20 Status .......................................................................................................................................21

iv • Contents Common features of MagiCAD applications

Save as 2007.11 format............................................................................................................22 Explode MagiCAD objects......................................................................................................23 COM interface .........................................................................................................................23


Chapter 1. Installation • 1

Chapter 1. Installation

Before you begin MagiCAD version 2008.5 is compatible with AutoCAD 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 and with the corresponding versions of AutoCAD Architecture (previously called Architectural Desktop) and AutoCAD MEP (previously called Autodesk Building Systems).

Administrator privileges are required for MagiCAD installations.

See “What is new in MagiCAD version 2008.5” documentation for the list of changes. Read the release notes carefully if you have used previous versions of MagiCAD.

Installation and start

Installing the program Installation of the program is described in MagiCAD Installation Guide, which is a help file that can be launched from the program CD.

MagiCAD Setup creates folder MagiCAD on the desktop and in the common program folder (Start Programs). The folder is visible to all users of the workstation.

See the “== READ ME FIRST ==” document before you start using the program.


2 • Chapter 1. Installation / Installation and start

Starting the program The shortcut for starting the program is MagiCAD (R16) or MagiCAD (R17) depending on the platform on which MagiCAD is used. R16 stands for 2006, whereas R17 stands for 2007 … 2009.

When you start the program for the first time with its shortcut, the following message may appear:

This is a normal situation, indicating that a non-existing profile was selected. The first start of MagiCAD creates a fresh AutoCAD profile with default settings, and you can modify it with your preferences as you can modify any AutoCAD profile.

Menu and customization files Compared to the older program versions, customization files or other user-modifiable files of MagiCAD 2008.5 are no longer in the program directory. This change has been made due to the restrictions of some operating systems. See the “Read Me First” document for more information.

Keeping the program up-to-date Updating MagiCAD can be done easily by using the Check for Updates function. The shortcut for the update link can be found in MagiCAD folder.


Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD / Demo projects • 3

Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD

Demo projects MagiCAD includes a demo project to make it easier for you to get acquainted with MagiCAD.

The demo project is located in the /Demo projects subdirectory of MagiCAD program directory.

Template drawings and projects

Template drawings Template drawings and template projects make it easier to start new projects, as it is possible to make templates for different purposes.

You can, for example, set AutoCAD’s variables (LTSCALE, SNAP, LIMITS …), layers, text styles and fonts (e.g. Cyrillic fonts) and other information that is stored in the DWG file.

When you create a new drawing in AutoCAD (File/New), select a suitable template (Use a Template). AutoCAD shows the templates that are located in the directory defined in AutoCAD’s profile; Tools/Options/ Files/Drawing Template File Location. It is possible to define the template directory other than the default directory that is defined for AutoCAD. MagiCAD template drawings will then not be mixed with AutoCAD’s template drawings.

You can copy the layout from any template as follows:

• Right-click the mouse on a layout name.

• Choose From Template.

• Find a suitable template and choose the layout.

• Rename the layout by right-clicking the mouse and choosing Rename.

• You can change the layout settings with Page Setup.

In Model space the objects are always drawn full size.


4 • Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD / Template drawings and projects

The paper sizes in the template drawings are defined at 1:1 scale, which means that the viewport must be scaled with ZOOM using the 1/50xp factor if you wish to scale the contents in 1:50. The output is printed in 1:1 scale.

It is possible to modify the template project as desired and save it with a different name (file extension DWT). If MagiCAD's Template subdirectory is saved in the Drawing Template File Location setting of MagiCAD's profile, only the template drawings in the particular directory appear when a new drawing is created.

Template projects Template projects have the same main principle as template drawings. In the template projects, it is possible to define storey list, devices, dimension line styles, layer names, sizing criteria, duct/pipe series and insulation series. You can make different template projects for different purposes, and it is recommended to save them all to a previously defined location (for example, c:\magicad\template).

A template project consists of

• line types (*.LIN)

• product database (*.QPD), that contains technical data

• project database (*.EPJ), that contains eg. sizing criteria, layers, and dimension line styles

It is possible to save the template drawings and template projects to a network server. They are then available to all MagiCAD users in the company. You can use any project as a template project.


Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / Common menu • 5

Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu

Common menu

This toolbar contains the functions that are common to all MagiCAD applications:

• MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences

• MagiCAD Electrical Viewport Preferences

• Clip & Rotate

• Restore from Clip & Rotate

• Provision for Voids

• Show Messages

• Clear Garbage Layer

• Drawing Cleaning Utility

• Help

MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences With this function you can set different presentations (1D, 2D, 3D) to the objects for each viewport separately. You can also set these preferences for the viewports in the layout windows.

In the Viewport Preferences dialog you can also choose how the reference texts are displayed in each viewport, and set the hiding options for ducts and pipes.

Main viewport If the same viewport settings are used in several different viewports, it is possible to select the main viewport. Main viewport settings and hide information can be used in other viewports. Set Is main viewport in Viewport


6 • Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences

Preferences to set the viewport as a main viewport. To make viewport follow the main viewport’s graphics settings, select Follow main viewport. When Follow main viewport is set, all viewport settings are grayed out, and the settings of the main viewport are shown. Using the main viewport also speeds up saving.

Note: When the main viewport is set, the viewport must be in model space. There can be only one main viewport at time.

If hide or reset hide is run in the main viewport, all viewports which are set to Follow main viewport are also regenerated.

If hide or reset hide is run in a viewport which is set to Follow main viewport, there is a message: “Hide/reset hide is not possible in the current viewport because it is set to follow the main viewport’s settings”

“Presentation options” tab


Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences • 7

• Presentation – select between 1D (wireframe), Active2D, and 3D

• 2D Presentation – Presentation of the pipe components in 2D can be 3D or 1D (symbol)

• Insulation – visibility of the insulation

• 1D - Symbols – in the Size coefficient field you can set the common scale factor (e.g. 1:100) for plotting. You can also set the limit for displaying the vertical pipes with their own dimensions also in 1D.

• Symbol Options – opens a dialog where you can select the presentation of vertical ducts in 2D and vertical pipes in 1D.

• Centerline – with these options you can define whether to display the centerline of the ducts and pipes. For the pipes you can define a minimum diameter; the centerline is not displayed in the smaller pipes even though the option is selected.

• Defaults – Load default preferences loads default values for viewport preferences. Use these settings for new viewports saves the current settings as default values. Note: default values can be loaded/saved from/to drawing or project. This is defined in project management (Project settings Default viewport preferences)

“Dimension texts” tab

• Show – with these options you can select which texts are displayed in

the viewport. All = all texts are displayed. Placed in the current view… = only the texts are shown which are placed in the active viewport.


8 • Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences

… and in selected views = optionally, you can select other views besides the active view.

• Orientation – the orientation for the reference texts By view = according to the view (i.e. the texts appear “straight” also in the isometric view) By original UCS = according to the user coordinate system

• Automatic Dimension Texts – if this option is selected, the automatic dimension texts are always placed to the orientation that is selected in the Automatic text settings. If this option is not selected, also the automatic dimension texts follow the Orientation option.

“Hide options” tab

• Hidden Linetype – select either dashed or invisible line as the

presentation of the hidden ducts/pipes.

• Distances – defines the distance between the hidden line and the continuous line, and the minimum length of the ducts/pipes. The minimum length can be defined only if invisible linetype has been selected.

• Auto Hide – if this option is selected, hiding is carried out in the viewport when the drawing is saved. NOTE: You must also set the hiding active in the Drawing Preferences (Enable autohide when saving).


Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences • 9

“Misc” tab

• Open Ends – select whether to draw the arrows to the open ends of

ducts and pipes

• Storey Origin –presentation of the storey boundaries

• Section Mark –presentation of the section mark boundary


10 • Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / MagiCAD Electrical Viewport Preferences

MagiCAD Electrical Viewport Preferences With this function you can select the presentation (wireframe/1D, 2D, 3D) of MagiCAD Electrical objects. The 3D presentation of the devices requires that a 3D object has been selected to the device in the project management.

The settings that are made in the Viewport Preferences dialog are viewport-specific, that is, in each viewport (also in the layout windows) it is possible to display the reference texts in different orientations and the objects with different presentations.

Clip + Rotate, Restore from Clip + Rotate With this function you can easily edit the system in the selected side view.

First show the front edge and then the rear edge of the area containing the objects. Usually the selected parts are rotated to the active view so that the viewpoint is at the front edge.

The following commandline option can be used to affect the end result of the function:

• oBject – if this option is selected, the selection is not made by defining the front and rear edge; instead, MagiCAD asks first to show a part whose direction is used as the direction of the area, and then to show the dimension of the selection area.

The following setting can be made in the Options dialog:

• Viewport – use this option to select whether the rotated image is brought to the same viewport or MagiCAD prompts you to show another viewport.

• Distances affects the handling of the selected objects. Width defines the width of the area. Bottom and Top have no effect on the selected objects; instead, these settings are used to select the default height level that is zoomed.

Restore from Clip + Rotate restores the original view. If several viewport is used, this function must be run in the viewport where the side view is.


Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / Error handling (Show messages) • 11

Error handling (Show messages)

With this function you can examine the error situations that may occur in the design process (e.g. when the MAGIMOV command is used), calculations, collision control, etc. The Show Messages dialog contains information on these error situations, for instance, the system, storey, part type and error type. You can define the messages according to these properties. Besides other information about the error situations, their location is showed in the dialog (as coordinates).

1. It is possible to show error ticks at the error/warning locations. When you click an error in the list and click the Mark Selected Error and Zoom button, the error tick appears at the location where the error occurs, and the area is zoomed. If you click the Mark All Errors button, all locations with errors and warnings are showed with error ticks. You can remove the error ticks with the Clear Garbage Layer function (MAGIEMP command).

2. The dialog saves its size, location, and other settings as the default values for the next use.

3. When Keep calculated data despite errors is selected, the information that can be updated will be updated to the drawing. Otherwise the drawing is not updated.

4. The coordinates in the Pos column are selected between Floor and UCS coordinates. If UCS coordinates are selected, only the coordinates of the active storey are showed.

Clear Garbage Layer With this function you can remove the error ticks and Part Property Line output from the drawing.

Drawing Cleaning Utility With this utility you can change all colors to a desired color in the architectural drawing, and also run AUDIT, RECOVER, and PURGE.

Open the architectural drawing, click the Drawing Cleaning Utility toolbar button, select the functions you want to use and the color, and click Ok.


12 • Chapter 3. Functions in “MagiCAD Common” menu / Help

Help Displays the online help of MagiCAD.


Chapter 4. Provision for Voids / Voids menu • 13

Chapter 4. Provision for Voids

Voids menu

This toolbar is a flyout toolbar under “MagiCAD Common” containing the following functions:

• Provision for Voids

• Automatic Void Provisions

• Import Provision for Voids Report

Provision for voids With provision for voids you can reserve place for installations in the walls and structures. Provision for voids (MAGIVP) command creates provision for void manually. It shows a dialog which asks the required information (including sizes) and asks for position, direction and installation height.

When installing provision for voids, building service information can be set to the provision for voids. Owner information for a single provision for void is constructed from checkboxes in the Provision for voids dialog. For example, if ventilation checkbox is checked, ventilation text defined in the project dialog is defined as the owner information. If several checkboxes are checked, a separator character (+) is used between them. It is also possible to give free text as building service information in the Note field.

Automatic void provisions When you have a 3D model from MagiCAD Room or other architectural / structural design programs, MagiCAD can make provision for voids automatically according to the model. Automatic void provisions (MAGIVP) command asks for an area, runs a special collision control between HP&V or Electrical objects and other objects with geometry (normally structures), and creates provision for voids automatically with the current settings.

Automatic provision for void function automatically sets the owner information according to the MagiCAD object which required the void.


14 • Chapter 4. Provision for Voids / Automatic void provisions

Settings for automatic void provisions in the project management

• Offset – There are separate offset settings for rectangular (h1) and

circular voids (h2). Minimum distance between separate voids can also be defined (h3) (if the voids were closer to each other, they would be combined). The user can also define that from a certain diameter the circular voids become rectangular voids (maximum diameter for circular void). It is also possible to choose not to create a void if the void would be too small (minimum equivalent diameter for void).

• Rounding limits - The values are in millimeters.

o Rounding value - this is used to round the value to the nearest multiple of the rounding value upwards. For example, if the Automatic Void Provision function created a provision for voids with size 154x154 and the rounding value were 10, the resulting size would be 160x160 – if the rounding value were 25, the resulting size would be 175x175.

o RoundingDownLimit - this value can be used to avoid rounding to produce too large voids. For example, if the offset for rectangular void were 20 mm and a pipe's outer diameter were 114 mm (and 100 mm were the maximum diameter for circular void), the result before rounding would be 114+20+20 => 154 mm x 154 mm. If the rounding value were 25 mm, after rounding the size of the void would be 175 mm x 175 mm. That could be a too wide gap, but with the rounding down value one can round small exceeding of the rounding value downwards. If the rounding value of 5 mm were used, the resulting size would be 150 mm x 150 mm.

• Owner - When installing provision for voids, the building service information can be set to the provision for voids. Owner information for a single provision for void is constructed from checkboxes in the Provision for voids dialog. If e.g. the ventilation checkbox is checked, the ventilation text defined in the project dialog is defined as the owner information. If several checkboxes are checked, a separator character


Chapter 4. Provision for Voids / Import Provision for voids report • 15

(+) is used between them. Automatic provision for void creation automatically sets the owner information according to the MagiCAD object which required the void.

Import Provision for voids report Import Provision for voids report (MCVPR) command asks for a file with a special format (*.xsr). This file includes the following information from the constructor:

• Status from the constructor (Provision for Voids approved, declined or changed)

• Feedback from the constructor

*.xsr. file can be created in Tekla Structures software.


16 • Chapter 5. Running Index / Settings for running index in the project management

Chapter 5. Running Index

Settings for running index in the project management

Text formats

• Name – text part of the running index, e.g. P like a pump TE like a

temperature sensor.

• Description – description of the text format

• First number – the smallest accepted number in this format

• Number of digits – How many numbers are used to show a number part of running index e.g 3 => 001, 2 => 01.

• Text group – Selected text group for this format. Needed only for filtering when inserting running index to objects. Name of text group can be also shown in dimension text etc. This field is optional

• Allow the same index in different system – If this is selected, the same index can be in different systems.

The first running index of this example would be G3 PF 001.

NOTE ! each string (G3, PF, 001) can be added separately to a dimension text.


Chapter 5. Running Index / Insert running index • 17

Text groups

• Name – text part of the running index

• Description – description of the text group

NOTE ! You do not even need to define the text groups, if you do not have many different formats. Text groups are used to filter different kind of formats when inserting running index to objects. Name of text group can be also shown in dimension text etc.

Insert running index Insert running index by selecting the Insert Running Index command. Install Running Index dialog opens automatically if the command is selected first time. Later you can open this dialog by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Options.

• Text Group – Used for filtering the Text field

• Text – select the format

• From object – copies the format from an object

• Number – shows the next used number. If nothing is shown, press “Next free…”

• Use first available number – selects the first available number, which has to be bigger than the “first number”. If e.g. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19 are used, the next free is 15.


18 • Chapter 5. Running Index / Edit running index

• Use given number or next available – you can give the smallest allowed number, which has to be bigger than “First number” in format.

• Next Free – gives the next free number. If you have decided to allow the same numbers in different systems, the system is asked.

• Use the same number for all indexes – if this option is selected, you can insert the same numbers as many times as you prefer.

• Check indexes from other model drawings – if this is selected, MagiCAD also checks that there are no same indexes in other model drawings. It is checked when “Install” , ”Free”or ”Edit” button is pressed.

• Add Part Property Line – If this selected, MagiCAD automatically adds PartPropertyLine to objects after installing the Running Index.

• Edit… – This function is for checking, renumbering, removing of running indexes. See “Edit running index”.

When the settings have been defined, insert the running index to objects by selecting Install. After installing the running index to the first object, object type is locked for this installing session. It means that when you install the running index e.g. to a socket, also the next object has to be a socket. MagiCAD does not give any other object types to the selection. When you quit and restart the command, the object type locking is released.

Edit running index Edit running index by selecting the Insert Running Index command. Install Running Index dialog opens automatically if the command is selected for the first time. Later you can open this dialog by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Options. From Install Running Index-dialog select Edit... opens Modify Running Indexes-dialog.

• Filter – It is for filtering which Running indexes are shown in the dialog.

• Indexes – The running indexes in current project and included in the filter.

• Text – Running index text format

• Index – these numbers have been used. If Compressed is selected only first and last number is shown.

• Text – Running index group format

• Part type – part type which have been selected


Chapter 5. Running Index / Remove Running Index • 19

• System – system of the object

• Drawing – drawing where index has been inserted. Name is shown as a relative path.

• File Status – ”Empty”: drawing is opened and ready for editing (editing of other than the current dwg is not possible in MagiCAD Electrical); “Not opened”: not opened, but it could be opened; “Locked”: someone else has opened the drawing

• Note – all possible annotation is displayed here

It is possible to select several rows by using the Shift -ja Ctrl buttons. By using the Select All button you can select all rows, and with the Deselect All button you can deselect all rows.

• Current Values of Selected – The first and last number of the selected Indexes.

• New Values – If you want to renumber the indexes, you can either give the new first or last number and press the ”Apply” button. Gaps are removed, if ”Remove gaps” is selected.

Remove Running Index Use the Remove Running Index function to remove the running index from the object.


20 • Chapter 6. Other common features / Unicode

Chapter 6. Other common features

Unicode It is now possible to select either National or Unicode character set in MagiCAD HP&V, Electrical and Room. (National was used in the previous versions.)

Unicode allows using e.g. Russian or Chinese characters. The selection is made in the Project Settings section of the project management dialog.

When the character set is changed from National to Unicode, the program gives a warning about the project becoming incompatible with older MagiCAD versions. If OK is clicked, the program converts the project suitable for Unicode character set.

When the character set is changed from Unicode to National, the program gives a warning that characters may disappear (in practice they will appear as question marks).


Chapter 6. Other common features / Status • 21

Status It is possible to define different kind of status definitions in the project management dialog. You can set line type, color and line weight settings for the status.

• General – General information for the status.

o Name – identifier of the status. This ID appears when the status is selected, and it is possible to include it in reference texts and reports.

o Description – description of the status. It appears when the status is selected.

o Layer variable – Identifier that will be included in the layer name {STV}

o Add to BOM – This must be selected if objects with this status are intended to be included in the BOM.

o Locked sizes (MagiCAD HP&V only) – This must be selected if the sizing function may not change the sizes of the ducts/pipes with this status.

• Data by system group – color and linetype settings

o Use same settings for all system groups – if this option is selected, the settings are the same for all system groups

o Settings – status of the color, linetype and line weight.

The status can be determined while drawing the duct/pipe or when installing the devices. It is also possible to determine the status afterwards with Change Properties.

-Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.


22 • Chapter 6. Other common features / Save as 2007.11 format

Save as 2007.11 format It is possible to save the drawings to older MagiCAD format (2007.11). This is necessary, for example, if the subcontractors are still using the older MagiCAD version.

Before you start the function, open one of the drawings that will be saved in the older format and close other drawings. All drawings attached to the project(s) will be saved in the older format automatically. If the drawing is attached, for example, to MagiCAD HP&V and Electrical projects, the objects of both applications will be saved in the older format.

Run the command MAGISAVEAS200711 (SAVE200711).

• Project files – MagiCAD projects that are found in the directory

• Source directory – main directory, under which the drawings to be converted are found

• Destination directory – main directory, to which the drawings will be saved. The function creates the same subdirectories that are found in the original project. It is possible to create the directory while browsing. It is not possible to save the drawings to the same directory that contains the original drawings (or its subdirectories).


Chapter 6. Other common features / Explode MagiCAD objects • 23

• Status and Drawing –The preview window displays the drawings to be handled, and their status

o Status – the status of the drawing; when the drawing is processed, it shows whether saving succeeded

o Drawing – the drawing to be handled

Convert starts saving the drawings.

Explode MagiCAD objects With this function you can explode MagiCAD objects into AutoCAD blocks. You can then explode the blocks into lines with AutoCAD's EXPLODE command. The layer structure of the drawing, as well as the height levels of the objects, is not changed.

Explode function for HP&V objects: MAGIEXP

Explode function for Electrical objects: MEEXPLODE

MagiCAD no longer recognizes objects that you have exploded, and therefore you cannot obtain any information about the parts with MagiCAD's commands.

COM interface It is possible to transfer data between external programs and MagiCAD via MagiCAD COM interface.


MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation

MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. General 1 About MagiCAD Heating & Piping and Ventilation.................................................................1

How MagiCAD builds a project ..................................................................................1

Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD 2 Creating a new project ...............................................................................................................2 The use of connection nodes......................................................................................................4 Product modeling.......................................................................................................................4

Chapter 3. List of commands 5 Project Manager menu...............................................................................................................5 Ventilation menu (drawing functions) .......................................................................................6 Air Devices menu ......................................................................................................................7 Heating & Piping menu (drawing functions).............................................................................8 Edit menu.................................................................................................................................10 Connection Node menu ...........................................................................................................12 Sections menu..........................................................................................................................12 View menu...............................................................................................................................13 Calculations menu ...................................................................................................................14 Documentation menu...............................................................................................................15 Other MagiCAD functions.......................................................................................................16

Chapter 4. Command Reference 17 Project Manager menu.............................................................................................................17

Project........................................................................................................................17 Creating a new project...............................................................................................18 Line weights, Layers and linetypes ........................................................................... 21 Systems......................................................................................................................23 Selecting products for the project .............................................................................. 27 Insulation series......................................................................................................... 28 Duct and pipe series...................................................................................................29 Sizing methods ..........................................................................................................30 Heat transfer media....................................................................................................31 Dimension text ..........................................................................................................31 Provision for voids ....................................................................................................33 Variable names (user given names for variables) ......................................................34 Variable sets / Object ID formats ..............................................................................35 Variable sets / Running index....................................................................................35 User Preferences........................................................................................................35 Update Drawing Data ................................................................................................36 IFC Export................................................................................................................. 36

Ventilation menu (drawing functions) .....................................................................................39 Duct ...........................................................................................................................39 Ductwork Components.............................................................................................. 42 Distribution Box ........................................................................................................ 43 Cleaning Cover..........................................................................................................43 Flow Arrow ...............................................................................................................43

iv • Contents MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation

Air Devices menu ....................................................................................................................45 Air Device ................................................................................................................. 45

Heating & Piping menu (drawing functions)...........................................................................47 Supply and Return Pipes ...........................................................................................47 Radiator .....................................................................................................................51 Valve .........................................................................................................................52 Other Pipe Component ..............................................................................................53 Other Pipe Device .....................................................................................................54 Manifold Pipe ............................................................................................................54 Sprinkler .................................................................................................................... 55 Sprinkler pipe ............................................................................................................56 Connect Sprinklers to Pipe ........................................................................................57 Water/Special, 1-3 pipes............................................................................................59 Water and Sewer Point ..............................................................................................60 Water Radiator ..........................................................................................................61 Insert Substation ........................................................................................................61 Edit Substation ..........................................................................................................66 Sewage Pipe ..............................................................................................................66 Other Sewer Component ...........................................................................................67 Modeling 2D symbols ...............................................................................................67

Edit menu.................................................................................................................................69 Part Properties ...........................................................................................................69 Branch Copy..............................................................................................................70 Branch Erase..............................................................................................................70 Part Erase...................................................................................................................70 Move Parts.................................................................................................................70 Side Movement..........................................................................................................71 Change Properties......................................................................................................71 Find and Replace .......................................................................................................73 Break Duct or Pipe ....................................................................................................74 Joint Part.................................................................................................................... 74 Connect Node ............................................................................................................74 Disconnect Node .......................................................................................................75 Connection Node Report ...........................................................................................75 Dimension Texts........................................................................................................75 Automatic Dimension Texts......................................................................................75 Insert running index...................................................................................................76 Removing Running Index..........................................................................................79 Set MagiCAD Data to AutoCAD Objects .................................................................79

Sections menu..........................................................................................................................79 Section Marks............................................................................................................79 Make Section.............................................................................................................81 Quick Section ............................................................................................................82

View menu...............................................................................................................................83 Drawing Preferences .................................................................................................83 Hide, Reset Hide........................................................................................................83 Show Selected Parts Only, Show All Parts ............................................................... 84 Part Property Line .....................................................................................................84 Collision Control .......................................................................................................85

Calculations menu ...................................................................................................................87 Flow Summation .......................................................................................................87 Sizing.........................................................................................................................87 Balancing...................................................................................................................88 Flow Route Examination...........................................................................................89 Sound Calculation of Flow Route .............................................................................89 Sound Calculation of All Flow Routes......................................................................90 Bill of Materials.........................................................................................................90 Special cases in the ductworks ..................................................................................91

Documentation menu...............................................................................................................94 Type Free Text, Edit Free Text ................................................................................. 94

MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation Contents • v

Revision Arrow .........................................................................................................95 Revision Cloud ..........................................................................................................95 Construction Boundary..............................................................................................95

Other MagiCAD functions.......................................................................................................96 Faster drawing with “+” grips ...................................................................................96 Explode MagiCAD Objects (magiexp) .....................................................................96 AutoCAD's editing functions ....................................................................................96 COM interface........................................................................................................... 96

Appendix A: Other information 97 AutoCAD's features .................................................................................................................97

Plotting ......................................................................................................................97 Visual styles of AutoCAD 2007................................................................................ 98

Known problems......................................................................................................................98 Other issues..............................................................................................................................98

vi • Contents MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation


Chapter 1. General • 1

Chapter 1. General

About MagiCAD Heating & Piping and Ventilation

How MagiCAD builds a project MagiCAD is a program which helps you build a 3D model of your project. As well as providing the tools to help you draw in 3D MagiCAD also has the tools to calculate the performance of the systems you have designed.

Design is about developing ideas, and seeing if they will work.

MagiCAD allows you to develop 3D models of the different systems in your project, calculate the performance, overlay them and check for clashes between them and with the building structure.

The core philosophy behind MagiCAD is that of the single 3D model. Each component of the system is drawn once in its real world position. The operational parameters of each component are stored as part of the component model. By simply building the 3D model MagiCAD can calculate how the system will perform.

MagiCAD provides a number of helpful tools to help you build the model.

The model can be built up from parts created in a number of different files and brought together to create the complete model. The system calculations can be limited to a single branch, the current drawing or the whole project.


2 • Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD

Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD

Creating a new project Create a new project as follows:

1. Create a new project directory structure using eg. Windows’ Explorer. Copy the architect drawings, which you need in the project, to the directory. You can use any directory name you prefer.

2. Create a new drawing (File/New). Use this drawing when you create a suitable template drawing (.DWT).

3. Save your drawing to the project directory (File/Save As). You must save the drawing before using any of MagiCAD’s functions.

4. Start MagiCAD’s project management (Project).

5. Create a new project selecting a suitable template. The location of your project can be any directory that exists on an upper level of you drawing directory towards the root directory of the disk drive. If MagiCAD finds an existing project, you can attach the drawing to it by selecting it from the list (Select…)

6. Create and edit the storey list. Define a storey for each drawing. If a storey is divided into several drawings, define a storey for each drawing and set their locations side by side. In the storey list, the location (x,y,z) and size (a,b,h) of each storey are given. You must define the storey list correctly to make sure that the connection nodes between storeys work as intended. NB: If there is already a MagiCAD Room project file of the project, you can import the storey list from the MagiCAD Room project (.MRD file extension).

7. Select the storey that represents your drawing (Active Storey).

8. Set the storey origin, i.e. show the point that is the corner of the storey defined in the storey list. The best choice is usually the point that is easy to point in all the storeys that are on top of each other (for instance, the corner of the building or a certain point in a module grid). In addition, MagiCAD asks you to show the direction of the positive x-axis.

Handle the other drawings within the same project as described above, except select the project instead of phases 5 and 6.


Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD • 3

If the project contains storeys that are almost alike, you can save a drawing with a different name and choose the storey that represents it. In addition, you need to connect the connection nodes. If the connection node numbers at each end of the vertical duct/pipe are the same, it makes the copying process easier as you do not have to change the connection node numbers when you copy the drawings.

Storey list After you have created the project, check the storey list. The storey list editor contains the following functions (which you find by clicking the right button in the right pane):

• Edit (edit an existing storey)

• Insert (insert a new storey to the selected location)

• Delete (delete a storey)

• Copy (copy a storey to be pasted to another location)

• Paste (paste the copied storey to the selected location)

• Import... (read the storey definitions from a MagiCAD Room project)

The storey list contains the storey ID, the description (Name), location in relation to other drawings (x,y,z), dimensions (a,b) and height (h).

Setting the storey origin, UCS coordinates For each drawing, select the storey that the drawing represents, and then set the storey origin. All the connections to the other drawings (connection nodes) must be located inside the rectangle that is defined in the project information of the storey. You must make these definitions before you can start drawing with MagiCAD.

You can set the storey origin either by pointing with the mouse or giving the coordinates at the command prompt. If you use AutoCAD’s Object snap, be sure that your storey origin has the same height level as the storey has. Give the height levels in the drawing in relation to the storey origin.

When the location of the storey origin is set, MagiCAD asks you to show the positive X-axis. You can also give the rotation angle at the command line. The positive x-axis will represent the direction of the a-dimension side.

If the building, or a part of it, is slantwise in the architect drawing, and you wish to work using the right angle setting, and set the texts in the same direction as the building, you can rotate the user coordinates (UCS) according to the building. If the UCSFOLLOW variable is set to 1, the drawing will rotate according to the coordinates that are set.

For each drawing, it is worthwhile to define the user coordinates according to the storey origin. You can save them with a different name (Tools/Named UCS) by renaming (Rename) the active (Unnamed) user coordinates that are defined according to the storey origin.

You can freely change the user coordinates while you work, but, for example, MagiCAD gives the coordinates in error messages in the coordinates that are set according to the storey origin. That is, it is easy to return to the current coordinates by setting the named user coordinates active (current).


4 • Chapter 2. How to start with MagiCAD

The use of connection nodes When a duct or pipe continues from one storey to another, the systems are connected to each other with connection nodes.

In addition, when using connection nodes it is possible to join two ducts or pipes to each other without drawing a joining duct/pipe (This connection node). Connection nodes can also be used when the entire network is not intended to be modeled (None connection node); in this case, flow rate and pressure drop are given to the system, and power and pressure drop are given to the heating/cooling systems. MagiCAD calculates the flow rate in the node using the power and the differential temperature of the system.

Use the Connection node Connection command to search the connection nodes eg. from a different storey. It is also possible to use this command for joining two connection nodes, which exist on the storeys that are next to each other. In this case, the connection nodes must have the same ID and they must belong to the same system.

If the drawings representing different storeys are almost alike, you can copy them. In this case, the connection node ID numbering remains similar. It is reasonable to use the connection nodes with the same ID in both ends of the vertical duct/pipe. Copying the drawings and connecting the connection nodes is then easier.

Product modeling You can model your own products for MagiCAD with the MagiCAD Product Modeller application.

The user-defined parts can be modeled to USER*.QPD files that are shipped with the program, or to product files that are copied from these files (not to manufacturer-supplied databases). You cannot modify manufacturer-supplied databases without a password.

Product modeling is described in a separate manual.

Choose the user-defined product to the project like any other product.


Chapter 3. List of commands • 5

Chapter 3. List of commands

Project Manager menu

Project

This function opens the Select Project dialog, where you can attach the drawing to a project or create a new project. When a project has been created or the drawing has been attached to an existing project, the project management dialog opens and you can define the relations between the projects, storeys and drawings, select the desired products to the project, define dimension text styles, etc. Practically all definitions that apply to the entire project are made in this dialog.

User Preferences (MAGIUSR)

With this function you can set the directory containing the product databases. You can also set here the size of the search circle. The settings are saved in the user registry.

Update Drawing Data

With this function you can update object properties (e.g. Layer, line weight, Device symbol, National code, Running index), which are changed in Project Management., to the drawing.

Calculations

You can run the calculation functions either from a separate Calculations toolbar or from a flyout toolbar of the project manager toolbar.

Documentation

You can run the functions of the additional markings either from a separate Documentation toolbar or from a flyout toolbar of the project manager toolbar.

IFC Export…

With this function you can export MagiCAD model in the IFC format. IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) is an international standard for defining the product models in the building services. It is a method for sharing and distributing the information between different software applications.

Plug-ins (MAGIPLG)

Use this function to start the possible external utilities (plug-ins).


6 • Chapter 3. List of commands

Ventilation menu (drawing functions)

Duct (MAGIDUC)

Ducts, branches, and connections to air devices are all drawn with this function.

Define the active duct size, insulation, and default types for T-pieces and bends, with the drawing options.

The default action of this function is to connect to a duct or an air device. In this case, the cursor has a search circle. If you start drawing from an empty space, use the noConnect option (the search circle then disappears).

It is also possible to select a part and start drawing from the appearing “+” grip. “+” grip is shown as bolded plus sign when the object is selected. Click “+” grip to start drawing. When clicking the middle “+” grip, it is also possible to show the place from where to start drawing.

You can rotate the Angle of the coordinates for the drawing session by showing two points, deriving the angle from an existing MagiCAD object, or giving it in relation with the current angle. With the Connection node option, you can transfer flow rates between drawings (that is, vertical ducts), or you can replace, for instance, a part of the ductwork (none type connection node). Make the height level changes with the Z option.

Fire Damper (MAGIFIR)

Choose a fire damper and place it into a duct.

Flow Damper (MAGIFLO)

This function is similar to the fire damper function.

Silencer (MAGISIL)


Fan (MAGIFAN)


Other component (MAGIOTH)


Distribution Box (MAGIBOX)

Define the dimensions for the distribution box and place it into an empty space or a duct.

Cleaning Cover (MAGICCR)

Place a cleaning cover to a duct.

Flow Arrow (MAGIFAR)

Place the airflow arrows of the air terminal devices.



Choose the number and direction of the arrows with the command options. With these options you can also define the types of the supply air / exhaust air / freely placed flow arrows.

Air Devices menu

Note: This toolbar is a flyout toolbar that is included in the Ventilation toolbar.

Air Device (MAGIDEV)

Set the airflow for a air device, select the device and place it either into an empty space or to a duct end. You can affect the direction of the air devices with the Direction option.

Supply Air Device (MAGIDSU)

This function is similar to the Air device.

Extract Air Device (MAGIDEX)


Outdoor Air Device (MAGIOUT)


Exhaust Air Device (MAGIDET)




Heating & Piping menu (drawing functions)

Supply and Return Pipes (MAGIPSR)

Draw all heating/cooling system pipes, branches, and connections to the radiators with this function. Define the pipe size, insulation, and pipe spacing with the drawing options.

You can choose the pipe types from a flyout toolbar: supply pipe (MAGIPSU); return pipe (MAGIPRE).

The default action of this function is to connect to a pipe or a radiator. In this case, the cursor has a search circle. If you start drawing from an empty space, use the noConnect option (the search circle then disappears).

It is also possible to select a part and start drawing from the appearing “+” grip. “+” grip is shown as bolded plus sign when the object is selected. Click “+” grip to start drawing. When clicking the middle “+” grip, it is also possible to show the place from where to start drawing.

You can rotate the Angle of the coordinates for the drawing session by showing two points, deriving the angle from an existing MagiCAD object, or giving it in relation with the current angle. With the Connection node option, you can transfer flow rates between drawings (that is, vertical pipes), or you can replace, for instance, a part of the system (none type connection node).

Use the Z option for the height level changes.

Radiator (MAGIRAD)

When you place a radiator, calculate the radiator capacity (this applies to radiators in the manufacturer databases), and select the radiator size, radiator valve and pipe connection points. Choose the direction of the radiator with the Direction option.

Valve (MAGIVAL)

Use this function to place radiator/zone/stop/other valves to pipes. You can also select, create and modify the drawing symbols for the valves.

Angle valves can be placed to the angles of the pipe system.

If you place a differential pressure valve, MagiCAD asks the pressure drop for the riser. If you use this kind of valve, the other line must contain a measuring valve. You can use any valve for this purpose.

Other Pipe Component (MAGIOTP)

Use this function to place the pipe components (water meter, filter, pump, expansion vessel, etc). You can also select a symbol for the component, create new symbols, and modify existing symbols.

Other Pipe Device (MAGIOPD)



With this function, you can place either manufacturer-supplied (e.g. return air unit) or user-modeled power consumption points into an empty space. Depending on the modeling method, MagiCAD asks the power and pressure loss, or power only. It is possible to model either actual dimensions or only connection points to the device. MagiCAD calculates the water flow rate according to the differential temperature, which is you have either defined for the system or given when placing the products.

Manifold Pipe (MAGIMANIFOLD)

Manifold is a pipe part with the main connection and a variable number of sub-pipes with equal distances between the subpipes. The directions of the main pipe and sub-pipes can be changed individually.

Sprinklers

With these functions you can place the sprinklers (MAGISPR), draw sprinkler pipes (MAGISPP), and connect the sprinklers to the pipe (MAGISPC).

Cold, Hot, and Circulation Water Pipes (MAGIPAL)

Draw all water system pipes, branches, and connections to the water points with this function. Define the pipe size, insulation, and pipe spacing with the drawing options. You can choose the pipe types from a flyout toolbar: cold water pipe (MAGIPCO); hot water pipe (MAGIPHO); circulation water pipe (MAGICPI); cold and hot water pipes (MAGIPCH); hot and circulation water pipes (MAGIPHC).

You can rotate the Angle of the coordinates for the drawing session by showing two points, deriving the angle from an existing MagiCAD object, or giving it in relation with the current angle. With the Connection node option, you can transfer flow rates between drawings (that is, vertical pipes), or you can replace, for instance, a part of the system (none type connection node).

When you draw only cold water pipe, you can make a connection between cold water pipe and hot water pipe using the Hot water joint option. When you draw only hot water pipe, you can make a connection between hot water pipe and circulation water pipe using the Return joint option.

Use the Z option for the height level changes.

Water and Sewer Point (MAGIWDE)

With this function, you can place a tap water connection, a sewer connection, or both. You can change the default height levels that are defined in the product databases. You can also change the flow rate and the proportional locations between the water and the sewer points.

Water Radiator (MAGIWRA)

When you place a radiator for a hot water system, calculate the radiator capacity (this applies to radiators in the manufacturer databases), and select the radiator size, radiator valve and pipe connection points.

Insert Substation… (MAGIHEATEXCHANGER)

You can define a substation, which can contain the desired number of heating circuits and water heaters. You can connect the heating and water pipes to the substation, so open ends are not needed except the cold water pipe that is entering the building. Neither it is necessary to use old kind of hot water joints any more.

Edit Substation… (MAGIHEATEXCHANGEREDIT)

With this function you can modify an existing substation.

Sewage Pipe (MAGISEW)

Draw all sewage pipes and sewer point connections with this function.



Usually Smart routing is used, which means that MagiCAD tends to draw all connections with standard parts. In this case, the pipe must descend or be horizontal in the flow direction. When you start drawing from a sewer point, MagiCAD automatically sets the sewer fall descending. In addition, MagiCAD checks the suitability of the connection, and changes the fall direction if necessary. AutoCAD's Polar tracking is a convenient tool when drawing sewers.

You can rotate the Angle of the coordinates for the drawing session by showing two points, deriving the angle from an existing MagiCAD object, or giving it in relation with the current angle.

When you connect to the trunk sewer, MagiCAD defines also the length of the bevel, depending on how the connection is made to the trunk sewer. MagiCAD ”intelligently” decides to set a long or a short bevel according to the distance between the search circle and the perpendicular connection point in the trunk sewer (Connect option).

With the Connection node option, you can transfer flow rates between drawings (that is, vertical pipes), or you can replace, for instance, a part of the system (none type connection node).

Other Sewer Component (MAGIOSC)

Use this function to place cleaning covers, fire stops, and other components for the sewer. You can also select a symbol for the component, create new symbols, and modify existing symbols.

Edit menu

Part Properties (MAGIPPR)

With this function, you can examine or edit the properties of an individual part. This function varies depending on the selected MagiCAD object.

Branch Copy (MAGICPY)

You can use this function for copying branches in ductworks, pipe systems and sewer systems. First show the start point, and then show the branch to copy. With pipes you must show each pipe separately. You can paste the branch into an empty space or connect it to an existing system.

Branch Erase (MAGIEBR)

Use this function for removing branches of all system types. First show the start point of the branch, and then show the branch to remove.

Part Erase (MAGIEPR)

Use this function for removing individual ducts, pipes, components, and other parts. If MagiCAD finds several parts, a selection list will open.

Move Parts (MAGIMOV)

With this function, you can move or stretch parts, or part groups, in x/y direction. With the Z option, you can change their height levels.

Side Movement (MAGISMV)

With this function, you can align the duct/pipe line and change its reducers eccentric. You can use this function either in the plan view or in the side view.

Change Properties (MAGICHA)



With this function, you can change properties of parts. You can give an absolute value for the property or define it according to the project settings (by project). You can direct this function to one part, a branch, a network, or the entire system. You can even combine these selections, or use AutoCAD’s basic selection for selecting the parts.

Find and Replace (MAGIFIN)

With this function, you can replace products and duct/pipe/insulation series. You can direct this function to one part, a branch, a network, or the entire system. You can even combine these selections, or use AutoCAD’s basic selection for selecting the parts.

Break Duct or Pipe (MAGIBRK)

With this function, you can remove a piece of duct or pipe between two points.

Joint Part (MAGIJOI)

With this function, you can place a joint part to a duct or pipe. The joint part, for example, transforms into a bend if you move the ductwork/pipe system in a certain way. It is also possible to use the joint part as a boundary for duct/pipe properties. For example, you can change the pipe material using a joint part.

Connection node

Connection nodes are used, for example, to transfer flow rates between storeys. Connect connection nodes by selecting the drawing where the connection nodes will connect. The counterparts with the same ID number are connected. If the drawing, where the connections are searched from, contains an unconnected connection node that directs to the open drawing, a new connection node is created to the open drawing. The drawing where the connection nodes are search from must not be read-only.

Dimension Texts (MAGIDIM)

Dimension texts are placed with this function. You can modify the text styles, and change the active style with the Format command line option. You can Underline and Overline the dimension texts using the corresponding options. You can place the dimension text variables side by side with the Byside option.

You can also set underline or overline later with the Part Properties function. In addition, you can copy dimension texts from other projects.

Automatic Dimension Texts (MAGIADM)

With this function you can place the dimension texts automatically to one part group at the time. The same dimension texts are used as in the conventional dimension text function. Select the active dimension text style with the mouse. It is possible to have several active styles, in which case several dimension text is set to the part. Before a new dimension text is set, the old one is removed.

Sections

You can run the calculation functions either from a separate Sections toolbar or from a flyout toolbar of the project manager toolbar.

Insert Running index

Numbering the parts (Running Index) with unique position ID. The numbering formats are defined in the project. The format consists of a constant text and the number. The texts and numbers can be displayed e.g. in dimension texts. The function checks that the number is not already in use elsewhere in the drawing or the project. The numbering can be changed afterwards with the Edit… function. It is possible to edit and renumber the indexes that are already in place in any drawing except which are opened by some other user.

Remove Running index



Use the Remove Running Index function to remove the running index from object.

Set MagiCAD Data to AutoCAD Objects (MAGISEPR)

With this function you can set the following data to AutoCAD objects: Group type, System, User code, Product code, Description, UserVar1 and UserVar2).

The objects that have MagiCAD data defined are included in the bill of materials, IFC Export and MagiCAD Export lists.

Connection Node menu

Note: This is a flyout toolbar that is included in the MC-HP&V Edit toolbar.

Connection node (MAGIFNC)

Connection nodes are used, for example, to transfer flow rates between storeys. Connect the nodes by selecting the drawing where the nodes will connect. The counterparts with the same ID number are connected. If the drawing, where the connections are searched from, contains an unconnected node that directs to the open drawing, a new connection node is created to the open drawing. The drawing where the connection nodes are searched from must not be read-only.

Disconnect node(MAGIDIS)

Use this command to disconnect all external flow connections.

Connection Node Report (MAGIFLOWNODEVIEW)

Use this command to locate the connection nodes in a drawing.

Sections menu

Note: This is a flyout toolbar that is included in the MC-HP&V Edit toolbar.

Section Marks (MAGISMR)

Give the height levels of the upper and lower surface, and the depth of the section mark. You can change these later with the Part Properties function (MAGIPPR). The cross-section can be either conventional (Section) or detailed (Detail).

The cross-section is made with the Make Section (MAGIMSC) function.

Drawing the section mark will continue until you press <Enter>. Next, show the direction for the arrows.

Make Section (MAGIMSC)

This function makes a cross-section of the selected section mark. The section mark is drawn with the Section Mark function (MAGISMR)

You can include MagiCAD Electrical, AutoCAD, and/or AEC objects, also from the reference drawing, in the cross-section. If you prefer, you can also set the automatic Active2D hide (Hide, MAGIHID) to the cross-section – and include the name of the source drawing in the cross-section.



It is also possible to add dimension texts to the cross-section. The objects in the cross-section are not included in the calculations (eg. bill of materials).

You can change the settings of the section mark/cross-section, and update the cross-section, with the Part Properties function (MAGIPPR).

Quick Section (MAGISCP)

With this function you can quickly make a cross-section of MagiCAD objects for an overview of the connections. First, select the objects you want to include in the quick section. Next, show the location and direction of the view.

View menu

Drawing Preferences (MAGIDWG)

In the Drawing Preferences dialog you can select the active systems of the drawing, that is, the systems that can be selected e.g. when drawing ducts or pipes. You can also change all linetypes and colors at the same time in this dialog – and restore them to the project-specific settings.

In addition, you can set the Hide function, which is run when the drawing is saved in MagiCAD, active in this dialog. This setting is viewport-specific, and you must set to each viewport separately whether the hide is performed.

For the cases where the same viewport settings are used in several different viewports, there is the main viewport feature. Main viewport settings and hide information can be used in other viewports.

Hide (MAGIHID)

You can use the Hide function in the Active2D and wireframe drawing modes. MagiCAD objects that are placed behind other MagiCAD objects are hidden. You can use this function, for example, before printing. Hide works also with reference drawings. For example, a MagiCAD Ventilation drawing can be a reference for a MagiCAD Heating&Piping drawing; depending on the case the function hides both Ventilation and H&P parts.

Hiding can be set for each viewport separately – also in the layout drawings.

Hiding can also be done automatically during saving.

Reset Hide (MAGIRHI)

This function makes visible the objects that were hidden with the Active2D hiding function (MAGIHID).

Hiding can be reset from all viewports or from the active viewport.

Show Selected Parts Only; clip area (MAGICLP)

Use this function to choose the parts you wish to show on the screen. You can direct this function to one part, a branch, a network, or the entire system. You can even combine these selections, or use AutoCAD’s basic selection for selecting the parts.

Show All Parts; cancel clip (MAGIUCL)

This function makes visible the parts that were hidden with the MAGICLP function.

Part Property Line (MAGIDPR)



This function is used for getting the overall view of the system. Values of one variable (e.g. flow rate, pressure drop, elevation) at a time can be displayed at the products of the selected system/system group.

Collision Control (MAGICOL)

With this function you can find out the possible collisions between the parts. Select the collision types (for example, Duct – pipe) in the Options dialog. Select the area you want to check. The collisions are showed in the Show Messages dialog, and you can select them to be showed with error ticks in the drawing.

You can even examine the collisions with MagiCAD parts in the reference drawing, AutoCAD/ADT/AEC objects, and cable trays in MagiCAD Electrical drawings.

It is also possible to define tolerance for the collision. With negative values the part are allowed to be inside each other, whereas with the positive values empty space is reserved around the parts e.g. for installation and maintenance.

It is possible to save the collision boundaries.

Calculations menu

Note: This toolbar is a flyout toolbar that is included in the Project Manager toolbar.

Give the system-specific input values with the system-modeling function. For example, in this way you select the calculations that you wish to allow to each system.

All the calculation results presented in dialogs can be copied to the clipboard for pasting eg. to a spreadsheet.

Flow Summation (MAGICFL)

This function calculates the flows of the selected system, but does not perform any sizing. If you have selected the Calculate flow option, MagiCAD updates the flows that connect to the active drawing from other drawings. If other drawings are temporarily not available, you can use the Use last value option.

In addition, the flow summation calculates the volumes of the heating and cooling systems (pipes and radiators). The volume is saved at the open end of each supply pipe. The sizing and balancing functions always sum up the flow rates and calculates the volumes.

Note: If several subsystems are drawn in the project and using the same system, the total volume of the entire system is seen at each open end.

Sizing (MAGISIZ)

This function calculates the flows and performs the sizing for the selected system. The function uses the sizing criterion that you have defined in the system dialog (MAGISYS).

This function calculates also the volume of the system.

Balancing (MAGIBAL)

This function calculates the flows and balances the selected system. You can balance the drawn system right away, or you can first run the sizing function. You can also set MagiCAD to show the index run of the system if necessary.



This function calculates also the volume of the system.

Flow Route Examination (MAGIFRO)

This function performs the flow calculations from the showed component to an open end. You can choose the scope of the output in the Options dialog.

Sound Calculation of Flow Route (MAGISRO)

This function performs the sound calculation from an open end (air handling unit, fan) to the showed air terminal device. The calculation reckons with the sound development and attenuation of the ductwork, A-weighting, and 4 dB room attenuation.

Sound Calculation of All Flow Routes (MAGISND)

This function outputs the incoming sound pressure level of the room beside each air terminal device.

Bill of Materials (MAGIMAS)

With this function you can create two kinds of lists of the parts that are used in MagiCAD: the ”usual” Bill of Materials, or a more specific device list (MagiCAD Export) whose contents is defined according to the systems, part types and their attributes. You can target this function on a particular drawing, selected drawings of the project, or a selected area.

If the project contains rooms defined with MagiCAD Room, the BOM can be made from a particular room, or it can be made from the entire drawing grouped by the rooms. This function requires MagiCAD Room being installed.

COM interface can be used for reading all MagiCAD object data directly from the drawing e.g. with Visual Basic macros. Some information can also be written to the drawing. The more detailed documentation of the interface is available separately.

Documentation menu

Note: This toolbar is a flyout toolbar that is included in the Project Manager toolbar.

Type Free Text (MAGIFTX)

Type the free text with this function.

Edit Free Text (MAGIFTE)

With this function, you can read the free text to a window where you can edit it.

Revision Arrow (MAGIRAR)

Revision Cloud (MAGIRCL)

Change the Arc length by choosing that option and showing two points.

Construction Boundary (MAGICBR)

Drawing the construction boundary will continue until you press <Enter>. Next, show the direction for the arrows.



Other MagiCAD functions Restore components (MAGIRES)

This function restores the properties of the selected parts to match the project information.


Chapter 4. Command Reference • 17

Chapter 4. Command Reference

Project Manager menu

Project This function opens the Select Project dialog, where you can attach the drawing to a project or create a new project. When a project has been created or the drawing has been attached to an existing project, the project management dialog opens and you can define the relations between the projects, storeys and drawings, select the desired products to the project, define dimension text styles, etc.

One MagiCAD drawing represents one storey in a project. You place each storey in relation to the others in the storey list. The storey origin of the drawing indicates the lower left corner of the storey. Using the storey origin makes it possible to locate the storeys in relation to each other.

The Project dialog is the core of MagiCAD's project management. In this dialog, you attach the drawing to the project, define the storey representing the drawing, and set the storey origin. In practice, all settings that apply to the entire project are made in this dialog.

Start by clicking the Project toolbar button. The Select Project dialog opens.

The Available projects list includes the projects that are saved in the same directory as the drawings or on upper directory levels towards the root directory. If no projects are found, the list is empty.

You can select an existing project from the list by clicking the Select button.

To create a new project, click the New button.

To exit from the project selection dialog, click the Cancel button.


18 • Chapter 4. Command Reference

Creating a new project When you click the New button in the Select Project dialog, the New Project dialog opens.

Give a name for the project, e.g. Project1.

Select the directory (Location) for the project. Usually the location is the same directory where the drawings are saved, or on an upper level of the project directory tree towards the root directory.

Select the template project (Template). By default the template projects are stored in the Templates subdirectory of the program directory. You canyou’re your existing MagiCAD HP&V projects as template projects if you prefer.

Accept your choices by clicking Ok. The project management dialog opens, and you can check and modify the project data.

The left pane contains a list of different types of project data. When you click some of them, the more detailed view of the contents appears to the right panel. NOTE ! When you click the right mouse button on the right pane, additional functions become available.

The contents of the project dialog:

• Project settings / Market area – Here you can define the market area. When you are selecting products to the project you are able to see only the products that are available in the selected market area.



• Project settings / Backup project files in drawing – Here you can define if you want to save project files in the drawing (dwg file) for recovery. If the Backup project files in drawing option is selected, saving the drawing also packs the .EPJ, .LIN and .QPD files inside the drawing. They can be restored to the current drawing directory with command MAGIRESTOREPRJ. If the project files exist in that directory, the program asks whether to overwrite them.

• Project settings / Save viewport defaults to – This setting defines whether to load/save the default viewport preferences from/to the project or the drawing.

• Project settings / Character set – This setting defines whether to use National or Unicode characters. Earlier characters were national.

• Model drawings – Speeds up the functions that browse through several drawings. It also makes it possible e.g. to make a BOM of drawings that are not in the same directory. The file lists (e.g. selecting the drawings for the BOM) contain only those drawings that include something to calculate. Model drawings are shown with the relative path to the project file. Only the drawings that are connected to the current project can be added to the model drawing list.

• Storeys – Here you can add or remove storeys that are attached to the project. The storey boundaries appear in the drawing, if that option is selected in the Viewport Preferences dialog. It is also possible to read the storey list from a MagiCAD Room project with the help of the Import function. Height (h) is storey's default height, which is defined in the Storey Properties dialog of MagiCAD Room. Dimensions a and b are read from MagiCAD Room application, which returns a bounding box of the rooms in the storey.

• Ducts – All settings of the ductworks, that apply to the entire project, are made here:

o Systems

o Parts (selecting products to the project)

o Layers

o Insulation series

o Duct series

o Sizing methods

o Dimension texts

• Pipes – All settings of the heating/cooling/water/sprinkler systems, that apply to the entire project, are made here:

o Heating, cooling and special systems

Systems

Layers

Heat transfer media

Sizing methods

Dimension texts

o Water systems

Systems

Layers

Sizing methods



Dimension texts

o Sprinklers

Systems

Layers

Dimension texts

o Parts (selecting products for the project)

o Insulation series

o Pipe series

• Sewers – All settings of the sewer systems, that apply to the entire project, are made here:

o Systems

o Parts (selecting products for the project)

o Layers

o Insulation series

o Sewer series

o Dimension texts

• General – All general settings, that apply to the entire project, are made here:

o Layers

o Dimension texts

• Linetypes

• Dimension texts – project-specific dimension text format and text size

• Provision for voids – settings for creating ”intelligent” provisions for voids

• Variable names – project-specific variable names

• Variable sets – settings for object numbering, adding object IDs, and defining the object status

o Object ID formats

o Status

o Running Index

Text formats

Text groups

The right pane contains the preview of the relative locations of the storeys.

The drawing is attached to the specific storey with the Active storey function. The selection list contains the storeys that are defined in the storey list. Place the storey origin for the drawing with the Install storey origin function.

Click the Close button to exit from the dialog.

Saving the project information All project information (selected products, duct/pipe series, heat transfer media, etc) are saved to project files (filename.EPJ and filename.QPD), which you can use, if you prefer, as templates in your new projects.



Line weights, Layers and linetypes Define the line weights, layers, colors and linetypes for each part type, as well as the dimension text style and height, in the Layers section. Select Layers under the desired group from the list on the left pane, click the right mouse button on the right pane, and select Edit.

• Layer name – the layer where the part is attached. MagiCAD joins the layer variables SV1, SV2, and SV3 to the layer name if the layer name contains the corresponding {SV1}, {SV2}, and {SV3} strings. In this way it is also possible to add the product variable, which is possibly given in the Select products for the project function, if the layer name contains the {PV} variable. Layer variable {VV} can be used to separate layers for the provision for voids with different owners.

• MagiCAD controls the layer names so that the names do not contain any characters that AutoCAD does not allow.

• 1D / 2D / 3D – separate settings for linetypes, colors and line weights for each view mode (1D/2D/3D).

• Center Line / Edge line / Details – select the line type, color and line weight to each case.

• Line type – You can define the line type according to the height level (By height), you can define it according to the system (By system), it can be constant (Continous, Hidden,etc..), or it can be defined according to the layer properties (By layer). (These options may vary in different situations)

• Color – You can define it according to the system (By system), it can be constant (Select...), or it can be defined according to the layer properties (By layer).

• Line weight – can be defined according to the layer properties (By layer), it can be defined according to the default value (By default), or it can be constant (0.25, 0.5, etc.).

• By default – is defined by using AutoCAD’s LWDEFAULT system variable, which sets the value for the default line weight.

• By height – is defined in the Linetypes section. Select the linetype according to the height level.

• By system – The color and linetype of the system are defined in the Systems dialog .

• By series – the line type, color and line weight for the insulation series, which is set in the Insulation Series dialog.

• By object – the line type, color and line weight for the insulation is the same as in the insulated object.

• By layer – The line type, color and line weight are editable by using AutoCAD properties in Layer Manager of AutoCAD. Use multiple layers for object must be enabled.



• Use multiple layers for object – This must be enabled to be able

to use the By layer setting.

• Default layer settings – here you can define the default values for AutoCAD properties Color, Linetype and Lineweight. These default values are used only if the layer does not already exist. You can also define the layers separately for the centerline, edge line or details. This is done by using the Layer name field.

The line types are selected from the types that are defined in the project’s *.LIN file.

If “Use multiple layers for object” option is used, the line weight for insulation can be changed by using AutoCAD’s LWDEFAULT system variable. Type LWDEFAULT at the command prompt and edit the value. You can freely give the same layer name to several parts if you want to limit the number of layers in the drawing. For instance, you can place all the ductwork parts on the same layer. MagiCAD creates MAGI_0 layer for its internal use. If you have locked the MAGI_0 layer (it should never be locked), you cannot install any ductwork/pipe system parts. The project’s line type file is in the standard format that AutoCAD uses. You can edit the project’s line types in the same way as AutoCAD’s line types.

Select the line color of the part in the “Select color” dialog. The color number 7 (black/white) is always the opposite color of the background. You can choose the colors 1-6 can be by showing them, and the colors 8-255 are named as Acad-xxx, where xxx is the color number. The colors correspond with AutoCAD’s color numbering.

The line types that are defined according to the height level, and the types and colors of the hidden lines and insulations, are defined in the Linetypes section. 0...” ” mm height limit is used also when valves are placed. If the height level of the horizontal pipe is higher than the limit that is defined here, the 3D symbol of the valve is placed to the pipe upside down.



Systems Each part created with MagiCAD belongs to a system. A system can be, for instance, a supply air, exhaust air, or heating system.

Select the system under the desired group (system type) from the project management dialog. Click the right mouse button on the desired system on the right pane to create new systems, modify existing systems, or remove systems. Select the function from the popup menu:

• Edit – modify the selected system

• Insert – create a new system

• Delete – remove the selected system

• Copy – copy the selected system

• Paste – paste the copied system to the list

The maximum number of systems is 1999. NOTE ! If the project is saved on a server, it may take a long time to start some functions if there is a large number of systems.

Input values in the system-modeling dialogs The input values in the system-modeling dialogs are defined according to the selected group.

Ductwork:

• ID is a unique identification, given automatically by MagiCAD.

• UserCode is an identification given by the user. It is connected to eg. dimension lines.

• Name is a more accurate identification for the lists that have references to the system.

• System type is supply air system, extract air system, outdoor air system or exhaust air system.

• Color is the default color of the system.

• Linetype on is the default line type of the system. If you want to define the linetype according to the system (linetype must be selected By system in the Layers, Colors, Linetypes dialog), select the linetype here. Otherwise you do not have to select it. After selection, the linetype would not be dependent on the height level as it usually is.

• Layer variables (SV1, SV2, and SV3): you can draw the systems on their own layers by using {SV1}, {SV2}, and {SV3} variables in the layer names.

• Calculations selection can be used to exclude certain calculation types from a system. In this case, clear the corresponding check box.

• Sizing is the sizing criterion (see chapter "Sizing criteria").

• Minimum dp defines the minimum pressure drop for the flow damper and air device.

• Warning limit of high dp is used in the balancing calculations.

• Balancing warning tolerance defines how much the pressure drop from the air terminal device, which is needed for balancing, can be



different from the pressure drop of the air terminal device at the design airflow.

• Balancing to minimum pressure / fan pressure / given pressure option defines the pressure for balancing: the lowest possible pressure of an open end or a particular given pressure. The given pressure is not used if it is lower than the lowest possible pressure.

• Initial sound is the initial value for sound calculation. This sound level is used with the first part of the system (usually an air handling unit).

Heating/cooling/special system:




• Supply pipe color is the default color of the supply pipe.

• Linetype is the default line type of the supply pipe. You can also define the linetype according to the system, which applies also to the return pipe. For further information see "Ductworks".

• Return pipe color is the default color of the return pipe.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the return pipe.



• Sizing method; see chapter "Sizing criteria"

• Minimum dp values define the minimum pressure drop of radiator valves and zone valves.


• Balancing to minimum pressure / pump pressure can be used for defining whether to balance the system according to the lowest possible pressure at the open end or according to a specific pressure. If the given pressure is lower than the lowest possible pressure, the given value is ignored.

• Liquid is the heat transfer medium (eg. water or ethylene-glycol). See chapter "Heat transfer media"

• Temperatures fields define the temperatures of the supply water and return water.

Water system:






• Cold water, color is the default color of the cold water pipe.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the cold water pipe. You can also define the linetype according to the system, which applies also to the hot water and circulation water pipe. For further information see "Ductworks".

• Hot water, color is the default color of the hot water pipe.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the hot water pipe.

• Circulation water, color is the default color of the circulation water pipe.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the circulation water pipe.

• Lowest service pressure is the initial pressure at the start point of the system.



• Sizing method; see chapter "Sizing criteria"

• Minimum dp values define the minimum pressure drop of radiator valves and zone valves.


• Warning limit of high/low qv – Low limit [%] is used in the water point pressure calculations.

• Warning limit of high/low qv – High limit [%] is used in the water point pressure calculations.

• Temperatures fields define the temperatures of the Cold, Hot and Circulation water.

Sewer system:


• UserCode is an identification given by the user. It is connected to eg. layer names and dimension lines.

• Name is the more accurate identification for the lists that have references to the system.

• Sewer color is the default color of a sewage pipe.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the sewage pipe. You can also define the linetype according to the system. See "Ductworks" for further information.



Sprinkler system:




• UserCode is an identification given by the user. It is connected to eg. layer names and dimension lines.

• Name is the more accurate identification for the lists that have references to the system.

• Range pipe color is the default color of the branch pipe.

• Distribution pipe color is the default color of the distribution pipe.

• Distribution pipes start from size defines which pipe sizes are considered as branch pipes and which sizes are considered as distribution pipes.

• Linetype is the default linetype of the sprinkler pipe. It is also to possible to define the linetype by system. See chapter Ductwork

• Basic nominal release temperature is the default release temperature of the sprinklers. This value, however, is not yet used in any purpose.

• Layer variables (SV1, SV2 ja SV3): the systems can be defined for their own layers by using the {SV1}, {SV2}, and {SV3} variables in the layer names.




Selecting products for the project With this function, you select the products, both manufacturer-supplied and self-modeled, to the project's product database.

The products are selected in the project management dialog. First select the system type (ducts, pipes, etc), and select Parts under the system type.

It is also possible to select products in all installation dialogs. Click the right mouse button in installation window and click Select product to project...

A list of the product groups (e.g. supply devices, exhaust devices) opens. When you select the product group, the products that are selected to the project appear on the right pane. It is possible to reorganize the product lists by using buttons ‘Up’ and ‘Down’. The products are also presented in that order in the installation dialogs.

Click the right mouse button on the right pane. A popup menu opens with the following options:

• Properties – examine the data of the selected product

• Edit – modify the data of the selected product

• Delete – remove the selected product from the project

• Select products to project – select new products to the project

When the Select products to project function is selected from the popup menu, the Product Selection dialog opens:

Select the manufacturer from the list in the left pane. When you click the “+”



button, the products and product sizes appear in the list, and with the Properties… function you can examine the data of the selected product.

In the right pane you can see the preview of the product. If the product has been modeled using the Qmodel technology, a rendered image of the product is displayed, and the image can also be rotated. If you want to see the product dimensions instead of the rendered image, select the Dimensions option.

You can browse the products either from a local database (the product database on a local disk drive) or an internet database (the product database on Progman’s website). You can change the path from where to search the local databases with the Select product database path… function.

Search for certain products from MagiCAD product database can be done by product code or description. Also the description language can be selected. Product codes are market area specific as normally. Search keywords can contain many words - all words must be found for match. Search can be started by clicking the Search button or pressing Enter. Note that a special search index (different from the normal product index) is needed, so the first time Apply is clicked or some database is changed there might be a delay of several minutes for creating the search index. Search filters the product tree so that only nodes with matches are shown.

Select the database to the project by clicking the Select product button. MagiCAD asks you to define the User code (required), Product variable (optional) and National code (optional):

• User code – identifier, which is used e.g. in the dimension texts. The user code can be the same in several products.

• Product variable – this value can be used in the dimension texts, it can be output with MagiCAD Export, and it can be used as the layer variable (in this case the products can be separated on their own layers).

• National code – can be used in the dimension texts of output with MagiCAD Export.

• Object ID format – is defined in Variable sets / Object ID formats When installing a product, the Object ID is written automatically to the object. If the Object ID format is not selected for the given product, Object ID is manual and it can be edited with the Part Properties function. The Object ID format can be updated with the Update Drawing Data function.

When you accept your choices with Ok, the Product Selection dialog opens again and you can select more products to the project. If you do not want to select more products, exit the dialog with the Close button.

Insulation series Insulation series are defined to the project in the project management dialog.

First select the system type (Ducts, pipes, etc) and then select Insulation Series. The insulation series that are selected to the project appear in the right window pane.

Click the right mouse button in the right pane. A popup menu opens, and you can select from the following options:

• Edit – modify the selected insulation series

• Insert – create a new insulation series

• Delete – remove the selected insulation series

• Copy – copy the selected insulation series



• Paste – paste the copied insulation series to the list

• Manager – copy insulation series from another project with the Project Manager function

Give the following information in the insulation series dialog:


• UserCode is an identification given by the user. It is connected to e.g. dimension lines.

• Description (further information)

• National code can be output with MagiCAD Export and show in the dimension texts

• Material can be output with MagiCAD Export and show in the dimension texts

• Type – line type for the insulation, if the setting in the Layer Settings dialog is By Series

• Color – color for the insulation, if the setting in the Layer Settings dialog is By Series

• Line weight – line weight for the insulation, if the setting in the Layer Settings dialog is By Series

• Diameter and diameter-specific insulation thickness (circular ducts and pipes)

• Width, height and the corresponding insulation thickness (rectangular ducts)

During sizing, MagiCAD selects the most suitable insulation for the ducts and pipes.

Duct and pipe series When drawing a system, select a series for each duct and pipe. MagiCAD selects the most suitable size from the duct/pipe series according to the sizing criteria.

Duct and series are defined to the project in the project management dialog.

First select the system type (Ducts, pipes, etc) and then select Duct/Pipe/Sewer Series. The duct/pipe series that are selected to the project appear in the right window pane.


• Edit – modify the selected duct/pipe series

• Insert – create a new duct/pipe series

• Delete – remove the selected duct/pipe series

• Copy – copy the selected duct/pipe series

• Paste – paste the copied duct/pipe series to the list

• Manager – copy duct/pipe series from another project with the Project Manager function

Give the following information to all series:


• Name is the description for the selection lists.




• National code can be output with MagiCAD Export and show in the dimension texts

• Material can be output with MagiCAD Export and show in the dimension texts

In addition you can give the following information to a duct series:

• k (roughness)

• Flexible duct (when this is selected, the circular ducts are handled as flexible)

• Duct sizes (available duct sizes, and the ratio between the bend radius and the duct diameter with the circular ducts. In addition, the minimum length of the direct piece of duct, which is required by ductwork parts, is defined here for each size.)

• Products (products, i.e. ducts and fittings in the duct series)

In addition you can give the following information to a pipe series:

• k (heating) is the pipe roughness in heating/cooling systems

• k (water) is the pipe roughness in water systems

• Flexible pipe (when this is selected, the pipes are handled as flexible)

• Sizes (available pipe sizes; "size", inner diameter, outer diameter, DN/valve size and the ratio between the bend radius and the pipe diameter; with flexible pipes this ratio defines the minimum bend radius. In addition, the minimum length of the direct piece of pipe, which is required by the parts, is defined here for each size.) UV1 is a user text field for each pipe size. This text field is also shown in pipe options dialogs, and it can be used as a dimension text variable.

In addition you can give the following information to a sewage pipe series:

• Sizes (available pipe sizes; "size", inner diameter, outer diameter, DN/valve size. In addition, the minimum length of the direct piece of pipe, which is required by the parts, is defined here for each size.)

Separate the width and height of a rectangular duct with x (for example, 300x400). The duct sizes are modeled in ascending order (first by width, then by height: e.g. 300x150, 300x200, 300x300, 400x150, 400x200,...). When MagiCAD selects the duct size, it browses the size list and selects the first size that matches the sizing criteria.

Select the products in the Products field from the product databases with the Right arrow button, and remove them with the Left arrow button

If necessary, you can model eg. a duct series containing both circular and rectangular ducts.

The Min Length, which is defined for each duct/pipe size, defines the minimum length of a direct piece of duct/pipe that is required by each duct/pipe system component or a component that is installed to them. This means that the total length of the direct piece of duct/pipe is twice the given dimension.

Sizing methods Sizing criteria are defined to the project in the project management dialog.



First select the system type (Ducts, pipes, etc) and then select Sizing methods. The sizing criteria that are selected to the project appear in the right window pane.


• Edit – modify the selected sizing criterion

• Insert – create a new sizing criterion

• Delete – remove the selected sizing criterion

• Copy – copy the selected sizing criterion

• Paste – paste the copied sizing criterion to the list

Give the following values in the criterion dialog:

• Description (for further information)

• Dekv-max (the maximum diameter that the v-max and dp-max are used with)

• v-max (maximum velocity)

• dp-max (maximum friction loss, Pa/m))

Enter the information the list sorted by the size in ascending order. The last item in the list should be a large diameter that certainly covers all the modeled duct/pipe series.

If the duct/pipe series does not contain duct/pipe size that fits in the sizing criteria, MagiCAD gives a message when sizing is performed.

Heat transfer media Heat transfer media are defined to the project in the project management dialog.

First select the system type (Pipes => Heating, cooling and special systems) and then select Heat transfer media. The heat transfer media that are selected to the project appear in the right window pane.


• Edit – modify the selected medium

• Insert – create a new medium

• Delete – remove the selected medium

• Copy – copy the selected medium

• Paste – paste the copied medium to the list

Give the following information for the heat transfer medium:

• Name

• Density

• Heat transfer capacity

• Viscosity (cinematic)

Dimension text You can modify the dimension text style in the Project Management or by selecting the Format option when installing dimension text. Select first the main group in the Dimension Text dialog. A list appears, containing the groups to



which you can define dimension texts. You can see a preview of the dimension text format in the right side of the panel.

Select the group, and a list of the Available formats updates. Select the style, and all buttons get enabled.

When you click Edit… or New…, the Dimension Formats dialog opens. You can give the name for the dimension text, select the variables, define the properties of the baseline and the reference line, and select the alignment. This window contains also information that is used only in the automatic dimension texts.

It is possible to define style, text height and color for dimension text according to the project settings (the “By project” option) or according to the dimension text specific settings (Style, Text height or Text)

There are two additional dimensions in the dimension text variables of the air devices. Airflow sum defines that the air device flows are added up to the dimension line. Please note that you do not need to define a Newline for this variable, and you cannot output any other variables to the last row. Another variable is No. of devices, which indicates the number of the similar devices. Please note that this variable must be first in the variable list (this takes place automatically).

Reference line options

• None, no reference line

• First part, the reference line will appear only with the first part that is selected

• All parts, the reference line will appear with all the parts that are selected for the dimension text

Ref. line symbol options

Symbol scale

Set the scale factor for the reference line symbol. Scale factor can be from 0.2 to 4.0. By default it is 1.



Base line options

• None, no base line

• First row, under first row

• All rows, under all rows

• Rectangle, a rectangle around the dimension text

• Circle, a circle around the dimension text

Alignment options

• Left align

• Center align

• Right align

Set the dimension text style active with the Set Active button. Active dimension text formats can be used from the project or from the drawing. This is done by User Preferences setting Use active dimension text settings from Drawing / Project. This prevents changing other users’ active dimension text in multi-user projects.

You can also copy styles from other projects. Click the Manager… button, which opens the Project File Manager dialog. With the Copy button you can make a copy of the active style.

The height levels of the ducts and pipes are the height levels of the their midpoints. It is possible to add text styles to the drawing by using AutoCAD’s Format/Text style function.

Provision for voids

Text formats

• Name – text part of the running index, e.g. P like a pump TE like a

temperature sensor.

• Description – description of the text format

• First number – the smallest accepted number in this format

• Number of digits – How many numbers are used to show a number part of running index e.g 3 => 001, 2 => 01.



• Text group – Selected text group for this format. Needed only for filtering when inserting running index to objects. Name of text group can be also shown in dimension text etc. This field is optional

• Allow the same index in different system – If this is selected, the same index can be in different systems.

The first running index of this example would be G3 PF 001.

NOTE ! each string (G3, PF, 001) can be added separately to a dimension text.

Text groups

• Name – text part of the running index

• Description – description of the text group

NOTE ! You do not even need to define the text groups, if you do not have many different formats. Text groups are used to filter different kind of formats when inserting running index to objects. Name of text group can be also shown in dimension text etc.

Variable names (user given names for variables) It is possible to define variable names (UserVar1, UserVar2, Description, National code, SV1, SV2 and SV3) in the project dialog under new node Variable names. There are separate names for the user interface and for the reports. Initially all variable names are By default, which means that those names are loaded from the language database as previously.



Variable sets / Object ID formats Object ID can be a unique code which contains, for example, system code, running index text and running index, etc.

Click the right mouse button on the right pane of the Project Management to create new, modify existing, or remove Object ID formats. Select the function from the popup menu:

• Edit – modify the selected Object ID format

• Insert – create a new Object ID format

• Delete – remove the selected Object ID format

• Copy – copy the selected Object ID format

• Paste – paste the copied Object ID format to the list

When you click Edit… or Insert…, the Object ID Formats dialog opens. You can give the description and select the variables for the Object ID format.

Object ID format can be given to all products. Object ID is defined to the product in the Project Management.

When installing product, the Object ID is written automatically to the object. If Object ID format is not selected for the given product, Object ID is manual and it can be edited with the Part Properties function. The Object ID format can be updated with Update Drawing Data function.

Variable sets / Running index Click the right mouse button on the right panel of the Project Management to create new, modify existing or remove running index formats. Select the function from the popup menu:

• Edit – modify the selected running index format

• Insert – create a new running index format

• Delete – remove the selected running index format

• Copy – copy the selected running index format

• Paste – paste the copied running index format to the list

User Preferences This function is used for defining the user-specific information.



• Database path – the directory from which the databases are searched when products are selected to the project.

• Search circle – this setting defines the size of the search circle. The searching routine works in all views and coordinate settings. If there is only one component in the search area, it is selected. If there are several components in the search area, a selection list opens, and the component that is closest to the cursor is the first item in the list.

• Dimension text formats – this setting switches between using active dimension text formats either from the project or from the drawing. This prevents changing other users’ active dimension text in multi-user projects.

Update Drawing Data With this function object properties (device symbols, running indexes, national codes, room information, Object ID formats, colors, line types, line weights, layers) can be updated in the drawing to match the project settings.

IFC Export

About IFC IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) is an international standard for defining the product models in the building services. It is a method for sharing and distributing the information between different software applications.

A MagiCAD drawing can be saved in the IFC format and this way transferred e.g. to the CAD application that is used by the architect. The geometrical and technical information of electrical and HVAC objects are transferred with the help of an IFC file.

Creating an IFC file Select the IFC Export function from the Project Manager menu. The IFC Export dialog opens.

Select the desired option (create or append). Give a name for the new IFC file, or select an existing IFC file.

Next, select the MagiCAD objects you want to include in the IFC file. Note: if you want to select all MagiCAD HP&V objects, type ALL at the command prompt and press Enter twice.



Schema for new IFC files

• IFC 2x3 – IFC 2x3 format guarantees even better and faster functionality, and more information is written to the IFC file.

• IFC 2x2 final – IFC 2x2 format is used if data will be imported to the software that does not support IFC 2x3 format

Use for IFC storey origin

This option defines which storey origin (coordinate system) is used in the IFC file:

• HPV origin – the storey origin of MagiCAD HP&V

• WCS – World Coordinate System. Select this option if you are not sure about the origin.

• UCS – User Coordinate System (origin of the user coordinate system)

Own property set usage

• Add own properties – MagiCAD’s own property sets enlarge the size of the IFC files rather much. Therefore it is possible to choose whether to include MagiCAD's own property sets in IFC Export.

• Use extruded ducts, pipes and sewers – MagiCAD IFC Export uses mostly parametric geometry instead of faces. This makes IFC files use less memory, disk space and time when they are imported to external software. Because all applications with IFC import cannot handle parametric geometry there is a possibility to set that MagiCAD IFC Export uses extruded ducts, pipes and sewers in the IFC file.

Create new IFC file…

This function creates a new IFC file, which contains the selected MagiCAD HP&V objects. Note: Each storey must be saved to a separate IFC file.

Append to existing IFC file…



With this function you can write MagiCAD HP&V objects to an existing IFC file. An IFC file can be, for example, provided by the architect or created with MagiCAD Room.

If the storey list has been defined to the IFC file (with architectural application or with MagiCAD Room), select the storey where you want to place the objects. If storeys are not defined in the IFC file, each storey must be saved to a separate IFC file.

Remove building system parts from file…

With this option you can remove MagiCAD objects (electrical and HVAC objects) from an existing IFC file.



Ventilation menu (drawing functions)

Duct When you use this command for the first time, give the design options:

• Duct size

• Series, the duct series

• Size, the size selected from the series

• Swapped, swapping the width and height of the rectangular duct

• Locked, locking the duct. Sizing does not change the properties of a locked duct.

• Insulation

• Series, insulation series. The insulation series are user-defined. MagiCAD shows the series-specific insulation thickness for the selected duct size.

• Status. The status types are user-defined. You can choose the status while drawing the ducts/pipes or you can determine it afterwards with Change Properties. -Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.

• Routing smart/direct. When smart, MagiCAD tends to create routes using standard bends; when direct, MagiCAD draws the route directly between the given two points.

• Bends, default forms of circular and rectangular bends

• Branches, default forms of the different duct branches

• Height difference in branches, the connection angle when the main duct and the branch are at different heights. Smart: MagiCAD



calculates the degree of the bend. Deg: MagiCAD uses a certain kind of bend in the height level changes.

After you have given the options, MagiCAD asks the start point showing the duct size, locking (*), insulation, and the available options at the command line:

• Connect/noConnect: connection option on/off. The cursor has the search circle when the connection option is on.

• Angle to give the snap angle. It is possible to give the snap angle either by showing the direction with the mouse or typing the value as degrees (0-360). It is also possible to use different methods to show the angle: With Two points, by MagiCAD Object or in relation to the current angle (Relative).

• Options invokes the design options dialog.

• Last option grips to the end of the last drawn duct, last drawn air terminal device, or similar.

• smarT/direcT changes the pipe routing between smart and direct in duct and single-pipe drawing.

You can give the start point either by pointing with a mouse or typing the coordinates in the command line. If the Connect option is off, MagiCAD asks the system and height level information. Select the system from a list, and give the height level either by giving it as a number or using the Top of..., Center of... or Bottom of...option (show a MagiCAD object). You can also use button “From Part...”, which copies height, system, duct series, duct size, locking and swapping status and insulation series from another duct. It is possible to select objects also from reference drawings.

When Connect option is on, the search circle is visible; MagiCAD assumes that the duct's start point is connected to a ductwork component. After you have shown a point, MagiCAD searches for the suitable components inside the search circle. If you connect to a vertical duct and the viewpoint is from the top, MagiCAD asks the connection height level.

If there is only one component within the search area, the duct will connect to it. If there is more than one component, the selection list will appear.

When connected to the end of a duct or to an air device, MagiCAD checks that the duct size and insulation options match. If they do not match, MagiCAD asks for further actions in a dialog.

You can either Retain the active options or Change them to match a duct you select.

After you have given the start point, the command line options change and the endpoint is expected. The command line options depend on the start point. When you start from the end of a duct, the new options are

• Z to change the height level

• Back to reverse drawing

• Plug to plug the duct

• connection Node to place a connection node at the end of the duct

• Special connection prompts you to show the end of the other duct. MagiCAD calculates all possible alternatives of the connections made with standard parts. When you select the connection alternative from the list, it is drawn immediately. You can accept the connection by selecting Use selected standard angles, or you can reject the connection. You can also make a Special reduction between the selected duct ends.



• Fork option makes it possible to draw a division plate to the end of a rectangular duct. You can continue drawing from the division plate with the duct drawing function.

• Device to install the air device while drawing the duct

• coMponent to install the component while drawing the duct

• cLeaning cover to install the cleaning cover while drawing the duct

The Fork option is available only for ducts.

The height level change (Z) invokes a dialog where you can give the height level change. In the dialog, it is possible to check the top, center, or bottom height level of the reference part.

Start point H indicates the initial height level. Top level, center level ja bottom level indicate the top, center and bottom height level of the end point.

You can show the height level of the endpoint with the Top of, center of and bottom of options of a MagiCAD object you choose. For example, if you wish to set the top level of the duct is at the same height as the bottom level of a crossing duct, show the crossing duct using the bottom of option.

Angle to horizontal indicates the angle you want to use in the height level change. MagiCAD automatically calculates the duct length. Free means that the angle of the height level change is free. When this option is on, MagiCAD asks you to show the location for the duct end.

After height level change, MagiCAD does not perform normal routing. MagiCAD draws the duct directly between the start and endpoints. MagiCAD checks, however, that all the components fit into the route.

If the start point of the rectangular duct is not connected anywhere, MagiCAD asks the direction of the longer side. You can give the direction either by pointing with the mouse or typing 0-360 degrees.

Reverse (Back) removes the previous duct and its components, and the bend if there is one. You can remove ducts this way until you reach a branch (T-piece, outlet collar, distribution box) or an air device.

Flow connection option (Connection node) asks the connection node number, description, and direction. MagiCAD suggests the highest unused flow connection number. MagiCAD suggests the direction according to the location of the connection and the direction of the previous duct. The possible directions are

• None, when there is no counterpart for the flow connection. In this case, give the airflow and pressure loss for the connection.

• This, when the counterpart is located within the same drawing. Give the same ID to the counterparts.

• Upward, when the counterpart can be read to the drawing that is above.

• Downward, Left, Right: these functions are corresponding to the Upward option

• Front, when the counterpart can be read to the drawing that is at the same height and in front of the current drawing (that is, above on the screen).

• Back, when the counterpart can be read to the drawing that is at the same height and behind the current drawing (that is, below on the screen).



After you have accepted the flow connection information, MagiCAD checks that there is not a connection with the same number and direction. The drawing can thus contain e.g. connection node with number 10 both upwards and downwards. If the connection number is already in use, the dialog opens again.

The use of special connections has some limitations:

1. The duct ends must be "in front of each other" to avoid reductions inside the ducts. In the example below, duct 1 can be connected to duct A, but duct 2 can not (its outline is behind duct A)

A

1 2

2. The ducts must lead enough towards each other. If the angle

between the ducts is less than 90°, connection is not allowed. Ducts 1 and 2 can be connected to duct A, but duct 3 can not.

1

23

A

After you have given the endpoint, MagiCAD checks the route between the start and endpoints, and if necessary, changes (smart routing) or rejects it. The most typical reason for rejecting a route is that there are components that do not fit into the route, or MagiCAD does not find the bends needed for the route. If the start point is an air device, a distribution box or a connection node, MagiCAD may reject the route if you have chosen an unsuitable direction.

MagiCAD asks the endpoint until you cancel the function or the route ends up to a duct, air device or distribution box. If necessary, MagiCAD installs a reducer when the duct connects to an air device.

You can end drawing by pressing ESC when MagiCAD asks for a start point. You can also end drawing by giving another command when MagiCAD asks for the endpoint.

AutoCAD's UNDO command removes all the ductwork components that you have placed during the current duct drawing session.

Ductwork Components The components are classified as flow dampers, fire dampers, silencers, fans and other (user-defined) ductwork components.

Select the component from the project's product database. Install the component by showing the duct where you want to connect the component. MagiCAD will then search the component with the most suitable size, and uses reducers if necessary. MagiCAD also checks that the component fits into the selected location in the duct. You can connect a bend-type silencer only to a 90° bend.



Sound calculation uses the sound level from the fan (if found) instead of the sound levels defined in the project. Fan cannot be moved with MAGIMOV. However, it can be moved with AutoCAD commands MOVE and STRETCH, if the connected duct is also the selection set.

Distribution Box MagiCAD asks the box dimensions first. The command line will then contain the box dimensions and the installation options:

• Connect/noConnect to switch the connection option on/off. Accordingly, the search circle in the cursor switches between visible/invisible.

• Direction, which defines the direction of the width dimension.

It is now possible to edit the size of the distribution box after installation. This can be done by moving the new grips (in the center of sides) and also in the Part Properties dialog (double-click the distribution box). The Part Properties dialog has a new button Size…, which opens a dialog for entering the new dimensions. Changing the size with the Part Properties function keeps the center point of the distribution box as it is. The minimum size for a distribution box is 100x100x100 mm. Change of the size is rejected if the connected duct lengths would be under the minimum duct length.

It is possible to install a connection box to either a horizontal or a vertical duct. MagiCAD checks that there is enough space for installation, and that the duct is not slantwise in the vertical direction.

It is also possible to install a distribution box to an empty space. MagiCAD then asks the height level and the system.

The perpendicular of the distribution box should always be in upright position. Although it is possible to slant the box, it is not recommended since that would cause errors in duct connections.

When the box installed to a vertical duct, the direction of the box is not changed. It is possible to join up to fifty ducts to a box.

Cleaning Cover You can install a cleaning cover to distribution boxes, ducts, branches, plugs, and bends. Plug, accessory, and component types are supported.

The cleaning cover of a distribution box will always be placed in the middle of the upper side.

Flow Arrow The flow arrows can be placed to an empty space or beside air devices.

• 1/2/3/4 defines the number of arrows


• Direction defines the arrows' direction. Give the direction by rotating the figure. You can also give the snap angle with the option Angle.



• Options can be used to define whether the arrows are drawn for outdoor air, supply air, extract air, exhaust air, or other situations (Not connected).



Air Devices menu

Air Device

First, select a suitable device type and give the airflow. MagiCAD shows the existing sizes in a selection list, and you can select the most suitable size. MagiCAD shows the velocity in the connecting duct when the desired airflow has been given.

The selection list containing the air devices in the project's product database will then appear. See further information about product databases in chapter "Selecting products for the project". It is also possible to select products in all installation dialogs. Click the right mouse button in the installation window and click the Select product to project... button.

When selecting a device, it is possible to look at its dimensions, pressure drop/sound curves, and shape. The airflow appears in the diagram as a blue vertical line. When the air device consists of a diffuser and a plenum box, you can modify their distance in relation to each other.

The possible alternatives for the Placement are also showed in the dialog. When the installation location is selected, the device rotates to the default orientation of placement. If the device is placed to an empty space, the Orientation can be selected from four main directions or it can be defined freely (Free).

Place the device by either showing the location with a mouse or giving the coordinates in the command line. MagiCAD shows the type of the device and the size of the connection duct during placing. The installation options are:


• Direction to rotate the device to the right direction.

• Grille direction to rotate the diffusor, which connects to the plenum box, to the right position.

• Options to return to the selection window.



When you install the device to an empty space, MagiCAD asks the system and height level. You can give the height level according to the top level, bottom level or connection of the device.

When the connection option is on, MagiCAD moves the installation point to the connection point and installs the device at the end of the duct or to the middle of the duct. MagiCAD automatically installs a reducer if the duct size and device size do not match. When the device is installed to the middle of the duct, the device is installed directly to the duct without a T-piece or other part. Select the placement for the device. If you show to the side of the duct, the device will be installed to the selected side directly to the duct. If you show to the same direction as the duct, the device will be installed above or below the duct depending on the direction you show.



Heating & Piping menu (drawing functions)

Supply and Return Pipes From a flyout toolbar, you can choose to draw a supply pipe, a return pipe, or both. When you use this command for the first time, MagiCAD asks the following design options:

• Pipe Series

• Size

• Locked

• Insulation: the user defines the insulations. MagiCAD shows the insulation thickness to the selected pipe size according to the pipe series.

• Synchronize: With this selection, you can connect the supply/return pipe settings to each other. In this case, for instance, changes in the supply pipe options also affect the return pipe.

• Status: The status types are user-defined. You can choose the status while drawing the ducts/pipes or you can determine it afterwards with Change Properties. -Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.

• Radius for flexible pipes: It is now possible to use manual Radius for the flexible pipes (heating/cooling, water and sprinkler). The radius is still at least the minimum R/D value defined in the pipe series.

• Pipe positioning after vertical: This selection affects the pipe positioning in relation to each other after vertical pipes.



• Manual: Pipe positioning from cursor pipe settings are used after the vertical pipes.

• Top (cursor pipe below): The cursor pipe is always below if you continue drawing in line with the vertical pipes. Otherwise, the pipes are side by side.

• Bottom (cursor pipe above) (The cursor pipe is always above if you continue drawing in line with the vertical pipes. Otherwise, the pipes are side by side.

• Smart (no crossing): The pipe order is chosen so that the pipes do not cross.

• Pipe positioning from cursor pipe defines the direction of the other pipe in relation to the cursor pipe in the drawing direction. The cursor pipe is the pipe whose route is drawn.

• Distance is the distance between the pipes (mm).

• Height difference defines the height difference of an automatic rise (or fall) when you draw T-branches where the pipes cross and you draw the pipes away from the main pipes. With this function you also choose the angle of the height difference.

When you have given these options, MagiCAD asks the start point showing the pipe sizes, locking (*), insulations, distance between the pipe centerlines, and the options at the command line:

• Connect/noConnect: The search circle is visible when Connect option is on.

• Angle for selecting the snap angle. You can give the snap angle either by showing it with the mouse or typing it as degrees 0-360°. You can also select other showing methods with the additional options: with Two points, according to MagiCAD Object, or in relation to the current angle (Relative).

• Options opens the design options dialog.

• Last grips to the last drawn free end of pipe, last drawn radiator, or similar.


You can give the start point either by showing it with the mouse or by typing the coordinates at the command prompt. If the Connect option is off, MagiCAD asks the system and the height level of the cursor pipe. MagiCAD also shows the height level of the other pipe. Select the system from the list, and give the height level either as a numeric value or using the Top of..., Center of... or Bottom of... function (show a MagiCAD object). It is possible to select objects also from reference drawings.

When you click OK, MagiCAD asks the next point.

If the Connect option is on, the cursor has the search circle. MagiCAD assumes that the start points of the pipes are connected to pipe components. After you have showed the location, MagiCAD searches the suitable parts within the search area. If the viewpoint is from above and you are connecting to a vertical pipe, MagiCAD asks the connection height.

MagiCAD asks you to show the start point, first from the cursor pipe and then from the other pipe. MagiCAD selects both pipes if they are inside the search circle. If only one suitable part exists inside the search circle, MagiCAD connects the pipes to it. If there are several parts inside the area, a selection list will open.



You can change the design options during drawing by selecting Options. You can also change the pipe spacing, which changes the distance between the cursor pipe and the other pipe (Pipe positioning from cursor pipe).

After you have given the start point, the command line options change and MagiCAD asks the endpoint of the pipe. The command line options vary according to the start point. If you start drawing from a pipe end, the new options are

* Z, height level change

* Back, reversing to the previous point

* Plug, plugging the pipe ends

* Connection node, placing flow connections to the pipe ends

* Special connection prompts you to show the end of the other pipe or sewer. MagiCAD calculates all possible alternatives of the connections made with standard parts. When you select the connection alternative from the list, it is drawn immediately. You can accept the connection by selecting Use selected standard angles, or you can reject the connection. You can also make a Special reduction between the selected pipe ends. In special connection for sewers standard angles 90° and 60° are divided into two 45° and 30° bends with 100 mm straight sewer pipe between them. The selection list of the connection shows the fall of the main pipe from the first selected to the last selected. Note! This works only with 1-pipe drawing.

* coMponent to install the pipe component while drawing the pipe. Note! This works only with 1-pipe drawing.

* Valve to install the valve while drawing the pipe

If the start point is not a pipe end, you cannot select the Plug and Connection node options.

Height level change (Z) opens a dialog where you can give the height level of the cursor pipe end.

‘Start point H’ indicates the height level of the cursor pipe's start point. Cursor pipe height level indicates the height level of the endpoint (center point of the pipe).

After height level change, MagiCAD does not perform standard routing. The pipes are drawn directly between the start point and the end point. MagiCAD, however, checks that all parts fit into the desired route.

If the start point of the pipe pair is not connected anywhere, MagiCAD asks the direction of the other pipe in relation to the cursor pipe. You can give the direction either by showing it with the mouse or giving it as degrees 0-360.

Back removes the pipes and their bends/components you have drawn during the current drawing session. You can remove the pipes until a branch (T-branch, X-branch), radiator, or other similar device.

Connection node asks the ID number of the flow connection (separately for supply and return pipes), description text and direction. MagiCAD suggests the largest unused ID number, and the direction according to the location of the connection and the direction of the preceding pipes. The possible directions are:

* None, when there is no counterpart for the flow connection. In this case, you give the power and pressure loss of the connection. MagiCAD calculates the flow from the power and the differential temperature that you have given for the system.

* This, when the counterpart is in the same drawing. In this case, both counterparts have the same ID number.



* Upward, when the counterpart can be read to the drawing above.

* Downward, Left, Right, which work in the same way as Upward.

* Front, when the counterpart can be read from the drawing that is in front of the current drawing (that is, above on the screen).

* Back, when the counterpart can be read from the drawing that is behind the current drawing (that is, below on the screen).

After you have accepted the connection node, MagiCAD checks that the drawing does not contain a connection with the same ID and the same direction. The drawing can thus contain e.g. connection node with number 10 both upwards and downwards. You can – and actually should – always give the same number for the supply/return pipe pairs. If the connection number is already in use, MagiCAD returns to the input dialog.

After you have given the end point, MagiCAD checks, changes if necessary (smart routing), or rejects the route between the start point and the end point. The most typical reason for rejecting the route is that not all of the parts fit into the route. If you start from a radiator or a flow connection, MagiCAD may reject the route if the direction you show is impossible.

MagiCAD asks the endpoint until you cancel the §function or the route ends to pipes or a radiator.

When the function asks for a start point, you can cancel by pressing ESC. You can also quit the drawing function by giving another MagiCAD command when MagiCAD asks for the endpoint.

Radiator connections

All radiator connections are made either by starting pipe drawing from a radiator or ending drawing to a radiator. You can connect to radiators with either two pipes or one pipe at a time. The pipes leave the radiator to the direction that is defined while placing the radiator (see also chapter "Radiator").

AutoCAD’s UNDO removes all pipe system components that you have placed during the active drawing session.

Flexible pipes

When so-called flexible pipes are drawn (the pipe series is defined as flexible), the radius of the bend is defined as follows:

Draw straight pipe sections. MagiCAD selects the shorter from the two consecutive pipe sections and defines its midpoint. The start point and endpoint of the arc are defined according to the distance between the midpoint and the "corner" of the pipe sections.



Radiator You can place a heating system radiator with this command.

First, choose the heating system where you wish to add a radiator. Next, choose the radiator type, and give the desired heating power and dimensions (or alternatively let MagiCAD size the radiator).

Size the radiator by choosing Select size in the radiator dialog. The sizing function targets to the radiator type you have selected in the dialog. The sizing opens a dialog where you give the minimum/maximum lengths, minimum/maximum heights, and the percentage (minimum/maximum) power limits of the radiator. MagiCAD shows the radiators that match these criteria. If you change these criteria, you get the new list of the suitable radiators by pressing the Calculate button.

There is a checkbox Show all products in the Radiator Sizing dialog. If the option is selected, all products that fulfill the criteria are shown. If the Show all products option is not selected, only the product which is selected in the Radiator Selection dialog is shown. Also the in result list there are new columns: Code and Product.

MagiCAD shows the possible pipe connection points at the radiator. You can switch the inlet/outlet connections with the arrow buttons. With the Rotate



function, you can rotate the radiator to upright position. With the Mirror function, you can move the connection points to the other side of the radiator (if there are connection in the both sides).

The default size of the connection pipe is set in the Connection size field. MagiCAD selects this size or the nearest match from the pipe series. The size of the connection pipe remains the same until the first branch even after sizing (if it is not locked as another size).

In this dialog you can choose to draw or not to draw a symbol for the radiator valve. With the Filled selection you can define the radiator symbol filled or unfilled. Select also the valve type and valve size in this dialog. With the Properties function, you can see the pressure loss characteristics of the selected valve.

Place the radiator by showing its place and giving its height level and description in a separate dialog.

Direction option defines the radiator direction in the drawing.

Options returns to the radiator dialog.

You can examine and change the properties of the radiator with the Part properties function (MAGIPPR). The size, type, and capacity demand of the (connected or unconnected) radiator can be changed. It is also possible to affect the drawing method of the radiator and valve.

It is possible to change the connection points and position of an unconnected radiator. When you change the size, the midpoint of the lower edge remains the same.

Valve Use this function for placing a radiator valve, zone valve, stop valve, or other valve.

Select the valve group in the Valve Selection dialog. MagiCAD opens a list that contains the valves that belong to the group and you have selected to the project.



You can choose the drawing symbol for the valve. With the Properties function, you can examine the flow information of the valve.

You can model your own 2D symbols for the valves. When you click the UserSymbol… button, you can start selecting/creating/modifying symbols. For further information, see chapter "Modeling 2D symbols".

Place the valve by showing the pipe. MagiCAD selects the most suitable size for the valve. MagiCAD also uses the actual length of the valve to ensure that the valve fits into the chosen place. When you place the valve to the pipe, you can choose its direction by showing it with the mouse.

3D valves and components can be used in 2D and 3D modes, if 3D geometry has been modeled for the product.

When the valve/component is placed, it is shown as a 1D symbol when it is "dragged", even the 2D or 3D mode is on (it is then possible to choose the right direction for the 1D symbol). There are four alternatives for the direction of the 3D symbol:

1. When a valve is placed horizontally in the plan view (xy level of the storey origin) below the Middle of Room level, its positive z direction is the same as the positive z axis of the storey origin. If the valve is placed above that level, the positive z directs to the negative z axis of the storey origin. The flow direction is selected.

2. When a component is placed horizontally in the plan view (xy level of the storey origin) to a pipe, its positive z direction is the same as the positive z axis of the storey origin. The flow direction is selected.

3. When a valve/a component is placed vertically in the plan view to a pipe, the positive z direction of the valve/component is the selected direction. The flow direction cannot be selected.

4. When a valve/a component is placed in side the view to any pipe, the positive z direction of the valve/component is the selected direction. The flow direction is selected.

Is measuring valve to an automatic balancing valve option indicates that the valve has an impulse function and it is a part of a dynamic control system. In this case, the differential pressure valve should be placed to the same riser with this valve.

The differential pressure valve is placed in the same way as a zone valve. When the valve is placed, MagiCAD asks the differential pressure. The size for the differential pressure valve can be selected and locked.

Other Pipe Component This function installs other pipe components, for instance, pumps, water meters, mud filters and expansion joints.

Choose the suitable drawing symbol for each component.

You can model 2D symbols for other pipe components as well as for valves and sewer components. See "Modeling 2D products" for further information.

Place the component by showing the pipe. MagiCAD selects the most suitable size for the component. MagiCAD also uses the actual length of the component to check that the component fits into the place you try to place it. You can show the component direction when you place it.



Other Pipe Device Use this function to place the devices (power consumption points) to the drawing. Depending on the modeling method, MagiCAD asks either the power only or the power and pressure loss. You can also give a differential temperature that is different from the differential temperature that you have defined for the system (that is, dT by part). MagiCAD then calculates the flow according to this differential temperature. If you use dT by system, MagiCAD uses the inlet/outlet temperatures that are defined for the system.

* Direction option defines the direction of the device.

You can connect to these parts with 2-pipe drawing.

Manifold Pipe Manifold is a pipe part with the main connection and a variable number of sub-pipes with equal distances between the sub-pipes. The directions of the main pipe and sub-pipes can be changed individually. The number of sub-pipes and also other options can be later changed with the Part Properties function. Only main manifold size is predefined. Manifold sub-pipes are treated as branches in the calculations.



Sprinkler Use this function to place the sprinklers.

Select the sprinkler from the list. The list contains the K value, nominal release temperature, response time index, and connection size of each sprinkler. Select the system and installation height. Orientation can be selected if there are several alternatives.

Choose the status if needed. It can also be determined afterwards with Change Properties. -Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.

Select the drawing symbol from the bottom of the dialog. You can also model your own symbols for the sprinklers. Click the User Symbol button to select/modify/create the symbols. See chapter Modeling 2D symbols for further information.

If you want to present the vertical connection pipes of the sprinklers in the drawings, select the Use vertical pipe symbols option. In this case, in addition to the sprinkler symbol a filled circle is drawn to present the pipe that is leading upwards from the trunk pipe and an unfilled circle is drawn to present the pipe that is leading downwards. If the sprinkler is connected directly to the trunk pipe (with a T-branch), the additional symbol does not appear.

You can use the following commandline options when you place the sprinkler:

• Connect/noConnect to switch the connection on/off. Correspondingly, the search circle appears/disappears.

• Direction to rotate the device to the desired orientation.

• Array to place the sprinklers to cover the desired area.

• Options to return to the selection dialog.

The sprinkler can be placed to an empty space, to the end of the pipe, or to the middle of the pipe. When the sprinkler is placed to the end of the pipe, it rotates to the same direction as the pipe. When the sprinkler is placed to the middle of the pipe, it is installed directly to the trunk pipe with a T-piece to the orientation that is selected in the installation dialog (upwards/downwards).



When you use the Array option, give the area where the sprinklers will be installed. MagiCAD checks how many service areas fit in the area and places the sprinklers.

Sprinkler pipe This function is used to draw sprinkler pipes and connect individual sprinklers.

When the function is used for the first time, the following design options are given:

• Pipe Series

• Size

• Locked

• Insulation: The insulations are modeled by the user. MagiCAD shows the corresponding insulation thickness to the selected pipe size.


• Radius for flexible pipes: It is possible to use manual Radius for the flexible pipes (heating/cooling, water and sprinkler). The radius is still at least the minimum R/D value defined in the pipe series.

• Fall: The fall is given as per mill. The direction is selected between Downwards and Upwards. Usually it is recommended to draw the sprinkler pipes horizontally, because they can be then modified afterwards more freely. In this case, give zero as the fall.

• Routing Smart/Direct. If smart routing is used, MagiCAD tends to create the route using standards bends, whereas with direct routing the route is created directly between two points.

When the options have been given, MagiCAD prompts to show the start point of the pipe, showing the pipe size, locking (*), insulation, and the possible options:



• Connect/noConnect to switch the connection on/off. Correspondingly, the search circle appears/disappears.

• Angle to select the snap angle. The angle can be showed with the mouse or by typing the degrees (0..360). With the additional options it is also possible to select the following angle definitions: with two points (Two points), according to a MagiCAD object (Object) or in relation to the active angle (Relative).

• Options to open the design option dialog

• Last to grip to the last drawn free end of pipe, last drawn sprinkler, or similar.


When you have showed the start point, the commandline options change and MagiCAD waits for the endpoint of the pipe. The commandline options vary according to the start point. If you start drawing from the middle of the pipe, the following options appear on the commandline:

• Z to change the height level

• Back to return to the previous point

• Plug to plug to the ends of the pipes

• Connection node to set connection nodes to the ends of the pipes

• sprinkler to install the sprinkler while drawing the sprinkler pipe

If the start point is not an end of a pipe, Plug and Connection node options cannot be selected. In general, sprinkler pipe drawing is similar to the drawing method of other pipes. See, for example, chapter Supply and Return Pipes.

NB: If drawing is started from a sprinkler, MagiCAD always selects at least a 25mm pipe.

Connect Sprinklers to Pipe With this function it is possible to connect several sprinklers to one trunk pipe. The function prompts to select the sprinklers and the pipe where to connect them.

NB: If several sprinklers connect to the same branch, the recommended method is to connect first the furthermost sprinkler to trunk pipe and then connect the other sprinklers of the same branch to the new branches that were drawn.



Water/Special, 1-3 pipes Use this function to draw cold water, hot water, or circulation water pipes, or combinations of these.

The major differences compared to 2-pipe drawing are that you choose the pipes and insulations for three pipes, and you define two pipe spacings. Furthermore, the synchronizing option, which you can use in 2-pipe drawing, is not available in 3-pipe drawing.

Tap water point connections

Make the tap water point connections by starting/ending drawing from/to the water point. You can connect to the water points either with one pipe or with two pipes (if the water point has two connection points) at a time. The pipes can leave the water points to any direction.

Connection to a water radiator

Make the radiator connections by starting/ending drawing from/to the radiator. You can connect to the radiators either with one or two pipes at a time. The pipes leave the radiator to the directions that you selected when you placed the radiator (See chapter ”Radiator”).

Connection to a circulation water pipe

When you intend to make a connection between hot water and circulation water, draw hot water pipe. You can then choose the ReturnJoint command line option. When you select this option, MagiCAD asks the power of the connection. MagiCAD calculates the flow rate using this power and the differential temperature of the system, and draws a short circulation water pipe. You can continue drawing the circulation pipe with the 1-pipe drawing function.

Connecting the hot water pipe to a cold water pipe



When you intend to make a connection between hot water and cold water, draw cold water pipe. You can then choose the hotwaterJoint command line option. When you select this option, MagiCAD automatically draws a short hot water pipe, and you can continue drawing from it with the 1-pipe drawing function. Instead of hotwaterJoint it is possible to use the Substation functionality for this in MagiCAD 2008.5 (and newer).

Water and Sewer Point With this function, you can insert tap water points and sewer points.

The picture has been added

You can choose to place tap water point, sewer point, or both. Choose the water point from the upper list, and the sewer point from the lower list. Choose the system separately for both points.

H (height level) indicates the default installation height, which you can change, separately for the tap water points and sewer points. The height level of a sewer point is the height level of its top level. You can also change the default flow rates of the sewer points.

Choose the status if needed. It can also be determined afterwards with Change Properties. -Not defined- status means that MagiCAD uses the “normal” settings.

You can change the locations of the points in relation to each other with the dx and dy fields.

• Direction option can be used for rotating the water/sewer point group.

You can freely move the water/sewer points after placing them.



Water Radiator Use this function to insert radiators for hot water systems.

The functions are the same as with heating system radiators (see chapter "Radiator").

Insert Substation With this function you can define a substation, which can contain the desired number of heating circuits and water heaters. You can connect the heating and water pipes to the substation, so open ends are not needed except the cold water pipe that is entering the building. Neither it is necessary to use old kind of hot water joints any more.



• General – All general settings, that apply to the whole substation, are made

here:

o Main system – choose the system for the primary connections

o Use primary connection – if this is selected, you can define the technical data for the primary connection

o Primary connection status – this shows if the primary pipes are

connected to the substation

o Product Code – This is the product code for the whole unit and it is shown in bill of material list. This is obligatory setting.

• Heat Exchangers – All the heat exchangers which this substation includes. New heat exchangers are added with the Heating/Cooling… button, and new domestic water heaters are added with the Tap water... button. See more information below.

• Shape – Select the shape for the substation.

• Dimensions – Give dimensions for the substation, and set the locations of the connection points.



o Heat Exchanger – Select the heat exchanger whose connections

you want to move.

o Connection – Select the pipe you want to move.

o Status – This shows if some pipe is connected to that heat exchanger. If some pipe is connected, it is not possible to move the pipes.

o Side – with rotate button you can choose the side, where the pipe should be

o Distance from left edge – you can give the accurate value here, or you can also drag the connection in a preview window.

o Distance from bottom edge – you can give the accurate value here, or you can also drag the connection in a preview window.

o Connection size – choose the connection size for the pipe.

o Show only selected connection – When this is selected, only the active pipe is shown in the preview window.



Heat Exchangers Heating/Cooling

• General

o Description – Give the description to heat exchanger

o Connection status - This shows if some pipe is connected to that heat exchanger. If some pipe is connected, it is not possible to change the settings.

o System – Choose the system for the heat exchanger.

o Expansion pipe – if the expansion pipe is needed, choose the pipe.

o Fill pipe – if the fill pipe is needed, choose the pipe.

o Fill pipe system – choose the system for fill pipe.

• Reference point – Give the pressure loss of the heat exchanger – alternatively, define the pressure loss curve, in which case the pressure loss is defined according to the flow

o Qv (dm3/s) – If Lock dp is not selected, the pressure loss curve is defined by giving one point (flow, pressure loss) from the manufacturer’s pressure loss curve.

o Exchanger dp [kPa] – Define the pressure loss of the heat exchanger. If Lock dp is selected, the pressure loss is constant.

• Operating point – Summary of the calculation data of the system that is connected to the heat exchanger. The calculation data requires balancing the system.

o Power – Power of the system

o ptot [kPa] – Total pressure loss of the system. A suitable pump can be selected using this information.

o qv [dm3/s] – Flow of the system



o Exhanger dp [kPa] – Pressure loss of the heat exchanger

o Pipework dp [kPa] – Pressure loss of the pipes and components in the system

Tap water

• General

o Description – Give the description to the exchanger

o Connection status - This shows if some pipe is connected to that exchanger. If some pipe is connected, it is not possible to change the settings

o System – Choose the system for the exchanger

o Circulation water connection – This option must be selected, if a circulation water pipe is connected to the exchanger.

• Reference point – Give the pressure loss of the exchanger – alternatively, define the pressure loss curve, in which case the pressure loss is defined according to the flow

o Qv (dm3/s) – If Lock dp is not selected, the pressure loss curve is defined by giving one point (flow, pressure loss) from the manufacturer’s pressure loss curve.

o Exchanger dp [kPa] – Define the pressure loss of the exchanger. If Lock dp is selected, the pressure loss is constant.

• Operating point – Summary of the calculation data of the system that is connected to the heat exchanger. The calculation data requires balancing the system.

o Power – Power that is required to heat the water. Note: temperatures of hot and cold water are defined for the system.

o Exhanger dp [kPa] – Pressure loss of the exchanger

o qv [dm3/s] – Dimensioning flow of the system



Edit Substation With this function you can edit the existing substations.

Sewage Pipe Use this function to draw sewage pipes.

When you use this command for the first time, MagiCAD asks for the design options:

• Pipe series

• Size

• Locked

• Insulation: Insulations are user-defined. MagiCAD shows the insulation thickness, which is defined by the insulation series, to the selected pipe size.


• Fall is given as per mills. Choose either Downwards (drawing downstream) or Upwards (drawing upstream). You can also draw the sewers horizontally, which makes it easier to modify them afterwards. In this case, give zero as the fall.

• Routing Smart/Direct. If you have selected smart routing, MagiCAD tends to create the route using standard bends. If you have selected direct routing, MagiCAD creates a direct route between two points.

Routing Smart always tends to use standard bends (15°, 30°, and 45°). If the angle is more than 90°, MagiCAD can use two standard bends. 45° bend is always used with T-branches. If you have drawn the sewer with a fall, MagiCAD concludes the direction of the branch bevel from the sewer fall. On the other hand, if you have drawn the sewer without a fall, MagiCAD concludes the direction of the branch bevel from the point that you show from the main sewer. In this case, AutoCAD's ORTHO must be Off.



The drawing options are the same as in the other pipe drawing functions.

When you connect vertical pipes to horizontal sewers, MagiCAD shortens/lengthens the vertical pipes so that you can make the connection with the selected sewer fall and standard parts.

If you start drawing from a sewer point, the next point is not connected, and you draw sideways, MagiCAD makes the connection automatically to the center of the sewer point's side. If you draw downwards, MagiCAD makes the connection to the center of the sewer point's bottom. If you start drawing from a sewer point and connect to a sewer pipe without showing any points between, MagiCAD concludes the connection method according to the height levels. If the sewer point is sufficiently below the storey surface (that is, there is enough space to the sewer), MagiCAD makes the connection to the sewer point's size; otherwise, MagiCAD makes the connection to the sewer point's bottom.

Sometimes, if the sewer point is very close to the sewer you try to connect, you cannot use standard parts for the connection. In these cases, try to connect downstream.

Routing Direct does not try to use standard parts. It always makes the bends exactly how you draw them. MagiCAD makes the connections directly between the showed points and ignores the defined sewer falls. In these cases, the sewer has the fall according to the height levels of the start and endpoints.

The Polar tracking feature of AutoCAD 2000 is a convenient tool if 15, 30 and 45° bends are used. You can easily draw the sewers with the desired bends.

Other Sewer Component This function installs sewer components.

You can choose a suitable drawing symbol for the sewer component.

You can model 2D symbols for sewer components as well as for valves and other pipe components. See "Modeling 2D symbols" for further information.

Install the component by showing the pipe. MagiCAD chooses the most suitable component size. MagiCAD also uses the actual length of the component when checking that it fits into the showed place.

Modeling 2D symbols You can model new symbols for valves and other pipe/sewer components. These symbols are in use in the wireframe (1D) mode.

Start modeling by clicking the User Symbol button. You can restore the default symbol to the part with the Reset symbol button.

The insertion point of the symbol is in the middle in x and y direction.

First, select one of the symbols that appear in the installation dialog, and select a symbol. The User symbol button activates. When you click the button, the Select Symbol dialog opens. The dialog is divided into two panes.



In the left pane you can group the modeled symbol as a tree. Grouping the symbol is not required, but it makes it easier to handle various kinds of symbols. When you select a symbol group in the left pane, the symbols belonging to that group appear in the right pane.

The groups and their possible subgroups are managed with the following buttons:

• Delete Selected Group

• Create a New Group to Root

• Create a New Subgroup under Selected Group

• Rename Group

The symbol files are managed with the following buttons:

• Create a New Symbol Library File

• Open Another Symbol Library File

• Save Symbol Library File as Another File

The symbols in the right pane are managed with the following buttons:

• Edit Symbol

• Delete Selected Symbol

• Create a New, Empty Symbol

• Copy Symbol

• Paste Copied Symbol

The symbol is drawn/modified on a new, blank symbol base or an existing symbol. Click the buttons of the Edit Symbol dialog to add an elementary symbol (line, circle, triangle, etc) to the editing window. You can reshape the elementary symbols by moving their adjustment handles. With the other buttons you can move and zoom the symbol. You can also remove a selected elementary symbol.

Define the length of the symbol in 1D mode as millimeters in the Symbol length field.

When you exit the Edit Symbol dialog with the OK button, the symbol is saved into the file.

You can start using the symbol after activating it (the background turns blue) and clicking the Select Model button. Then the symbol will be available in that project.



Edit menu

Part Properties With this function, you can examine or edit the properties of an individual part. The properties vary according to the part type.

It is possible to open the Part Properties dialog by double-clicking the object. You can also open the Part Properties dialog from AutoCAD shortcut menu (right mouse click). That is, if the selection set contains any MagiCAD objects and if several objects are selected, you can select the object from the Select Part dialog.

This feature is not available for revision arrow. Part Properties using double-click is available only in AutoCAD 2007 and AutoCAD 2008 platforms.

Change the Running index, height position, insulation series and also duct/pipe series, size, lock and swap status for ducts and pipes in the Part Properties dialog with buttons: “Change Z…”, “Change size…”, “Change insulation” and “Change RI”.

It is possible to change Z. only in the top view. Use the Change Properties functions to change the properties of connectors, bends, T-branches, plugs, etc.

With this function it is possible to give airflow for an air device, or airflow and pressure loss for an unconnected flow connection (Destination=NONE). It is also possible to affect the appearance of certain air devices and change the size of an air terminal device.

You can resize the radiators and lock the pressure drops of radiator/zone valves, air terminal devices, and flow regulators. It is also possible to lock and change the sizes of these valves.

You can change the settings of a cross-section by showing the section mark or the boundary box. The cross-section is updated by showing the boundary of the actual cross-section.

Note the following if you change the Connection node ID with the Part Properties function: If the connection node is connected to another drawing, it is disconnected. The connection nodes can be reconnected when they have the same ID again.

You can also examine the information in a reference drawing. Select Xref from the menu.



Branch Copy You can use this function to copy branches or entire systems that are completely in the active drawing.

First, show the start point (root node) of the branch. The start point can be, for example, a connector (T-branch, bend, reducer) or an open duct/pipe end. Next, show the duct or pipe where the area continues (segment). When you copy a heating/cooling/waterpipe branch, do this for each pipe separately. In case of water system pipes, the order is cold—warm—circular, but you can select any of these pipes as the first.

The parts that you copy then appear with dashed line.

The command line options:

• Connect/noConnect – Connection on/off. The search circle is shown in the cursor when Connect option is active.

• Basepoint – Show the basepoint for the copying function. Next, show the new location for the basepoint (ie. Reference point) either at the command line or showing it with the mouse.

You can repeat the copying with a single command as many times as necessary.

Branch Erase Select the branch as in the Branch Copy function. When you show the direction (duct or pipe), MagiCAD removes the branch and connects the ducts/pipes together at the branch location.

You can copy or erase branch only with one duct/pipe at a time. For example, when you erase branches in heating systems, you must erase the supply pipe and return pipe separately.

Part Erase This function removes ducts/pipes, components, and other parts.

If there are several parts in the showed place, MagiCAD shows a list of the parts you can remove. It is not possible to remove reducers, bends or branches with this function.

You can also remove the storey origin in the project dialog by unselecting the project.

Move Parts This function moves ducts/pipes, components, and other parts.

You can move an air device, a radiator or a component only in the direction of the duct/pipe.

Command line option:

• Z is used when the part is moved in Z direction.



Side Movement Use this function to change the reducers of the duct lines or the pipelines eccentric. The function targets to one duct line or pipe line at a time. After you have selected the line, you can show the side of the alignment, or you can choose the following option at the command prompt:

• ceNter (changes the reducer’s central)

In the following illustration, the left picture represents the ducts before the side movement. The right picture represents "align top". The alignment is made according to the largest duct. Side movement can be done also with AutoCAD command stretch.

Change Properties A list of the variables that you can change forms according to the selected property group.

Common variables (excluding Dimtext properties):

* UserVar1 and UserVar2 fields are used for setting the user-defined fields of the selected parts. You can use the user-defined fields eg. for controlling the calculation of the bill of materials.

* Drawing mode locks the drawing mode of the part. The available options are: * By drawing (the drawing mode is predetermined by the drawing mode that is defined for the project. See also chapter "Drawing Preferences") * 1D (shows the ducts/pipes as lines and the other parts in the work-drawing mode – represents the work-drawing mode in the piping systems) * 2D (shows the part in Active2D mode, which represents the work-drawing mode in the ductworks) * 3D (shows the parts in 3D)

* Insulation visibility changes the insulation visibility of the selected parts: * By drawing (See also Drawing Preferences) * Insulation invisible * Duct/pipe invisible * Draw both

* Duct/Pipe series changes the series of the selected ducts/pipes. The changes only affect after sizing.

* Duct/Pipe size changes the sizes of the selected ducts/pipes. The series, size, height/width swapping with rectangular ducts, and locking are selected in this dialog. MagiCAD automatically sizes the parts that connect to the changed ducts/pipes.

* Lock duct/pipe size: the sizing does not change the sizes of the locked ducts/pipes.



* Unlock duct/pipe size releases the locking of the selected ducts/pipes.

* Insulation series sets the selected insulation series to the selected parts.

* Reduction length changes the length of the reducers.

* System changes the selected parts to the desired system.

* 2D center line type changes the linetype of the centerline to a specific type or by the project

* 2D center line color changes the color of the centerline to a specific color or by the project

* 1D/2D Edge line type changes the outline type of the selected parts.

* 1D/2D Detail line type changes the detail line type of the selected parts.

* 1D/2D Edge line color changes the outline color of the selected parts.

* 1D/2D Detail line color changes the detail line color of the selected parts.

Property group: Ductworks

* Bend type changes the selected bends to match the definitions you have given in the dialog.

* Branch type changes the selected branches to match the definitions you have given in the dialog.

* Reduction length

* Bend R/D defines the ratio of the bend radius and the duct diameter.

* Air device flow for changing the air flow for many devices

Property group: Heating, Cooling and Special systems

• Reduction length

* 2D centerline type changes the line type to a certain type or to the project-specific line type.

• 2D centerline color changes the line color to a certain color or to the project-specific line color.

• Power for other pipe device changes the power of the selected devices

• Bend R/D defines the ratio of the bend radius and the pipe diameter.

Property group: Water Systems

* Simultaneity % changes the simultaneity rate of the selected pipe. MagiCAD calculates the flow rate of the pipe using the sum of the standard flows, multiplied by the simultaneity percentage, as the highest individual standard flow rate.

* Bend R/D defines the ratio of the bend radius and the pipe diameter.

Property group: Dimtext

* Dimtext height changes the height of the selected dimension texts.

* Scale Dimtext height scales the height of the selected dimension texts.

* Dimtext style changes the text style of the selected dimension texts.

* Dimtext color changes the color of the selected dimension texts.

* Dimtext format changes the format of the selected dimension texts



* Ref.line symbol scale factor changes the scale factor for the dimension text reference line symbol

Find and Replace With this function you can replace, for example, existing pipe/duct/insulation series, air devices, water points, radiators, or zone valves.

Group indicates the group whose products are searched/replaced. Objects to Change selection is used as a filter for the products shown in the From and To fields.

You can also select the product to replace from the drawing. In this case, choose the From / Select data from existing part option. The Group and Objects to Change are filled correspondingly. You can also select a new product from the drawing, but the abovementioned fields are not automatically filled.

With air devices, radiators, and radiator valves, this function is done to one size at a time. When you replace an air terminal device, the diffusor/grille is kept in its original place, if possible.

Replacing can be done to the entire drawing, selected objects or selected system. You can use either AutoCAD’s search or extended MagiCAD search for selecting the objects. If you use the extended search, you can choose from the following options:

• Single Part – Searching one part. If there are several parts at the same location, a selection list opens.

• Branch – Selecting a branch, like in the branch sizing function.

• Network – Selecting all parts that are connected to the part either directly or through other parts.

• System – Selecting the entire system. It can contain several separate networks.

• Between – Selecting all parts between the two parts, except branches.



You can combine these search options and also use them with AutoCAD’s search.

Both the old and new products must be selected to the project. You can also use this function for changing the UserCode. In this case, the product is selected twice using different UserCodes. It is then possible to “replace the product with itself” so that the new product has the desired UserCode. Select the old product to the field on the left side, and the new product to the field on the right side.

Information of the replaced products appears on the command line after replacing.

Break Duct or Pipe This function cuts the duct or pipe between two showed points.

Joint Part You can divide a duct/pipe into separate parts by inserting a node (i.e. joint part).

By using nodes, it is possible to eg. divide a duct/pipe into several parts with different modes of insulation visibility or different dimensions.

Connect Node Connect connection nodes by selecting the drawing where the connection nodes will connect. MagiCAD outputs the name of the drawing where the counterpart exists.

The window shows the active directory, which contains drawings whose connection nodes you can connect to the current drawing (by default, the same directory as the directory of the current drawing). You can connect connection nodes from any directory.

You can direct connection node connection to a particular system, or you can search the connection nodes from all systems. You can also direct connection node search to a particular part of the active drawing.

The counterparts that belong to the same system and have the same ID number are connected. If the drawing, where the connections are searched from, contains an unconnected connection node that directs to the open drawing, a new connection node is created to the open drawing. This means that new connection nodes can appear to the drawing when the connection is made.

A vertical connection node appears as a duct/pipe end in the work-drawing mode.

Storey dimensions can be ignored when importing connection nodes. If Ignore storey deminsion is enabled then the storey dimensions are not taken into account when importing connection nodes. This allows importing connection nodes outside the storey boundaries and whose direction can be any.

The drawing where the connection nodes are search from must not be read-only. You must also be able to write to the layers of the systems you are connecting.

The connection status appears on the command line. If there errors occur during the connection, an error message dialog will open.

See also chapters Duct and Supply and return pipes.

NOTE ! If you change the Connection node ID with the Part Properties function. If the connection node is connected to another drawing, it is disconnected. The connection nodes can be reconnected when they have the same ID again.



Disconnect Node For connection node disconnection, you can select one of the drawings or all drawings. You can also disconnect the connection nodes of a particular system or a selected area.

The counterpart of the connection node disconnects if the drawing in question can be opened.

The number of disconnections appears on the command line.

Connection Node Report Use this command to locate the connection nodes in a drawing.

Dimension Texts Choose the drawing options from the command line (or from the menu that opens with a right-click):

• Underline, line under the text

• Overline, line over the text

• Byside, texts side by side

• Format, change/modify the active style

When you have selected the part for the dimension text, you can also use the following options:

• Add Part, information of several parts to the same dimension line

• Midpoints, midpoint of the dimension line

Adding up the flows of the air devices is done only if the first part that is selected to the dimension line is an air device. It is possible to select only air devices to the dimension line, if the first selected part is an air device and adding the air devices is set as the active style.

Dimension line texts are defined according to the active style of each part. The active style can be used from the project or from the drawing. This is done by User Preferences setting Use active dimension text settings from Drawing / Project. This prevents changing other users’ active dimension text in multi-user projects.

You can also underline/overline the dimension texts with the Part Properties function.

Automatic Dimension Texts Automatic dimension text function uses the same dimension text formats as the ordinary dimension text function.

When this command is started, a group selection dialog opens. By default, the dimension text function uses the same dimension text format as the active format of the ordinary dimension text function. The active format is selected with the mouse. Unlike in the ordinary dimension text function, automatic dimension text can contain several formats. Selecting a new format unselects the previous selection.

When the dialog is closed, MagiCAD prompts to show the parts using extensive search. It is possible to select individual parts or areas with AutoCAD’s own



search, but it is also possible to use MagiCAD’s selection of individual part, branch, network, system, or section between selected parts.

MagiCAD always removes the possible existing dimension texts before placing the new automatic dimension texts.

Even though it is possible to use the same dimension text formats both in the ordinary dimension texts and the automatic dimension texts, it is recommended to define the following settings for the automatic dimension texts:

Duct/Pipe text settings

• Show dimension changes has an effect in the dimension texts of the ducts/pipes. If this option is selected, dimension texts are always placed in connection with the changes in the sizes (reducers, T-pieces, etc).

• min D defines the minimum size for the duct/pipe that will have the dimension text

• max D defines the maximum size for the duct/pipe that will have the dimension text

• min L defines the minimum length for the duct/pipe that will have the dimension text

Text direction selections affect the orientation of the dimension texts, and their position in relation to the object.

• UCS direction – the dimension text is placed in the UCS direction

• Parallel to object edgeline – the dimension text is placed in the same direction as the object, outside the edgeline

• Parallel to object centerline – the dimension text is placed in the same direction as the object, beside the centerline

dx- ja dy values define the location of the dimension text in relation to the object. If either Parallel to... is selected, dx is the direction of the object.

Insert running index Insert running index by selecting the Insert Running Index function. Install Running Index dialog opens automatically if the command is selected first time. Later you can open this dialog by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Options.



• Text Group – Used for filtering the Text field

• Text – select the format

o From object – copies the format from an object

• Number – shows the next used number. If nothing is shown, press “Next free…”

o Use first available number – selects the first available number which has to be bigger than the “first number” anyway. If e.g. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19 are used, the next free is 15.

o Use given number or next available – you can give the smallest allowed number, which has to be bigger than “First number” in format.

o Next Free – gives the next free number. If you have decided to allow the same numbers in different systems, the system is asked.

• Use the same number for all indexes – if this option is selected, you can insert the same numbers as many times as you want.

• Check indexes from other model drawings – if this is selected, MagiCAD also checks that there are no same indexes in other model drawings. It is checked when “Install” , ”Free”or ”Edit” button is pressed.

• Add Part Property Line – If this selected, MagiCAD automatically adds PartPropertyLine to objects after installing the Running Index.

• Edit… – This function is for checking, renumbering, removing of running indexes. See “Edit running index”.

When the settings have been defined, insert the running index to objects by selecting Install. After installing the running index to the first object, object type is locked for this installing session. It means that when you install the running index e.g. to zone valve, also the next object has to be zone valve. MagiCAD does not give any other object types to the selection. When you quit and restart the command, the object type locking is released.



Edit running index Edit running index by selecting the Insert Running Index command. Install Running Index dialog opens automatically if the command is selected for the first time. Later you can open this dialog by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Options. From Install Running Index-dialog select Edit... opens Modify Running Indexes-dialog.

• Filter – It is for filtering which Running indexes are shown in the

dialog.

• Indexes – The running indexes in current project and included in the filter.

• Text – Running index text format

• Index – these numbers have been used. If Compressed is selected only first and last number is shown.

• Text – Running index group format

• Part Type – part type which have been selected

• System – system of the object

• Drawing – drawing where index has been inserted. Name is shown as a relative path.

• File Status – ”Empty”: drawing is opened and ready for editing (editing of other than the current dwg is not possible in MagiCAD Electrical); “Not opened”: not opened, but it could be opened; “Locked”: someone else has opened the drawing

• Note – all possible annotation is displayed here

It is possible to select several rows by using the Shift -ja Ctrl buttons. By using the Select All button you can select all rows, and with the Deselect All button you can deselect all rows.

• Current Values of Selected – The first and last number of the selected Indexes.

• New Values – If you want to renumber the indexes, you can either give the new first or last number and press the ”Apply” button. Gaps are removed, if ”Remove gaps” is selected.



Removing Running Index Use the Remove Running Index function to remove the running index from the object.

Set MagiCAD Data to AutoCAD Objects With this function you can define MagiCAD data to AutoCAD objects, which makes it possible to include these objects in the bill of materials, IFC Export, and MagiCAD Export lists.

Click the Set MagiCAD Data to AutoCAD Objects toolbar button, and select the object to which you want to define MagiCAD data. You can change the data afterwards by using the same function.

Sections menu

Section Marks With this function, the cross-section areas are defined and cross-section marks are drawn.

The Text feature of the cross-section can consist of max. eight characters (also small caps can be used). You can also give a Description for the cross-section.

The cross-section area is defined with three dimensions:

• Lower Z – the height level of the lower surface in relation to the storey origin

• Upper Z – the height level of the upper surface in relation to the storey origin



• Depth – default depth

You can also select the type of the section. It can be either a conventional section type (Section) or detailed drawing (Detail).

The detail drawing retains its original orientation, whereas the section is rotated so that it is looked from the side.

If you choose to make a conventional section, define the cross-section area by drawing the crossline and pressing Enter. Next, give the direction for the cross-section.



If you select the detailed section, define the area by drawing crossline around it, and finally close the area by pressing Enter.

If SECTION MARK – Show section mark boundary is selected in the Drawing Preferences dialog, boundary box is drawn around the cross-section area.

You can move the boundaries of the cross-section (ie. boundary box), or change its depth, by moving its corner grips or by using AutoCAD's STRETCH.

You can change the properties of the cross-section with the Part Properties function.

The cross-section according to the settings here defined is made with the Make Section function.

Make Section This function creates a cross-section of the selected section marks. See chapter “Section Mark” for further information.

The function prompts the parts that will be included in the cross-section:

• MagiCAD Heating, Piping and Ventilation parts

• MagiCAD Electrical objects

• MagiCAD Electrical cables

• AutoCAD objects – all objects except solids are handled. The blocks are handled as whole, ie. they are not exploded first.

• AEC/ADT objects

• Reference drawing (Xref)

In addition you can select

• Automatic MagiCAD Hide, which uses the active Hide settings.

• Whether to show the name of the source drawing. It may be useful e.g. if the cross-section is copied to another drawing.

Finally show the place for the cross-section. Before drawing the cross-section, MagiCAD browses through the entire drawing checking which parts will be



included in the cross-section, creates MagiCAD objects from the selected objects, and performs Hide if preferred.

You can copy the cross-section to another drawing in the same project. The cross-section is updated with the Part Properties function.

The parts that are included in the cross-section are not taken into account in sizing or bill of materials. MagiCAD shows the parts either in Active2D mode or 3D mode depending on the original mode of the drawing. If the drawing is in the wireframe mode, cross-section is made in Active2D. It is possible to add dimension lines to a section, and hide the section. You can explode the section into blocks, and then you can freely modify it with AutoCAD's editing functions. See chapter “Explode MagiCAD objects” for further information.

It is possible to set the height level to the dimension line only with the horizontal ducts/pipes in the section.

Quick Section This function creates a cross-section of the selected parts. First, select the parts you want to include in the cross-section. Then show the viewpoint and the inspection direction and set the location of the cross-section.

The parts that are included in the cross-section are not taken into account in sizing or bill of materials. MagiCAD always shows the parts in Active2D mode regardless of the original drawing mode.



View menu

Drawing Preferences In the Drawing Preferences dialog you can select the active systems of the drawing, that is, the systems that can be selected e.g. when drawing ducts or pipes. You can also change all linetypes and colors at the same time in this dialog – and restore them to the project-specific settings.

In addition, you can set the Hide function, which is run when the drawing is saved in MagiCAD, active in this dialog. This setting is viewport-specific, and you must set to each viewport separately whether the hide is performed.

• Enabler Options – You can set the linetypes and colors of all MagiCAD

objects at the same time in the whole drawing. You can restore the original settings by clicking the Retain settings button.

• Systems – select the active systems that can be available in the selection lists of drawing and calculation functions. The objects appear in the drawing regardless of these selections.

• Auto Hide – you can set active the hiding function during saving Note: The hiding is carried out in the viewports whose Hide this viewport when saving option is selected in the Viewport Preferences/Hide options tab.

• HPV Objects in Xrefs – shows HP&V objects as saved in the model space. This allows plot drawings including hide information from also Xrefs. Note that sometimes the drawing must be opened again, or Xrefs need to be reloaded, to be able to see the hide information.

Hide, Reset Hide When you select this function, MagiCAD asks you to choose a set of parts for calculating the hidden lines.



MagiCAD hides (or draws with dashed line) the pipes, ducts, etc that will be behind other MagiCAD objects.

With Active2D technology, it is possible to choose the parts precisely. For instance, MagiCAD hides only those air devices and pipe components that actually are behind other parts. You can use the hiding function at any viewpoint or section.

MagiCAD draws points (so-called handles) on the Defpoints layer which represent the base points of the hidden parts . Defpoints layer is not printed, which means that the points do not show in the printouts.

The hidden parts will be unhidden if they are, for example, copied or moved, their insulations are changed, or if you use the Find & Replace command.

The linetype and color of the hidden line are defined in the project management.

It is possible to affect the drawing preferences of the hidden parts with the command options:

• Ducts/Pipes – Hidden line type choose the presentation of the hidden parts as dashed line or invisible

• Ducts/Pipes – Distances fields indicate how much MagiCAD reserves spaces between the hiding line and the unbroken part, and the minimum length for the pipes. You can define the minimum length only if the presentation mode is invisible.

Reset hide unhides the hidden parts visible in the selected area.

You can hide all objects in the drawing with the ALL option of the Select Object function.

Show Selected Parts Only, Show All Parts These functions hide/show the parts that are outside the selected area.

These functions are convenient especially when you edit the system in the viewpoint from the side, when you examine an area/a system/a part of the system, or when you make cross-sections or other views.

You can use either AutoCAD’s search or MagiCAD’s extended search when you select the objects.

Part Property Line This function shows the desired property of the selected components.



System group is the group whose products you examine. The property lines appear on MAGI_GARBAGE layer and they disappear when the layer is cleared.

* Range: this selection is directed either to ducts/pipes or to duct/pipe system components.

* Property: select the property you wish to include in the property line from this list.

* System / System type: select all systems, one system, or a part of a system (for example, supply pipe).

* Duct/Pipe length limitation can be used for excluding short duct/pipes from the output.

* Text height of the property text.

MagiCAD concludes the parts from the selected property.

The color and text style of the reference texts are defined according to the layer settings.

Note: when you examine e.g. the properties of flownodes, select Others in the Range definition.

If you want to keep the information in the drawing, move these from the MAGI_GARBAGE layer to another layer with AutoCAD commands.

Collision Control With this function you can examine possible collisions, for example, between heating pipes and air ducts.

Select the collision types in the Options dialog. Open the dialog with a right-click or with the Options (o) command line option.



Next, define the area. The collision control works in the normal plan view.

Information about the collision is gathered in the Show Messages dialog (see chapter ”Error handling”). With the dialog functions you can place the error ticks to the drawing. Remove the ticks with the collision control button or with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

You can set the minimum size for the pipes that will be checked. If one of the colliding pipes is smaller than the limit, the collision is ignored.

It is also possible to set a tolerance for the collisions. With negative tolerance, the parts are allowed to be inside each other, whereas with positive tolerance space is reserved around the parts e.g. for installation or maintenance. In this case, the bigger value of the tolerances of the ”colliding parts” is taken into account; for example, if the ducts have 200mm tolerance and the pipes have 100mm tolerance, sufficient distance between these two is 200mm.

You can also select MagiCAD, AutoCAD, or ADT/AEC objects (walls, windows, etc) to the collision check. Collision check for the latter objects requires that MagiCAD is used with AutoCAD 2006 or later, or with AutoCAD Architecture (previously called Architectural Desktop).

In addition, it is possible to check the collisions with the objects drawn with MagiCAD Electrical. Select Duct/Pipe/Sewer – Electrical objects in the Options dialog.

The boundaries of the collision check area can be saved. If Save collision boundary is selected, the boundaries are saved in the layer that is reserved for them. The markings that are selected in the message handling dialog are saved. The layer is cleared when the collision check is run again. If you want to save the collision boundaries, change their layer before running a new collision check.



Calculations menu

Flow Summation This function calculates the flow rates of the systems. The water volume of the heating/cooling system is calculated, as is done by the sizing and balancing functions. System group indicates the system that is calculated. Flow summation calculates one system at a time. You can select the scope of the calculations with the following options:

* Branch MagiCAD asks for the start node and the duct/pipe of the branch.

* System – current drawing MagiCAD calculates the entire system of the active drawing. Choose the system from the list. With the External flownodes option you can choose whether to use the values that MagiCAD calculated last time or whether to read the flow rate from a connected flownode. (In the latter case, the connected drawings must not be read-only.)

With the heating and cooling systems, flow summation outputs the water volume of the system (pipes and radiators) besides the flows. You can examine the volume with the Part Properties function at the open ends of the supply pipes. This function shows the volume of the entire system, not a single subsystem.

See also chapters “Circular routes” and “Air device on the side of a duct”.

After performing the calculation, MagiCAD may show a report of errors and/or warnings in the Show Messages dialog. For further information see chapter "Error handling".

Sizing The sizing function always calculates the flow rates. Therefore, it is not necessary to run the flow summation before running the sizing function.

MagiCAD calculates the systems or system branches using the sizing method you have chosen. The scope of the calculations and the error messages are similar to those with the Flow Summation function.

The sizing function rotates the beveled outlet collars of the rectangular ducts to the flow direction.

When sizing the domestic water systems MagiCAD calculates the flow rate, flow rate of the fire hydrant, and flow rate of the circulation water pipes. Cold water piping is sized either according to the calculated flow rate or the flow rate of the fire hydrant, depending on which one is higher. Hot water piping is sized correspondingly either according to the flow rate or according to the circulation water flow rate. See also Change Properties / Simultaneity %.





Balancing Balancing (pressure loss calculation) can be done regardless of the flow summation being calculated or the system being sized. The balancing function calculates the flow rates and uses the existing pipe/duct/device sizes.

The scope of the calculations and the error messages are similar to those in the Flow Summation function.

• Show the index run: when you have selected this option, MagiCAD shows also the most significant flow route.

MagiCAD distributes the pressure loss for the consecutive so that the excessive pressure is throttled as close to the start point of the system as possible. However, the dampers/regulating valves always have the minimum pressure loss, which is defined in the system-modeling dialog.

You can place the regulating valves to either the supply or the return pipe in the heating/cooling systems.

MagiCAD also calculates the preset values of the valves. MagiCAD rounds the result of the radiator valve or zone valve to match the nearest curve. If the valve has only on/off positions, MagiCAD does not round the result.

If it is not possible to balance a route with the selected devices, MagiCAD shows the device that could not be set to balance with the rest of the system (MagiCAD places an error tick on the device’s location if the device is in the active drawing). You can see the need of additional balancing with the Part Properties function, which shows how much the pressure at the device exceeds the maximum pressure loss of the device.

However, it is possible to set a tolerance for the air devices, which allows deviations from the ideal balancing situation. In this case, warning is given only in the situations where the pressure drop from the air device at the corresponding airflow exceeds the maximum pressure drop of the air terminal device within the given percentage.

You can balance the ventilation/heating/cooling systems either according to the lowest possible pressure at the open end or according to a specified fan/pump pressure. If the given pressure is lower than the lowest possible pressure, the given pressure is ignored.

If differential pressure valves are used in the heating/cooling system, the riser bounded with the differential pressure valve and the measuring valve is balanced according to the given differential pressure. In this case, the radiator valve of the index run does not have the minimum pressure drop that is defined in the system dialog; instead, it has the pressure drop that depends on the preset value of the differential pressure valve. The minimum pressure drop for the differential pressure valve in the index run is defined in the same way as for a zone valve (the Minimum dp for zone valves [kPa] setting in the system dialog).

This function also calculates the pressures of the domestic water systems according to the initial pressure you have defined in the system-modeling dialog.

If the flow rate of a tap water point is outside the limits of the standard flow rate (defined in the system dialog as per cent), an error tick will appear on the tap water point. If a circulation water pipe connects to the domestic water system, the system is balanced as a 2-pipe system.



Balancing of an individual branch does not result the final pressure level, but you can use the function for examining the pressure losses of the routes within



the branch. It is however useful to see if that part of the system can in fact be balanced rather than waiting until the whole system is complete and finding that the minor branches will not balance properly.

Flow Route Examination Flow route examination outputs the pressure loss calculation between the selected part and the open end. You can examine the flow routes of balanced systems only.

If you show a radiator or other power consumption point in a heating/cooling system, MagiCAD performs the pressure loss calculation for both supply pipe and return pipe.

You can choose the scope of the output in the Options dialog:

• Short: MagiCAD outputs only duct/pipes, valves, and other components of the system. The duct/pipe sections between branches are output on a single line if the size and series are not changed. MagiCAD does not output branches and bends. However, MagiCAD sums their pressure losses up to the ducts/pipes.

• All parts: MagiCAD outputs the information about all parts.

• Branch to branch: MagiCAD outputs the calculation between the showed part and the next node towards the open end. In this way, you can examine, for instance, the pressure loss between two branches or the pressure loss at the connection duct/pipe.

MagiCAD gives a message in the Notes column if the limits you have given in the sizing criteria and the system dialog are exceeded:

• (v) maximum velocity

• (R) maximum frictional pressure loss

• (dp) warning limit of the pressure loss

You can either print the report or copy it to the clipboard.


If several systems are calculated at the same time, flow route examination is not possible – if that is wanted, calculate the given system separately.

Sound Calculation of Flow Route This function is similar to the Flow Route Examination. This function outputs the sound calculations between the start point of the ductwork (sound source) and the selected air terminal device. You can select this calculation only after you have balanced the ductwork.

You can give the sound levels of the sound source (fan) by octave bands in the system dialog. MagiCAD shows the calculation results of all ductwork part. The output shows sound attenuation, sound generation, and sound level of each part by octave bands.

Finally, MagiCAD reckons with the A weighting and the standard 10 m2 Sabine room attenuation.


If several systems are calculated at the same time sound route examination is not possible – if that is wanted, calculate the given system separately.



Sound Calculation of All Flow Routes You can choose this function only after you have balanced the system. MagiCAD shows the sound level of each air device with reference lines.

The result is not only the sound level of the air device. It includes also the sound of the duct.

Bill of Materials With this function you can form two kinds of lists.

With the Bill of Materials selection you can create a conventional part list on the screen. You can create and modify more specific list with the MagiCAD Export selection. Both list types can be copied to the clipboard, and you can also print the on-screen bill of materials directly.

The selections made in the Bill of Materials dialog apply to both list types. You can target the calculations on all systems, or you can select the systems. The calculation can cover several drawings (which you can select from the list), the active drawing, or the selected area in the active drawing. You can set filters for the bill of materials with the user-defined UserVar1 and UserVar2 fields. You can also define an Output header, which is also copied to the clipboard.

The selection sets can be saved. System groups, System, Area, Criteria and Output header settings are saved with the desired name in the project database.

Select the properties (parts/devices and attributes) for the device list from the list in the MagiCAD Export. You can save different kinds of device list templates.

• Configuration

o Conf. file – You can open/save device list files (configurations)

o Selected conf. – You can save/remove/rename the list types

• Include these parts/objects – Select the parts/devices to the list

o With the Select all and Deselect all buttons you can select all possible part/device types and clear all selections

• Include these attributes – Click the green arrow to select the attributes of the parts/devices to the list. The selected attributes appear in the Selected attributes/columns pane.

• Selected attributes/columns – the selected attributes



o With the Include column headers you can include the attribute column headers in the list

o With the arrow buttons you can change the locations of the attribute columns

o Delete attribute removes the attribute column

• Copy to Clipboard copies the device list to the clipboard (and you can then paste it to eg. Excel)

• Save to File saves the device list to a directory you can choose freely. The list is saved in .txt format, with TAB separator.

COM interface can be used for reading all MagiCAD object data directly from the drawing e.g. with Visual Basic macros. Some information can also be written to the drawing. The more detailed documentation of the interface is available separately.

Special cases in the ductworks

The mirror function of air terminal devices When mirroring eccentric devices the program uses the following logic.

Flow goes up or down related to the current view (vertical flow), mirroring of eccentric devices is done like in the picture above.

In other cases mirroring is done like in the standard mirror, but in this case the installation point of the device will be changed like in the following pictures.



NOTE ! Warning “A device might be mirrored in wrong way“ appears on the screen when eccentric devices are mirrored.

Air device on the side of a duct It is possible to place air terminal devices to the side of a duct without a branch (e.g. T-piece). In this case, the duct is handled as one entire duct.

• Airflows can be read from the air terminal devices normally.

• The duct has only one airflow, which is the maximum airflow.

• The duct is dimensioned according to its maximum airflow.

• In pressure drop calculations each piece of duct between air devices is handled separately, because the aiflows are not the same. The duct is handled as one duct in the outputs.

• In sound calculations each piece of duct between air devices is handled separately. The duct is handled as one duct in the outputs.



Circular routes Calculation functions for ductworks can now handle temporary branches that reconnect later in the system. The parts at both ends must be common to both branches. The common start point/endpoint can be, besides a T, X, or N branch, a distribution box. There cannot be circular routes inside each other, and the side route cannot contain branches.

Flow summation distributes the flowrates evenly between the branches. These flows are used in the sizing function. At the startpoint of the circular route (i.e. the room’s side), the minimum size restrictions are reset to make it possible to have smaller ducts in the branches compared to the main duct.

Balancing distributes the flowrates so that the total pressure drop is the same in all routes. Pressure drop output checks one of the routes. However, the pressure value can be read from all parts, and e.g. it is possible to examine them with Part Property Line (like the flowrate in the dimension line). Hence, the flowrate in the dimension line varies according to the performed calculation type (sizing or balancing).

All dampers in the circular route are set open and they are not used for adjusting. Even their minimum dp value, which is defined in the system settings, is ignored.

Sound calculation checks all routes and sums up the sounds at the connection point. Output, however, shows only the results of the calculation in one route.

An example of a possible circular route:



Documentation menu

Type Free Text, Edit Free Text With this function, you can add and edit short free texts and reference texts to the drawing.

The command opens the Free Texts dialog, in which it is possible to write/edit free text in multiple row edit field, or define the following settings to the texts:

• Height: Define the height of the text (in 1:1 scale)

• Style: Text style (eg. font, bold, italic, effects,..) . It is possible to add text styles to the drawing by using AutoCAD’s Format/Text style function.

• System: Pick the system information of a MagiCAD part. The system code separates the texts of each system to the corresponding layers, if you have defined the system variable SV1, SV2 or SV3 for the layer name of the free text in the project settings. (see the picture below). In this case, you can e.g. easily turn on/off the texts that belong to a certain system.

• Reference line: if the setting is Yes then a reference line from first pick

point to text is drawn. NOTE ! It is not possible to select between reference line and no reference line if you are editing existing text by using command Edit Free Text.

• Ref. line symbol: select a reference line symbol (target line, arrow, dot,Line only)



• Baseline:

o None, no base line

o First row, under first row

o All rows, under all rows

o Rectangle, a rectangle around the dimension text

o Circle, a circle around the dimension text

• Aligment: Text alignment – left, center or right.

Revision Arrow You can insert revision arrows to the drawing with this function. MagiCAD will place all revision arrows to the layer that you have defined in the layer dialog.

Revision Cloud You can draw revision clouds to the drawing with this function. You can change the arc length with the following option:

• Arc length: Show the start point and the endpoint.

Construction Boundary You can draw construction boundaries with this function. Pressing Enter stops the crossline drawing, and MagiCAD asks the arrow direction.



Other MagiCAD functions

Faster drawing with “+” grips It is now possible to select a part and start drawing from the appearing “+” grip. “+” grip is shown as bolded plus sign when the object is selected. Click the “+” grip to start drawing. When clicking the middle “+” grip, it is also possible to show the place from where to start drawing. Grip size and color can be fixed in AutoCAD’s Options dialog in the flyleaf selection.

Explode MagiCAD Objects (magiexp) This command explodes MagiCAD objects into blocks. Either the entire drawing, or a selected part or area, can be exploded. If the drawing is exploded in 3D mode, it can be examined from all viewpoints even after it is exploded. If the drawing is exploded in Active2D mode, the current 2D drawing will remain, and when other viewpoints are used, the system does not appear as an Active2D drawing.

MagiCAD does not recognize the objects that are exploded, and therefore you cannot use any MagiCAD functions with them.

MAGIEXP does not explode those MagiCAD objects that are inside a block. If you have inserted MagiCAD objects as blocks, first explode them using AutoCAD's Explode and then explode them with MagiCAD’s explode function.

AutoCAD's editing functions MagiCAD allows using AutoCAD's own commands, and with MagiCAD components adds more functionality or sets limitations depending on the situation.

COM interface It is possible to transfer data between external programs and MagiCAD via MagiCAD COM interface. Example: First you design and calculate ventilation system in MagiCAD. Then it is possible to send the flow and pressure data to an external device selection software, in which the right device is selected. From the device selection software it is possible to send e.g. sound data and duct connection sizes back to MagiCAD.


Appendix A: Other information • 97

Appendix A: Other information

AutoCAD's features You can use the command line options with the right mouse button.

Polar tracking is a convenient tool when drawing sewers; you can use it for drawing pipes in UCS-related angles.

Avoid using the partial open function.

Do not use the In place xref editing function for modifying MagiCAD ductwork because the project information appears according to the host drawing and the sizing could not be run for the drawing. You can modify a reference drawing that is attached to the MagiCAD drawing.

Though MagiCAD has its own profile that is selected when MagiCAD is started from its icon, a profile should be selected also when AutoCAD is started without applications. This is because in some cases MagiCAD profile remains as the current profile even after quitting the MagiCAD session (the previous AutoCAD profile is not restored). For example, define a profile named acad2000 for AutoCAD and set the target in AutoCAD’s shortcut in this way: c:\acad2000\acad.exe /P acad2000 (where C:\ACAD2000 represents the path where AutoCAD is installed, and acad2000 represents AutoCAD’s profile.

Plotting You can use the output layouts e.g. as follows.

Move the cursor on a layout name. Open a menu by right-clicking the mouse. Choose New Layout, and a new layout (Layout n) will invoke. When you select the new layout, the Page Setup window will open.

If you wish to change the layout settings later, right-click the mouse on the layout name and choose Page Setup.

You can also copy a new layout from a template (choose From Template).

Choose the plot device and style (pen assignments) in the Plot Device section of the Page Setup window. It is recommended to use the color-dependent output styles (.ctb files) with MagiCAD. The pen line weights can be changed with the Edit function. Use monochrome.ctb as a basis and modify it with Edit function when you create a black & white output layout for MagiCAD. You can set a line weight for each color. Save the modified file with Save As function, and choose your new file as a layout file.

Choose the paper size and plot scale (1:1) in the Layout Settings section.


98 • Appendix A: Other information

The white space in the layout represents the paper, and the area bordered with dashed line represents the plotting area (that is, paper margins). The new layout contains one viewport, which can be modified with AutoCAD's stretch and move commands (changing the size and location on the paper).

You can start designing the output, for example, by setting the title on the bottom-right corner of the output area (it is already set on the template drawings).

The viewport(s) can be fitted to the paper in the desired size. If several viewports are going to be defined to the output, it can be done by showing the corners of the viewports (View/Viewports/1 Viewport). The viewports are always set on the active layer, but you can later move them on the layer that is not printed (eg. DEFPOINTS).

Finally, set the viewports to the desired scale. It is possible to affect the viewports by switching on the model space with the PAPER button on the lowest gray line (it will then switch to the MODEL state). In the MODEL state, the outlines of the active viewport appear with a darker line.

The active viewport is zoomed to the desired scale, that is, give 1/50xp as the scaling factor if you wish to show the view in 1:50 scale. Define the scale for each viewport separately. It is possible to move the view with Pan, and the scale is not changed.

The layout is printed in 1:1 scale and the output can be Previewed before plotting.

Visual styles of AutoCAD 2007 It is recommended to change the following settings for realistic and conceptual visual styles. The settings can be changed by using AutoCAD’s function "Manage Visual Styles" in the Visual Styles toolbar.

• Material Display: Off

• Edge Mode: Faced Edges

• Color: White

• Grease Angle: 40

• Fast Silhouette Edges / Visible: No

Known problems In some special cases, when some of MagiCAD layers are locked, frozen or switched off and the system is edited, the drawing can be damaged.

While calculation or flownode connection/disconnection, the external drawing that is referred from the current drawing may be temporarily locked. The drawing will be unlocked when any MagiCAD command is run or when you exit AutoCAD.

If you join to the bend with a vertical duct or pipe (in the direction of the xyz axes of the coordinates), the part is drawn incorrectly as this release of MagiCAD cannot draw this kind of branch.

Other issues When copying ductworks or parts of theirs, please note that the systems and device lists must be defined in the same way as they are in the target project.


MagiCAD Electrical

MagiCAD Electrical Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. List of functions 1 MC-E Project/General menu .....................................................................................................1 MC-E IFC menu ........................................................................................................................1 MC-E Electric menu ..................................................................................................................2 Electric Devices menu ...............................................................................................................2 MC-E Tele/Data menu...............................................................................................................2 Tele/Data/BA Devices menu .....................................................................................................2 MC-E Cable Routes menu .........................................................................................................3 MC-E Switchboard Schematic menu.........................................................................................3 MC-E Edit menu........................................................................................................................4 MC-E Connection Nodes menu.................................................................................................4 MC-E Edit II menu ....................................................................................................................4 MC-E Sections menu.................................................................................................................5 MC-E View menu......................................................................................................................5

Chapter 2. How to start 6 Starting the project.....................................................................................................................6

Attaching the architectural drawing to the project....................................................... 6 Selecting a project .......................................................................................................6

Drawing functions, placing the devices .....................................................................................9 Adding the switchboard............................................................................................... 9 Placing the luminaires ...............................................................................................10

Drawing cables, placing the circuit symbols, drawing cable trays ..........................................13 Starting drawing ........................................................................................................13 Cable options.............................................................................................................14 Setting the elevation ..................................................................................................15 Cables ........................................................................................................................16 Circuits ...................................................................................................................... 17 Cable trays................................................................................................................. 21

Chapter 3. Creating and selecting projects 25 Creating a new project .............................................................................................................25 Selecting an existing project ....................................................................................................25 Other instructions.....................................................................................................................26

Chapter 4. Project management 27 Project information ..................................................................................................................27

General ......................................................................................................................27 Project management dialog .......................................................................................27

Defining the project data..........................................................................................................28 Project settings ..........................................................................................................28 Systems......................................................................................................................29 Cables ........................................................................................................................30 Devices ...................................................................................................................... 31 Cable routes / Trays and conduits..............................................................................35 Text styles .................................................................................................................36 Linetypes ...................................................................................................................36

iv • Contents MagiCAD Electrical

Texts ..........................................................................................................................36 Layer definitions........................................................................................................37 Report definitions ......................................................................................................39 Switchboard schematic definition .............................................................................40 Power circuit types ....................................................................................................40 Connection node defaults ..........................................................................................41 Provision for voids ....................................................................................................41 User named variables ................................................................................................42 Variable sets .............................................................................................................. 42

Combining projects..................................................................................................................43 General ......................................................................................................................43 Selecting the ID range ...............................................................................................43 Merging the projects..................................................................................................43

Chapter 5. Drawing preferences 48 Text styles and scales...............................................................................................................48

Chapter 6. Drawing functions 50 General command line functions and options.......................................................................... 50 Placing the devices ..................................................................................................................51

Product selection dialogs...........................................................................................51 "Favorites" toolbar.....................................................................................................52 General symbols ........................................................................................................52

Drawing wires and cables ........................................................................................................52 Circuit........................................................................................................................55 Other information ......................................................................................................57

Drawing wire/cable packets.....................................................................................................58 Logical connections and reports of the tele, data, and BA devices..........................................60

Settings of the devices ...............................................................................................60 Defining the logical connections ...............................................................................60 Checking the logical connections, report...................................................................61

Drawing cable routes ...............................................................................................................62 Conduits .................................................................................................................... 63 Cable trays and cable racks .......................................................................................63 Stretching cable trays ................................................................................................65 Changing the cable tray width and height .................................................................65 Breaking the cable routes ..........................................................................................66 Cable tray crossing ....................................................................................................66

Chapter 7. Switchboard schematic functions 67 General.....................................................................................................................................67 Creating a switchboard schematic ........................................................................................... 67 Switchboard schematic preview ..............................................................................................67 Placing the switchboard schematic .......................................................................................... 69 Editing switchboard schematics...............................................................................................72

Edit Row....................................................................................................................72 Insert Row .................................................................................................................72 Insert Circuit from Plan .............................................................................................74 Delete Row................................................................................................................74 Move Row .................................................................................................................74 Change Column Width ..............................................................................................74 Add Symbol to Row ..................................................................................................74 Add Detail Symbol ....................................................................................................75 Draw Rail ..................................................................................................................75 Add Text....................................................................................................................75

Updating data from plan drawings to the switchboard schematic ...........................................75 Circuit Renumbering ...............................................................................................................76 Creating switchboard schematic symbols ................................................................................77

MagiCAD Electrical Contents • v

Creating detail symbols ...........................................................................................................77 Explode Switchboard Schematic Symbol ................................................................................78 Updating data from to the switchboard schematic to plan drawings .......................................78 Checking the switchboards and circuits...................................................................................79

Chapter 8. Other functions 81 Edit Storey Properties ..............................................................................................................81 Connections between storeys (Connection Node) ...................................................................82 Device connections..................................................................................................................84

General ......................................................................................................................84 Connecting the devices..............................................................................................84

Moving and rotating the symbol attributes ..............................................................................84 Moving the 2D symbol and 3D object of the device ...............................................................85 Defining the switchboard borders and switchboard areas........................................................85

Switchboard borders.................................................................................................. 85 Switchboard area ....................................................................................................... 86

Combination boxes ..................................................................................................................87 Placing the combination box to the drawing .............................................................87 Extracting the combination box.................................................................................88

Cross-sections ..........................................................................................................................90 Section marks ............................................................................................................ 90 Making the section ....................................................................................................91 Updating the section ..................................................................................................91

Collision Control .....................................................................................................................92 Show messages ........................................................................................................................92 Copying and moving branches ................................................................................................92

Copy Branch.............................................................................................................. 92 Move Branch ............................................................................................................. 93

Creating user-defined symbols ................................................................................................93 Part Properties function ...........................................................................................................94 Changing properties.................................................................................................................94 Changing the elevation of the devices .....................................................................................95 Viewport preferences...............................................................................................................96 Text functions ..........................................................................................................................98

Placing texts to the objects ........................................................................................99 Placing free texts ....................................................................................................... 99 Moving and stretching texts ......................................................................................99

Updating drawing data.............................................................................................................99 Report functions..................................................................................................................... 100 DIALux interface................................................................................................................... 102 Clear garbage layer ................................................................................................................ 104 User preferences .................................................................................................................... 104 Hiding cables, cable packets, and conduits............................................................................ 105 Showing cable, cable packet and conduit routes.................................................................... 105 Clip+Rotate, Restore from Clip+Rotate ................................................................................ 105 Version check (MEVER function)......................................................................................... 105 Cable markings ...................................................................................................................... 106

Intelligent symbols ..................................................................................................106 Other symbols (not recommended) ......................................................................... 106

Revision markings ................................................................................................................. 106 Revision mark..........................................................................................................106 Revision cloud......................................................................................................... 107

Modeling user-defined products ............................................................................................ 108 Interoperability with other MagiCAD applications ............................................................... 108

MagiCAD Heating & Piping and Ventilation ......................................................... 108 MagiCAD Room ..................................................................................................... 108

IFC Export ............................................................................................................................. 109 About IFC................................................................................................................ 109 Creating an IFC file (IFC Export) ........................................................................... 109

vi • Contents MagiCAD Electrical

Other IFC exports (IFC Calculation export and IFC Calculation Import)............... 110 Other functions ...................................................................................................................... 112

Drawing cleaning utility .......................................................................................... 112 Importing the symbol libraries ................................................................................ 112 Changing the AutoCAD attribute value of a MagiCAD symbol ............................. 113 Explode function of MagiCAD Electrical ............................................................... 113 Checking the connections........................................................................................ 113

Functions that are not recommended .....................................................................................114 AutoCAD's functions .............................................................................................. 114

Attribute definitions in MagiCAD Electrical......................................................................... 114

Chapter 1. List of functions • 1

Chapter 1. List of functions

MC-E Project/General menu

Project

Edit Storey Properties

User Preferences

Import luminaires from DIALux

Update Drawing Data

Create User Symbol (2D)

General symbols

Cable Markings

Check Switchboards and Power Circuits

Check Data and Update from Switchboard Schematic

Reports

IFC Export

IFC Calculation Export

IFC Calculation Import

MC-E IFC menu

This is a flyout toolbar of MC-E Project/General toolbar.

IFC Export

IFC Calculation Export

IFC Calculation Import

MagiCAD Electrical

2 • Chapter 1. List of functions

MC-E Electric menu

Cables

Cable Packets

Devices

Device Connection

Electric Devices menu

This is a flyout toolbar of MC-E Electric toolbar.

Switchboards

Connection Boxes

Sockets

Switches

Luminaires

Heaters

Equipment

Others

MC-E Tele/Data menu

Cables

Cable Packets

Devices

Device Connection

Build Logical Connections

Check and Report Logical Connections

Tele/Data/BA Devices menu

This is a flyout toolbar of MC-E Tele/Data toolbar.

Main Units

Sub-units

MagiCAD Electrical


Sockets

Tele and data

Video/audio

Signal

Fire

Security

Sub-stations and Routers

Controllers

Probes and Buttons

Other BA Points

Other Equipment

MC-E Cable Routes menu

Conduits

Cable Trays

Others

Stretch Cable Tray

Change Cable Tray Width or Height

Cable Tray Crossing

MC-E Switchboard Schematic menu

Switchboard Report and Schematic Preview

Create Switchboard Schematic

Edit Row

Insert Row

Insert Circuit from Plan

Delete Row

Move Row

Change Column Width

Add Symbol

Add Detail Symbol

Draw Rail

Add Text

Check Data and Update from Plan Drawings

MagiCAD Electrical

4 • Chapter 1. List of functions

Circuit Renumbering

Create Switchboard Schematic Symbol

Create Detail Symbol

Explode Switchboard Schematic Symbol

MC-E Edit menu

Part Properties

Part Properties of HP&V Objects

Change Properties

Change Elevation

Copy Branch

Move Branch

Break Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route

Connection Nodes

Text

Stretch Text

Revision Mark

Revision Cloud

MC-E Connection Nodes menu

This is a flyout toolbar of MC-E Edit toolbar.

Connect Node

Disconnect Node

Connection Node Report

MC-E Edit II menu

Insert Running Index

Remove Running Index

Move Attribute

Move Device Symbol

Switchboard Border

Switchboard Area

MagiCAD Electrical


Insert Combination Box

Draw Combination Box Symbol

Sections

MC-E Sections menu

This is a flyout toolbar of MC-E Edit II toolbar.

Section Marks

Edit Section Mark

Make Section

Update Section

MC-E View menu

Drawing Preferences

Hide Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit

Reset Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit Hide

Show Selected Parts Only

Show All Parts

Part Property Line

Show Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit Route

Collision Control

MagiCAD Electrical

6 • Chapter 2. How to start

Chapter 2. How to start

Starting the project

Attaching the architectural drawing to the project Start the project by attaching the architectural drawing. Select Insert → External Reference from AutoCAD's pulldown menu (AutoCAD 2007: DWG Reference). Select the drawing file. The following dialog opens:

Save the settings with OK. The architectural drawing appears.

When the architectural drawing is on the right location, save your drawing (File → Save As) to a suitable directory.

Selecting a project Click the Project toolbar button. The Select Project dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 2. How to start • 7

When the Add this drawing to the model dwg list option is selected, the drawing will be added to the model drawing list, which makes it possible to make connections between circuits and switchboards, and the drawing is also taken into account in the reports. Please note that it is also possible to add the drawing to the model drawing list afterwards.

The Available projects list shows the project that exist in the directory or in the path towards the root directory. If there are no projects in the path, the list window is empty.

If you select a project from the list and click the Select button, the selected project is taken into use. This function is activated when the project is selected.

If you want to create a new project, click the New... button.

If you want to cancel this function, click Cancel.

Creating a new project Click New... in the Select Projects dialog. The New Project dialog opens.

Give the name for the project, eg. First project.

Select the directory where you want to save the project. Usually the directory is the same where the drawing is saved, or a directory in the path towards the root directory. For example:

MagiCAD Electrical


x:\e-projects\project12345\first project.mep project file x:\e-projects\project12345\electric\*.dwg x:\e-projects\project12345\data\*.dwg x:\e-projects\project12345\tele\*.dwg

Select the template project. The templates are saved in the Templates subdirectory of the MagiCAD Electrical program directory. You can use your existing projects as template projects, if you prefer.

When the Add this drawing to the model dwg list option is selected, the drawing will be added to the model drawing list, which makes it possible to make connections between circuits and switchboards, and the drawing is also taken into account in the reports. Please note that it is also possible to add the drawing to the model drawing list afterwards.

Accept your choices with OK. The Project Management dialog opens. You can check and modify the project information in this dialog.

The left pane shows a list of the types of data that is defined for the project. When you click one of them, the more detailed view of the contents appears in the right pane.

MagiCAD Electrical


The data types are described later in this manual. After you have made your settings, accept them by clicking the Close button.

Drawing functions, placing the devices In this chapter you are guided, step by step, to place the luminaires, the switch, and the switchboard, as well as to draw the cable and cable tray. See the final result in the picture.

Adding the switchboard First, click the Switchboard toolbar button. The Switchboard Properties dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Enter the general information of the switchboard:

• Code – identifier for the switchboard

• Description

• System – select the system that the switchboard belongs to

• Status – select a status for the switchboard if needed

• Installation – select the installation type

• IP class – select the casing class

• EXE class – select the explosion protection

• Running index – the unique identifier is shown here (if it is set to the switchboard)

Next, give the dimensions:

• Width, depth, height

• H-installation (bottom edge)

Select the symbol for the switchboard. When you click the Symbol Series button, a dialog opens, and you can select which symbol series are shown.

• FIN (Finnish), NOR (Norwegian), SWE (Swedish)

• USR (user-defined symbols)

• IEC (symbols according to the IEC standard)

You can also give additional information for the switchboard with the object variables (O1 and O2). Note that the O1 and O2 can be set also with the Change Properties function.

In the Power fields you can give the values for calculating the dimensional current of the switchboard. Switchboards are handled as three-phase devices. The line voltage is given in the Voltage field.

In the Earthing checkboxes you can give the used earthing method.

Exercise:

Define a switchboard and place it in your drawing.

Placing the luminaires

Selecting the luminaire First, click the Luminaires toolbar button. The Select Device dialog opens. The same dialog opens when you place any device.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the system for the luminaire. You can add or remove systems in the project management.

It is possible to define default systems for the devices in the project management.

For each device it is possible to set a device-specific installation method, but if the installation method is different from the method that is defined in the project dialog, you can clear the By product setting in the Installation section. You can also change the value afterwards with Part Properties or Change Properties.

The active group is highlighted in the Group pane.

The Product pane shows the luminaires that are selected for the project. Click the luminaire you want to place. The row will be highlighted. You can add, remove, or modify luminaires in the project management. Adding and modifying are also available here in the Select Device dialog from the right click menu.

Give the elevation for the luminaire. With the Show ref. part function you can select the elevation according to an existing object in the drawing. MagiCAD remembers the previous elevation as long as installing the same device from the same device group (e.g. luminaire number one from luminaires). After changing to another device within the same device group the elevation will be taken from the product’s default settings.

With the Operation area options you can set an operation area for the device. The shape of the operation area can be a circle, a sector, or a diamond. It is also possible to set the operation area with the Part Properties or Change Properties functions. You can also set the operation area visible/invisible in the Viewport Preferences dialog.

When the Use separated insertion point for 3D model option is selected, you can place the 2D symbol and 3D object to separate locations (which is necessary e.g. when the switch is above the socket). It is also possible to rotate the 3D object to a different orientation related to the 2D symbol. With the Move Device Symbol function it is possible to change afterwards the distance between the 2D symbol and the 3D model.

With the Save to Toolbar button you can add the selected luminaire to the "favorites" toolbar (a toolbar for devices you most frequently use). The toolbar is drawing-specific, and up to 20 devices can be defined in it. Besides the product information, the system, user code, operation area and elevation are saved in the toolbar.

MagiCAD Electrical


Placing the luminaire Accept your choices with OK. The luminaire appears on the screen. Click the right mouse button to open a pop-up menu that contains all modifying functions you can use with the device.

In this case, the menu has the following items: Enter, Cancel, Options, Direction, Array, Pan, and Zoom. Enter, Cancel, Pan, and Zoom can always be selected.

• Options – select this option to return to the Select Device dialog.

• Direction – use this option to rotate the device to a suitable position.

• Connect – use this function to connect the device directly at the open end of the cable

• Array – this option makes it possible to place several similar devices at a time

When you have made the settings, click on the location where you want to place the device.

Placing several luminaires at the same time You can place several similar devices at the same time if you select the Array option from the pop-up menu. The Array Options dialog opens.

Give the number of rows and columns in the Array fields.

With the Connections options choose whether to connect the devices automatically to each other when they are placed.

When you click the Cable Options button (3), you can modify the properties of the connecting cables. The Cable Options dialog opens, and it is the same option dialog that is used when cables are drawn. Cable options are explained in the next chapter.

Accept the cable settings with OK. You are then back in the Array Options dialog. Accept the array settings with OK.

Place the devices by selecting a rectangular area. You can use AutoCAD's MOVE or STRETCH to move the devices that are already placed (if they are connected, use the STRETCH command).

Exercise:

MagiCAD Electrical


Place and connect the devices as in the picture, either by placing them one by one and connecting them to each other, or by using the Array option.

Tip: You can define an integrated text for the devices in the project management. If you have defined an integrated text, it is placed automatically with the device.

Drawing cables, placing the circuit symbols, drawing cable trays

Starting drawing First, click the Cables toolbar button. When you first time start the command, the Cable Options dialog opens automatically. This dialog is introduced earlier in this manual (placing luminaires). If you want to open the dialog later, select the cable drawing function and select Options from the pop-up menu (which opens when you right-click the mouse when the command is active).

MagiCAD Electrical


Cable options

General:

• Systems – the same system that is selected for the device(s)

• Material – select the cable type. You can define/change it later. NB: You can define the cable marking in the Project Management dialog.

• Installation – installation method

• Status – select the status for the cable if needed

Linetype: You can set a linetype for the cable. You must define the linetypes in the Project Management dialog. Also note that if you want the linetype to follow Status definitions you need to select the option ByProject.

Cable number: You can set a Cable number for the cable you are drawing in the Number for next cable field. With the next free button you can make MagiCAD find the next free cable number from all model drawings. Cable number is editable also in the circuit dialog after installing a circuit and in Part Properties. MagiCAD recognizes the highest number of digits in cable numbers and uses the same number when the next free button is used.

Note: You can easily create cable lists with reports by using the cable number variable.

Note: To make your cable numbers similar give the desired amount of digits already for the first cable number.

Note: MagiCAD will not give a warning if you input a duplicate number. You should use the next free button always when inserting a new number.

MagiCAD Electrical


XY-routing: Select the routing for the cable.

• Direct – the cable is drawn directly

• Orthogonal – the cable is drawn directly aside in a 90° angle

• Side automatic – the cable is drawn aside according to the "curvature" defined in the dy field. If the value is negative, the connecting cables for eg. sockets can be drawn to the opposite side.

Presentation:

• Direct line segments

• Curved

Corners:

• Sharp – Sharp corner type

• Rounded – Rounded corner type. Give the radius of the bend in the Radius field.

• Bevelled – Bevelled corner type. Give the distance between the end of the bevelling and the theoretical corner point in the Distance field.

Elevation: The following settings affect the elevation. In this example, a switch is connected to a luminaire.

• By highest point – the cable first rises directly to the elevation of the luminaire, and then connects to the luminaire

• By lowest point – the cable first goes to the luminaire at the elevation of the switch, and then connects to the luminaire

• By start – the cable goes horizontally at the elevation of the first selected device

Device basepoint: Defines the point of the device where the cable is connected to.

• Insertion point – the connection point of the device

• Nearest point – the point that is nearest to the cable

Connection box: Select here which kind of connection box to use as default. If the connection box type is not defined, or if the Select box always option is chosen, the box selection dialog opens every time when you start drawing from the middle of a cable (ie. a branch). When you click the Select button, you can select the symbol for the connection box.

Setting the elevation When you start drawing the cable from an empty space, the Elevation dialog opens and you can give the elevation for the cable as millimeters. You can also define the elevation for the cable according to a particular device. In this case, click the Show Reference Part button and show the device.

MagiCAD Electrical


You can also select the elevation with Show Reference Part according to a MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation objects and AutoCAD objects (these objects can also exist in a reference drawing). In this case, select the Other object option from the popup menu and other options if necessary.

If you start drawing the cable from a device or from another cable, the system and elevation are derived from that device or cable.

Cables You can start drawing the cable from an empty spot (in this case you must define the elevation for the cable) or by connecting to a device or another cable.

When you have started the drawing function, you can open the pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button. The following options can be selected from the pop-up menu:

• Enter – accepts/ends drawing

• Cancel – quits drawing

• noConnect <> Connect if found – in close spaces you can avoid the cable connecting to another cable or device if you select the noConnect option. You can reactivate connections by selecting the Connect if found option.

• Options – opens the Cable Options dialog. Please note that cables are handled as whole cables when they are drawn. If linetype, installation code, xy-routing, presentation or corners are changed during cable drawing, MagiCAD will split the cable into several entities; however, they will be linked together as a whole cable. Cables have four significant properties: system, material, cable number and status. If one or more of these is changed during cable drawing, the cable will be cut and a junction box is forced to be installed. If a junction box that has two cables connected to it is removed, the cables are connected as a whole cable if the significant properties are the same for both cables. Otherwise they are left as separate cables. The link between two pieces of the same cable is also lost if the two connected ends are separated too far from each other (100 times world scale).

• Back – backs to the previous connection

• Z – elevation change (functions similar to the Elevation option). Contains also the option for changing the elevation angle (Angle to horizontal)

• connection Node – arrow symbol to the end of the cable (the same option also applies to cable packet and cable route drawing functions). When you select this option, the Create Connection Node dialog opens and you can select the suitable arrow symbol. In the Project Management dialog you can select default symbols for

MagiCAD Electrical


the cables, cable packets and cable routes leading to different directions.

• boX – connection box to the cable. If the default box symbol is selected in the cable options, that symbol is used. Otherwise the Select Symbol dialog opens.

• Curved / Direct – switching the cable’s presentation between direct and curved line

• Circuit – circuit symbol to the end of the cable (applies to electric cables only)

Circuits There are two ways to add a circuit. Either you can select the circUit option, or you can connect the cable to an existing cable packet.

"Circuit" drawing option Select the circUit option while the cable drawing function is active. The Circuit Information dialog opens.

General:

• Circuit number – If you prefer, you can leave this field blank, define the circuit numbers in the switchboard schematic, and update the circuit numbers from the switchboard schematic to the groups. A circuit number can hold 10 characters.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Circuit type – These are predefined in the Project Management (Power circuit types) to get automatically some common information into a circuit.

• Description 1, 2, and 3 – Here you can define free description texts for the circuit. You can show these description texts e.g. in the texts or switchboard schematic.

• Power – Active power in kW. This can be shown in the switchboard schematic.

• Diversity factor – a factor for calculating the current. It is the ratio between the simultaneous maximum demand of a group and the sum of their individual maximum demands within the same period. This factor is currently used when transferring the network to be calculated in calculation software such as Febdok via IFC Calculation Export. It is recommended to use value 1 as the factor in the connections between switchboards.

Cable: Shows the cable type. If the cable material is selected for the cable that this circuit connects to, the material is derived to this field automatically. Cable number cannot be given when installing the circuit. If a cable number is given already for the cable when installing, the circuit it is visible in the field.

Phases: Select the phases that are used by the circuit. You can also select the neutral conductor and earthing wire. Currently, these values have meaning if the network is transferred to Febdok application for calculations.

Protection:

• Overload – information regarding the protective device for short circuits and overload (fuse, circuit breaker etc.)

• Fault current – information regarding the residual current protective device (e.g. residual current switch)

Switchboard: Select the switchboard the circuit connects to. When you click the Select button, a dialog opens and you can select the switchboard. You can attach the circuit either to a switchboard in the current drawing or to a switchboard that is in another drawing (Select model drawing). With the Deselect button you can detach the circuit connection to the switchboard.

Note: If there are switchboard areas defined in the drawing, and the circuit is inside a switchboard area, it is not required to attach the circuit to the switchboard; it belongs automatically to the switchboard of that area. Also note that currently circuits with this “area connection” are not exported when using IFC Calculation Export.

Cable packet: You can connected a circuit to the desired cable packet (see chapter Cable Packet for more information). Click the Connect button and click the packet to which you want to connect with the cable. The length is calculated according to the most direct route from the circuit symbol to the selected packet.

Schematic symbol: Select the switchboard schematic symbol. Click the Select Symbol to open the dialog.

Symbol: Select the circuit symbol type.

MagiCAD Electrical


Cable packets It is possible to get the cable lengths also from the circuit to the switchboard. Naturally the actual cable lengths can be included in the BOM, and the future calculation applications can utilize the cable lengths.

The number and type of the cables can be checked from the cable packet with the Part Properties function. In addition, the cable types, systems, etc, can be presented in the reference text. Part Properties displays all cables that are running inside the cable packet, and the reference text displays exactly the cables that are running at the location where the reference text is placed.

The actual cable lengths can be utilized also in calculation software such as Febdok via IFC Calculation Export.

To get the cable lengths from the circuits to the switchboard, the route has to be defined with a cable packet. It is then possible to connect circuits to the cable packet. There are two ways to connect circuits:

1. When the cable drawing function is active, show the edge of the cable packet (see the figure below, A → B). The direction of the cables inside the packet depends on into which direction the circuit is bevelled when connecting the first circuit to the packet. Please note that the direction means the direction to the supplying switchboard which the packet leads to (in the following picture it is to the right). After this the Circuit Information dialog opens. The dialog is similar to the previously shown dialog, except it does not contain the Symbol selection or the Cable packet selection.

2. The connection can also be made with the help of a circuit symbol. In this

case, select Connect in the circuit dialog, and click the cable packet to which you want to connect the cable:

When the first circuit is connected to the cable packet, you must first show the direction for the cables – after this, the program can detect it automatically. As mentioned before in part one the direction means the direction to the supplying switchboard. The cable length from the circuit to the shown cable packet is calculated according to the nearest point.

MagiCAD Electrical


With the Show Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route function you can check afterwards to which cable packet (and location) the circuit is connected. The program draws a line from the circuit to the packet. The line is drawn on the MAGI_GARBAGE layer, and it can thus be removed with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

MagiCAD Electrical


Cable trays

Cable tray options First, click the Draw Cable Tray toolbar button. The Cable Tray Options dialog opens when you use this command for the first time. If you want to open the dialog later to set the cable tray options, start the drawing function, click the right mouse button, and select Options from the pop-up menu.

Tray system: Select the system for the cable tray. It is possible to define default systems for the devices in the Project Management.

Status: Select the status for the cable tray if needed. You can add/remove/define cable trays in the Project Management (Status definitions).

Product: This pane shows the cable tray types that are defined for the project. Select the type by clicking it. You can add/remove/define cable trays in the Project Management (Trays and conduits).

Alignment: Select the line for "guiding" the cable tray: center, left edge, or right edge. If the Cable tray is swapped option is selected, the tray has been rotated “sideways” (to be installed on a wall).

Linetype: Select the linetype for the cable tray.

Dimensions: Give the dimensions for the cable tray (width, height).

MagiCAD Electrical


Fitting types: You can define the shapes for the bends, reductions, and branches

In the Inner bend radius field you can define the radius for the inner bend for certain bend types. If you prefer to draw also the 2D filling symbol to the bends, select the Hatch bend in 2D option.

Accept your choices and click OK.

Note: When drawing bends under ten degrees and over two degrees the reduction “none” is forced in these situations and the trays are cut to straight pieces with slightly slanted installation. With bends less than or equal of 2 degrees MagiCAD interprets it so that the user has wanted to make a direct tray and draws it so.

Drawing the cable tray You can start drawing either from an empty place or connecting to an existing cable tray. When you start drawing, the Connect option is on by default, and you can click the location at a cable tray to connect. Note: you must always set the Connect option on if you want to connect to another tray.

If you start drawing from an empty place, click the right mouse button and select noConnect from the pop-up menu. Next, click the location where you want to start drawing – the Elevation dialog opens.

In this dialog you can give the elevation for the cable tray:

• Top elevation – the elevation of the upper edge

• Center elevation – the elevation of the centerpoint

• Bottom elevation – the elevation of the lower edge

Alternatively, you can define the elevation with the Top of, Center of, and Bottom of settings. Select one of these options, and show the object whose elevation you want to draw the cable tray at.

• Top of... – the elevation of the upper surface will be taken as the bottom elevation for the new tray

• Center of... – the elevation of the centerpoint will be taken as the centerpoint for the new tray

• Bottom of... – the elevation of the lower surface will be taken as the top elevation for the new tray

You can also select the elevation with these options according to a MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation objects and AutoCAD objects (these objects

MagiCAD Electrical


can also exist in a reference drawing). In this case, select the Other object option from the popup menu and other options if necessary.

Accept your choices with OK and start drawing. You can shorten the cable tray by drawing backwards or selecting the Back option from the pop-up menu.

Drawing options of cable trays When the drawing function is active and you click the right mouse button, a pop-up menu opens, containing the following options:

• Connect/noConnect – Connect is the default value. If you want to start from an empty space, you must select noConnect.

• Options – opens the Cable Tray Options dialog

• Swap – turning the cable tray "on its side”

• aLignment – you can change the “guidance” of the tray

• Z – elevation change. The Height Difference dialog opens. Elevation is changed in the same way as it is set. In addition, it is possible to select the angle for the elevation change.

• Back – returning to the previous joint

• connection Node – adding an arrow symbol to the end of the cable route. The same functionality applies also to cable packet and cable drawing functions. When you select this option, the Create Connection Node dialog opens and you can select the suitable arrow symbol. In the project management dialog you can select the default symbols to the cables, cable packets and cable routes that are leading to different directions.

Editing functions The following functions can be used for editing the cable tray:

Stretch Cable Tray

• If you click in the middle of the cable tray, you can move the cable tray segment. If you select an unconnected end of the cable tray (by showing the end line of the cable tray or an invisible end of the tray), you can stretch the cable tray.

• If you select a bend or a branch, the shape of the piece changes and the cable trays connected to it move or change their shape in case it is possible with the bend/branch type in question.

• If you want to change the elevation of the cable tray, select first the Z option from the pop-up menu (which opens when you click the right mouse button). Next, click the cable tray whose elevation you want to change, and give the new elevation in the Elevation dialog.

Change Cable Tray Width or Height

• The Cable Tray Dimensions dialog opens, and you can give the new width and/or height for the cable tray (max. 2000 mm)

• Select also the direction in which the dimension is changed. You can change the width evenly (both sides) or in one side only (clicked side only). You can change the height evenly (both sides), upwards (top) or downwards (bottom).

Cable Tray Crossing

MagiCAD Electrical


• With this function you can make underpasses/overpasses to the cable tray that already exists.

• Click two points at the cable tray to set the location for the underpass/overpass. The part between the points is moved. Next give the elevation for the part that is moved.

Break Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route

• You can break the cable route with this function. Click two points at the cable tray. The part between the points is removed.

Exercise:

Connect the luminaires, which you drew earlier, to the switch (A), and add a circuit (B), which connects to the switchboard (C) to the end of the cable. Draw also the cable tray (D).

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 3. Creating and selecting projects • 25

Chapter 3. Creating and selecting projects

Creating a new project Attach the DWG file (drawing) to a new project (ie. project file) as follows:

1. Save the DWG file to a new directory.

2. Select Project from the toolbar.

3. Select New in the Select Project dialog.

4. Give the name for the project file.

5. Select the location for the project file. When you click the button beside the Location field, the Select Directory dialog opens.

6. Select the directory where the template projects are saved (an existing template project is used as a basis for your new project). The Templates subdirectory contains template files.

7. Select the Add this drawing to the model dwg list option if you want to include the drawing in the model drawing list.

8. Accept your choices with OK.

9. You can check and modify the project information in the dialog.

10. Close the dialog (click Close) and start working with the new project.

Selecting an existing project Start with procedures 1 and 2 explained in the previous chapter.

The Select Project dialog shows a list of Available Projects. When you choose a project (that is, when you click a project name), the Select button activates – and when you click the button, the DWG file is attached to the project.

Select the Add this drawing to the model dwg list option if you want to include the drawing in the model drawing list.

MagiCAD Electrical

26 • Chapter 3. Creating and selecting projects

Other instructions Usually the project files are saved into the same directory as the DWG files. If you save the DWG files into several directories, and you want to attach them to the same project, the project file must be saved on an upper level of the directory tree towards the root – for example:

x:\e-projects\projectdata.mep project file

The drawings can be saved e.g. as follows: x:\e-projects\project12345\electric\*.dwg x:\e-projects\project12345\tele and data\*.dwg x:\e-projects\project12345\switchboard schematic\*.dwg

The project file can be also saved on the same directory level as the “work drawing directories”, in the MEP subdirectory.

If you want to change the project file, or detach a drawing from a project, use the Project function, and click Disconnect Project in the dialog. Attach the drawing to the new project as described earlier (if necessary).

When you later open the drawing (DWG file) attached to a project, MagiCAD Electrical searches and opens the project file. MagiCAD Electrical first searches the file from the drawing’s directory, and if necessary, from the upper level of the directory tree. The project name must not be changed if it is attached to a drawing.

Once you have started drawing, do not change the project file, as the object data (e.g. product information) may lose compatibility with the project information.

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 4. Project management • 27

Chapter 4. Project management

Project information

General All project information, products (data+symbols), layer definitions, etc, are saved in the project file. Template projects contain different kinds of initial values for different kinds of projects.

MagiCAD Electrical has a separate utility for managing templates and project files (MCEPM, that is, MagiCAD-E Project Manager). You can use this utility to create new projects, open existing projects, edit projects, and save them with different names.

The project file is often shared by several users. The program checks if the project is in use on another workstation, and shows a message if necessary.

Project management dialog One of the most essential functions of MagiCAD Electrical is the Project Management dialog. Open the dialog by clicking the Project button.

Through this dialog you can examine and modify the contents of the project, e.g. device properties, and layer definitions.

MagiCAD Electrical

28 • Chapter 4. Project management

The left pane of the project management dialog shows the labels of the information/editing fields. If you click one of them, the right dialog pane shows more detailed information of the contents. You can also modify the data by selecting the corresponding row of the product information.

The first, device-specific, fields of the list (starting from the top) are mainly same as in the corresponding dialogs that are invoked with their specific toolbar buttons.

Right-clicking the mouse is an essential task when you edit the data.

When you right-click on a product row in the right pane of the project management dialog, a pop-up menu opens containing the following options:

• New

• New/copy of selected

• Delete

• Properties

With the Properties function you can modify the properties of the selected item.

Defining the project data This section describes the editing possibilities of the parts in the project.

Every part of each type has a unique identifier (ID), which cannot be changed after the part is selected to the project. MagiCAD suggests the first available ID number when the part is defined. At this stage it is possible to change the ID (the new ID must not be in use already).

Project settings All settings that affect the entire project are set here.

Default scale factor:

• You can set the factor active by disconnecting the drawing from the project and reconnecting it back to the same project. Then all new drawings that will be added to the project will get this default value into the Symbol scale factor for new objects field of the Drawing Preferences dialog.

ID Range:

• Here you can define the ID range for the project. It is necessary to define this range when the same project is modified in several locations and a local area network is not available. See chapter Combining the projects for more information.

Market area:

• Here you can select the market area whose products are displayed when a product is selected from a manufacturer’s database.

Backup the project files in the drawing:

• When this option is selected, backups of the project files are saved to the drawings when the drawing is saved.

Save viewport defaults to:

• Here you can choose whether the viewport preferences are saved to the project or the drawing.

MagiCAD Electrical


Character set:

• Here you can choose whether the character set is National or Unicode.

Note: Changing to Unicode will convert all data in the project file into the Unicode format. If you change the character set back to National some foreign characters may be lost.

Default Power Distribution Type:

• Here you can choose what is the general power distribution type used in the project. The options are: TN-S, TN-C-S, TN-C, IT, TT and DC. This is used in the IFC Calculation Export for every circuit.

Systems You can use the System function with the electrical, data, and tele devices and the cable trays. This function opens the System Description dialog with the following fields:

• General – general information

• ID – identifier (read-only)

• System code

• Description

• Voltage – voltage of the system (only for electrical systems)

• Line voltage [V] (only electrical systems)

MagiCAD Electrical


• Phase voltage [V] – calculated from the given line voltage (only electrical systems)

• Drawing properties – layer definition of the system

• Layer code – the system code that replaces the {SV}variable in the layer name

• Layer linetype

• Layer color

• Default cable – the default cable used for the system can be selected here (only for electric and tele&data)

• System variables – can be used eg. in texts

Cables The Cable Data dialog opens with the following information:

• General information

• ID (read-only field)

• Description

• Manufacturer

• Product code

• Wire properties – you can define the resistance and reactance

MagiCAD Electrical


• DWG properties for modifying the layer ID (the {PV} variable in the layer name is replaced with the given code)

• Product variables – you can set product/device variables, which can be shown e.g. in texts

• Cable mark – you can set a cable mark to the cable

Devices

Electric devices The Product Data dialog opens with the following information:



• User code

• Description

• Manufacturer

• Product code

• Light source (in case of a luminaire); e.g. 1x58W

• Dimensions – technical information, actual dimensions of e.g. heaters and central units

• Power supply – information for calculations:

• 1~, 2~ and 3~ – it is possible to choose between 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase device.

• Voltage – the voltage of the device

MagiCAD Electrical


• Active power – the active power of the device [W]

• Cos phi – the cos(φ) value of the device Note: the program calculates the nominal current with the following formulas: 1~ : I=P/(U*cos phi)

2~ : I=P/(U*cos phi)

3~ : I=P/(U*cos phi*sqrt3) In addition, the calculation data can be transferred to calculation software, such as Febdok, with IFC Calculation Export.

• Defaults – default values

• System – possibility to select the default system for the device

• Cable – possibility to select the default cable for the device

• Operation area – possibility to set the default operation area for the device.

• Drawing properties

• Layer code – the code which replaces the {PV}variable in the layer name

• Default elevation

• Adjust cable to the edge of the symbol

• Use general 2D scale factor of the dwg (see "Drawing properties" for further information).

• Integrated text – defines whether the text is placed in connection with the product. With the Text Settings function you can choose the text type and location (dx, dy) in relation with the insertion point. If Always in UCS direction is selected, the text and its border is rotated according to UCS. (See ”Text functions” for further information.)

• Allow mirroring upside down – defines whether both 2D and 3D symbols are allowed to be mirrored completely upside down.

Note: Do not use this option with products that cannot be installed upside down, or at least with products that cannot be presented upside down in 3D view. If separate insertion points for 2D and 3D symbols are used for a device, both symbols are rotated when using mirror.

• 2D Symbol – When you click the Select button, the Select Symbol dialog opens, and you can select the suitable symbol.

• 3D Symbol – When you click the Select product with geometry model button, the Product selection dialog opens, and you can select the suitable product from the database. In this dialog you can choose whether the products are searched from a local database or from an internet database. By clicking the Reset 3D button you can deselect the symbol. If you want to use an AutoCAD 3D block as the 3D presentation, click the Select block button.

• Classes – installation/protection classes and object ID

• Installation code – installation method

MagiCAD Electrical


• IP class

• EXE class

• Object ID format – it is possible to set an automatic identifier for the devices. The identifier can consist of several parts, and the ID formats can be created in the project management dialog (Variable sets Object ID). If Manual is selected as the value, the ID can be set to the device with the Part Properties function.

• Product variables (P1…P5) – you can set product/device variables, which can be shown e.g. in reference texts and reports.

• National code – the standardized code of the device. It can be shown eg. in reference texts and reports.

• Product note – additional general information

Tele, data and building automation devices

The settings are otherwise similar to electric devices, but with tele/data/BA devices it is also possible to make the following settings:

• Connections

• Sub-devices can be connected. Max no of conn. – Here you can define whether it is possible to connect sub-devices to the device (that is, whether the device is a host device). In addition, the maximum number of host devices is given, and when this value is exceeded, the program gives a warning.

• Power supply

MagiCAD Electrical


• Has power supply – Here you can define whether the device requires power. If this option is selected, give the voltage and the power as watts. Also, when this option is selected, it is possible to connect to this device with an electric cable without the program giving warnings.

Selecting products from a manufacturer’s database When you click the Select product with geometry model… button in the Product Data dialog, the Product Selection dialog opens:

First select the manufacturer on the left pane of the dialog, and click the plus sign to see the list of the products/sizes. With the Properties button you can examine the properties of the selected product.

In the preview window you can look and rotate the rendered product image. To see the dimensions of the product, select the Dimensions option.

With the Local databases and Internet databases options you can choose where to search the products from. You can redefine the search path for the local databases with the Change product database path function.

With the Search Criterion selections you can search the product with the product code and/or the description.

Read the selected product to the project with the Select product button.

To close the product selection dialog without selecting any product, click the Cancel button.

MagiCAD Electrical


Cable routes / Trays and conduits The dialog opens with the following information:



• Description

• Manufacturer

• Product code

• 3D Frame – the 3D presentation of the cable route: box or ladder (cable tray), or conduit

• Default System – here you can set the default system for the cable routes

• Object ID format – for the cable routes it is possible to set an automatic identifier. The identifier can consist of several parts, and they can be created in the project management dialog (Variable sets Object ID). If Manual value is selected, the identifier can be set to the device with the Part Properties function.

• Product variables

• P1 … P5 – you can set product/device variables, which can be shown e.g. in the texts

• National Code – standardized code of the device. It can be used e.g. in reference texts and reports.

• Symbol – the hatch pattern of the cable tray. With the Select button you can select the symbol, which you can deselect with the No Symbol button. You can define the spacing for the hatch in the X-step (wcs) field.

• Default dimensions – the default width and height (cable tray) or diameter (conduit)

MagiCAD Electrical


• Drawing properties

• Layer code – the value that replaces the {PV} value in the layer name

• Default elevation – default installation elevation of the device

Text styles With this function you can define the text styles for the project. Once you right-click the mouse, you can select the following options:

• New from current dwg – pick a text style from the current drawing

• New from STY file – load a text style from a STY file

• Delete – remove the text style

• Write STY file – save the text styles as a STY file (you can then load them to another project)

Linetypes With this function you can define the linetypes for the project. The continuous linetype is selected as default. Once you right-click the mouse, you can select the following options:

• New from LIN file – load a linetype from a LIN file

• Delete – remove the linetype

• Write LIN file – save the linetypes as a LIN file

Texts The Text Format dialog contains, for example, the text style and height definitions.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the text variable(s) with the arrow buttons. With the help of the New line variable you can include several lines in your text. With the Add constant function you can add a constant text.

With the Reference Line options you can choose the desired reference line. In the Symbol scale field you can set the scale factor for the reference line symbol (target line, arrow, filled circle). The scale factor can be within 0.2 … 4.

With the Border options you can select the desired border style. The Split circle border type can be used only with those texts that have two lines. With the Break cable border type you can place a text on a cable or a cable packet so that it is opaque (i.e. cable is "broken" behind the text). You can also lock the border size if necessary. According to the border type you can define the symbol height/width (L) or diameter (D) in the Fixed size field.

In Column separator option you can select a separator that is used between every variable within the same row. Available selections are: none, use space and use character. With use character you can define the used separator.

Layer definitions Unlike the products in the project, layer definitions cannot be added or removed. However, the structures of the layer names, colors, and line weights can be modified. Changing the linetype is possible in some layers. The modifying possibilities depend on the type (usage) of the layer.

You can include the following variables in the layer names. The values of these variables are defined according to the data of the cable, device, or revision mark.

• SV (system variable)

MagiCAD Electrical


• PV (product variable, the identification that is defined according to the part/device type)

• IV (installation variable)

• RV (revision variable)

The variable is typed inside braces.


Layer definitions

• Name structure – structure of the layer name; it can contain variables that are mentioned above

• Line type – linetype of the layer, also the BySystem selection is available. The linetype cannot be changed with all layer types.

• Line weight – line weight, if the drawings are intended to be printed according to the line weights (STB pen settings).

2D presentation

• Line type – linetype of the object, also the BySystem and ByLayer selections are available. If ByLayer is selected, the linetype is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

• Line weight – line weight of the object (if the drawings are intended to be printed according to the line weights). Also the BySystem and ByLayer selections are available. If ByLayer is selected, the line weight is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

• Color – color of the object, also the BySystem and ByLayer selections are available. If ByLayer is selected, the color is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

3D presentation

• Line type – linetype of the object.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Line weight – line weight of the object (if the drawings are intended to be printed according to the line weights). Also the BySystem and ByLayer selections are available. If ByLayer is selected, the line weight is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

• Color – color of the object. Also the BySystem, ByModel and ByLayer selections are available. If ByModel is selected, the color of the object is defined according to the color that is modeled in the 3D model. If ByLayer is selected, the color is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

You can select the linetype and color for the system. In the layer definition you can define e.g. the linetype for the cable By system or as constant ( = the cables in all systems have the same linetype).

Note: When you draw objects with the linetype option of ByProject the linetype will follow status definitions that are defined also in Project Management.

Report definitions The Description window shows the report models defined for the project (ie. the models that are available to the Reports function). The new, user-defined, report models are also included in the list.

The fields and values of the Report Definition dialog:

• Product groups – you can select which product/device groups are

included in the report

• General – give the name of the report model in the Description field

MagiCAD Electrical


• Columns – the column definition of the report. With the Insert function you can include more device properties (=columns) in the report.

Switchboard schematic definition The Description pane shows the switchboard schematic types that are available for the switchboard schematic functions (Switchboard Report and Schematic Preview, Create Switchboard Schematic). The new, user-defined, report models are also included in the list.

The fields and values of the Switchboard Schematic Definition dialog:

• General – give the name of the schematic type in the Description

field

• Columns – the column definition of the report. With the Insert function you can include more device properties (=columns) in the schematic.

• Drawing properties – here you can define dimensions and text style for the schematic.

Power circuit types The following information is defined in the Power Circuit Types dialog:

MagiCAD Electrical


• Circuit name

• Default descriptions

• Protection

• Default schematic symbol – the default symbol for the switchboard schematic. The symbol appears in the Circuit Information dialog, which is used when the circuit symbol is attached to the cable or a cable is connected to a cable packet and Circuit type is selected in the dialog (For further information, see chapter ”Drawing functions”)

• Report data – the ordinal number for the circuit (the ordinal numbers define the order how the symbols appear in the schematic), and the checkbox indicating whether similar groups are summed up in the schematic (if the switchboard schematic uses summing for the number of similar circuits)

Connection node defaults To get correct cable lengths also in the cases where the switchboard resides in another storey, it must be possible to take the cable packet from a storey to another. This is possible with the connection Node option. The same option can also be used with cable routes and single cables.

The connection Node option has replaced the Arrow option from older versions of MagiCAD. That is, if you do not want to take the cable, cable packet or cable route to another storey yet, but you want only to place an arrow symbol to the end of the object, you can do that with the connection Node option.

Using the Connection node defaults option you can set a default symbol for the cables, cable packets and cable routes that are leading to different directions. MagiCAD uses these default symbols, for example, when a connection node is added to the upper end of a cable packet. Correspondingly, MagiCAD uses the default symbol when a connection node is read to the next storey.

Provision for voids It is possible to create provisions for voids, if the 3D model of the building is available. The provisions for voids can be transferred with IFC data transfer to

MagiCAD Electrical


different programs (for example, Tekla Structures). For more information see the common features.

User named variables You can name the following fields as you prefer: P1-P5, National code, S1-S4, Layer code {SV}, layer code {PV} and O1-O4. The names are displayed in all dialogs, reference texts, BOM, etc.

Variable sets Variable types:

• Installation codes

• IP classes – casing

• EXE classes – explosion protection For casing and explosion protection classes, code and name are defined. For installation code it is possible to define also an identifier which can be included in the layer name (the {IV} variable).

• Object ID – device identifier It is possible to select an automatic device identifier for the device in the product dialog. The identifiers can consist of several parts, and it is possible to create different kinds of formats for them.

• Running index

See the common features for details.

MagiCAD Electrical


Combining projects

General This feature is used only when there is, for some reason, a need to work on the same project in several locations (not sharing the same network) simultaneously.

When the project is started, it is recommended to select the specific ID range for each location where the project is modified. This should be done because the same IDs cannot be used in different locations when symbols are added to the project. In MagiCAD version 2006.11, however, it is possible to merge the products that are within the same ID range.

NB: It is not recommended to modify the devices that are included in the template project. Neither should the project data of the other project be modified.

Selecting the ID range Define the range in the ID range field of the Project dialog (Project settings).

You can modify the ID range by double-clicking the row that contains the ID range. MagiCAD confirms "Are you sure that you want to change the active ID range?". The ID Range dialog opens.

Define the ID range in this dialog. The range is based on the Start ID ( * 1000) value. For example, if the start ID is 0, the range is 0..999; if the start ID is 1, the range is 1000..1999, and so on.

If the ID range is e.g. 1000..1999, the possible ID numbers for the new symbols are given within this ID range.

Merging the projects There are several phases and alternatives when projects are merged. The following paragraphs describe the alternatives for different purposes.

Moving the drawing to another project (command: MECHP) When the same project has been edited in several locations, and it has not been possible to use a shared project file, this function can be used for moving the drawing under a different project.

Follow these steps to proceed. The project, which is merged, is called sub-project, and the project, to which the other projects are merged, is called main project.

1. Copy or move the project files (.mep) of the sub-projects to the directory where the main project file (.mep) is located.

MagiCAD Electrical


2. Copy or move the drawings of the sub-projects to the directory of the main project drawings, or create a new directory for the drawings of the sub-projects.

3. Open a drawing of a sub-project, and run the MECHP command. The Select Project dialog opens. Select the main project in the dialog, and click the Select button. The Project Data to Merge dialog opens.

The dialog contains all information of the sub-project that is different from the main project. For the products that do not exist in the main project (i.e. the ID number is not in use), the program selects Add as the operation. In this case, the products are added to the main project. For the products with a dash ( - ) in the Operation column, you need to select the operation. Click the right mouse button on the row to select the operation: * Do not merge – the product is not merged to the main project. * Merge (add using original ID) – the product is merged to the main project, but the values for the product will be taken from the main project. * Create new – the program creates a new product with a new ID to the main project. * Map/Overwrite – with this operation you can select the product of the main project whose values you will use for the selected product. If an exactly similar product is found from the main project, word Identical is displayed in the dialog. Once you have made the selections, click Ok – Merge to merge the data. After the merge it is recommended to open the Project dialog in the sub-projects; the program is then able to make the connection between the drawing and the project.

Reading data from another project (Merge) You can read products from other projects with the Merge Project function (in the Project dialog). When you click the Merge Project button, the Merge Project dialog opens:

MagiCAD Electrical


Project

Select the project from which you want to read the data.

Groups

Select the groups you want to include: electric/tele/data/cable route systems, cables, cable trays, and devices.

Once you have selected the project and groups, click the Compare Data button to check if there is information that is changed. If there is, the Project Data to Merge dialog opens.

The dialog contains all information of the sub-project that is different from the main project.

For the products that do not exist in the main project (i.e. the ID number is not in use), the program selects Add as the operation. In this case, the products are added to the main project.

For the products with a dash ( - ) in the Operation column, you need to select the operation. Click the right mouse button on the row to select the operation: * Do not merge – the product is not merged to the main project.

MagiCAD Electrical


* Merge (add using original ID) – the product is merged to the main project, but the values for the product will be taken from the main project. * Create new – the program creates a new product with a new ID to the main project. * Map/Overwrite – with this operation you can select the product of the main project whose values you will use for the selected product. If an exactly similar product is found from the main project, word Identical is displayed in the dialog.

Once you have made the selections, click Ok – Merge to merge the data. After the merge it is recommended to open the Project dialog in the sub-projects; the program is then able to make the connection between the drawing and the project.

You can select several rows if you hold down the Shift or Ctrl key. However, to prevent unwanted overwriting it is not possible to overwrite the products of the active project.

Removing unused products from the project (Purge) With this function you can remove all products that are not in use anywhere in the model drawing list.

Please note that the program takes into account only those drawings that are in the model drawing list. The purging function does not remove products from the drawings that are not in the model drawing list.

Start the function by clicking the Purge button in the Project Management dialog. The Purge dialog opens, containing the list of drawings the purge function will check. The products that are in use in the listed drawings will not be removed; all other products will be removed.

When you click Ok, a new dialog opens and displays all products that would be purged.

MagiCAD Electrical


If you want to leave a product to the project, clear the checkbox of the product in the list. Note: You can select several rows with Shift or Ctrl key down. Next, when you click the right mouse button on the Purge column, you can choose between Select for Purge and Unselect from Purge.

MagiCAD Electrical

48 • Chapter 5. Drawing preferences

Chapter 5. Drawing preferences

Text styles and scales You can define the following settings in the Drawing Preferences dialog:

• Block attributes – text style

• 2D-scale – settings for the general 2D factor

• Section boundaries – visibility of the section boundaries

This function affects only the active drawing.

With this function you can select the 2D scale factors to the objects and the text style for the symbol attributes.

Note that these settings affect only the new objects that are placed in the drawing. The settings of the objects that are already drawn are changed with the Change Properties function.

Click the Drawing Properties toolbar button. The Drawing Preferences dialog opens.

Choose the suitable text style from the list. The text styles are defined in the project management.

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 5. Drawing preferences • 49

Select in the 2D Scale options the objects you want the scale factor affect.

This factor has an effect on devices (luminaires, sockets, etc) if the Use general 2D scale factor of the drawing option is selected in the project management.

If the Show section mark boundaries option is selected, all boundaries of the section area are showed, otherwise only the arrows appear in the drawing.

MagiCAD Electrical

50 • Chapter 6. Drawing functions

Chapter 6. Drawing functions

General command line functions and options The command prompt shows the available options when the drawing command is active. You can also open a pop-up menu of command line options by right-clicking the mouse (this task may depend on the mouse settings). Some general command line options (the hotkey is inside parentheses):

• Options (o)

• Direction (d) with the devices whose direction you can change

• Array (a) – placing several devices at a time

• Back (b) – reverse drawing of the cable or cable route to the previous point

• Z (z) – elevation change when you draw a cable or a cable route

• Connect/noConnect (c)– connecting to a cable tray

• Connection Node (n) – adding the connection point (arrow symbol) between storeys

In addition, the pop-up menu always contains the following options:

• Enter, accept and end drawing

• Cancel, reject the drawn parts

• Pan

• Zoom

The following information appear in the command line:

• cable number (with cables)

• name of the system

• material (with cables)

• product name (with devices)

• installation method

• width and height of the cable tray (or conduit diameter)

• elevation

• user code

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 6. Drawing functions • 51

Placing the devices Drawing is often started by placing the products to the 2D drawing. The products are chosen with the selection dialogs, which are opened by clicking the corresponding toolbar buttons.

When you place several devices at the same time (Array option), define the number of rows and columns, as well as the possible connections between the devices, in the Array Options dialog.

The devices are placed evenly. If SNAP is on, the devices are placed in the snap points, and if there are devices on top of each other, the excess devices are left off. With the Cable Options button you can modify the properties of the connecting cable (for further information, see "Cables").

Product selection dialogs When you select the drawing function of a device (by clicking the toolbar button or by typing the command), the first call of the function opens the selection dialog (Select Device). The dialog shows a list of the products that belong to the project and to the product group.

As default, the dialogs contain the system, product group, and elevation. You can change all these properties if necessary.

Select the device by clicking on the suitable symbol in the Product dialog pane and clicking OK.

While the selection function is active, you can open each product selection dialog either by opening the pop-up menu and selecting Options, or by typing the "hotkey" (o) at the command prompt.

You can resize the selection dialogs, and they "remember" their locations and sizes.

You can use the Save to Toolbar function to place the device to a separate toolbar ("favorites" toolbar). You can later pick the device quickly from the toolbar when you need to place it again (see the toolbar description later).

Adding/removing/changing the device types, and changing the properties, is done in the project management function.

MagiCAD Electrical


"Favorites" toolbar The most used devices can be collected in a separate toolbar. In the device selection dialog, click Save to Toolbar.

It is possible to include 20 devices in the Favorites toolbar. You can remove the device from the toolbar by right-clicking the button and selecting Delete button.

The buttons are sorted automatically in the toolbar according to their systems. If you want to add a device that is already in the system and has also the same system, the button blinks in the toolbar.

In addition to the product data, the system, user code, and elevation are saved in the toolbar. This information is shown in a "tooltip" when the cursor is located on the button. If you want to change these settings before you place the device on the drawing, select Options at the command prompt.

General symbols Select the General Symbols from the editing menu

Select the symbol and define the elevation. It is possible to define also the length and height for the symbols that are scaled according to their dimensions. You can change the dimension afterwards with the Part Properties function.

With the Options command line option you can change the symbol, and with the Direction option you can rotate the symbol before placing it in the drawing.

You can also create general symbols in the same way you create other symbols (the Create User Symbol function). Select "General symbol" as the group. For further information see chapter "Creating user-defined symbols".

Drawing wires and cables Start drawing by selecting the Cables function (depending on the system, either from the Electric or Tele menu). The drawing functions are similar with both cable types.

When you start the drawing function for the first time in the working session, the Cable Options dialog opens. You can define the following properties for the wire/cable:

MagiCAD Electrical


• General – general properties

• System

• Material – cable material

• Installation method

• Status

• Linetype – 1D linetype

• Cable number – You can set a cable number for the cable you are drawing in the Number for next cable field. With the next free button you can make MagiCAD find the next free cable number from all model drawings. Cable number is editable also in the circuit dialog after installing a circuit and in Part Properties. MagiCAD recognizes the highest amount of digits in cable numbers and uses the same amount when using the next free button. Note: You can easily create cable lists with reports by using the cable number variable. Note: To make your cable numbers similar give the desired number of digits already for the first cable number. Note: MagiCAD will not give a warning if you input a duplicate number. You should use the next free button always when inserting a new number.

• XY-Routing; Routing the wire/cable: Direct drawing, direct drawing with 90° bend to the side (Orthogonal) or Side automatic. If the side automatic option is selected, the "curvature" of the cable is given in the dy field. With a negative value the connection cables can be draw to the opposite side.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Connection box – the default connection/distribution box. If you use the boX drawing option, or start drawing the cable from an existing cable (ie. a branch), this type of box is placed automatically. If the box type is not defined, and/or the Select box always option is selected, the box selection dialog opens every time you start drawing from an existing cable (=a branch).

• Presentation – presentation mode of the cable. You can choose between Direct line segments (straight cable), Curved cable, or Corner radius (the bend radius that is set to a straight cable).

• Corners – corner type of the cable

• Sharp – sharp angle

• Rounded – rounded angle; set the radius of the corner in the Radius field

• Bevelled – bevelled angle; set the distance between the bevel and the theoretical corner point in the Distance field

• Elevation – whether the elevation of the cable is defined according to the highest point, lowest point, or start point. The vertical cable (ie. cable in the z direction) is drawn according to this selection.

• Device basepoint; This basepoint defines whether the cable is connected to the insertion point of the device or freely to the nearest point – and whether to trim the end of the cable to the edge of the symbol.

Give the start point of the cable. You can change the elevation, which appears also in the command line, with the Elevation option. You can give the new elevation as a numeric value or according to another part (Show reference part button).

With the Options command line option you can change the cable drawing settings.

In this phase of the drawing session you can also open the pop-up menu for more drawing options (or use the corresponding hotkeys at the command prompt). The drawing options:

• Enter – accepts and ends drawing

• Cancel – rejects the drawn parts

• noConnect <> Connect if found – in close spaces you can avoid the cable connecting to another cable or device if you select the noConnect option. You can reactivate connections by selecting the Connect if found option.

• Options – opens the Cable Options dialog. Note that cables are handled as whole cables when they are drawn. If linetype, installation code, xy-routing, presentation or corners are changed during cable drawing, MagiCAD will split the cable into several entities but they will be linked together as a whole cable. Cables have four significant properties: system, material, cable number and status. If one or more of these is changed during cable drawing the cable will be cut and a junction box is forced to be installed. If a junction box that has two cables connected to it is removed the cables are connected as a whole cable if the significant properties are the same for both cables. Otherwise they are left as separate cables. The link between two entities of the same cable is also lost if the two connected ends are separated too far from each other (100 times world scale).

MagiCAD Electrical


• Back – backs to the previous connection

• Z – elevation change (functions similar to the Elevation option). Contains also the option for changing the elevation angle (Angle to horizontal)

• Options – opens the Cable Options dialog

• Back

• Z – elevation change. Give the new elevation in the dialog (you can also select a reference object) and define the angle that is used when the cables on different elevations are connected (the default value is 90°)

• connection Node – arrow symbol to the end of the cable (the same option also applies to cable packet and cable route drawing functios). When you select this option, the Create Connection Node dialog opens and you can select the suitable arrow symbol. In the project management dialog you can select default symbols for the cables, cable packets and cable routes leading to different directions.

• boX – adds a branch/connection box at the end of the cable. If a default box symbol is defined in the cable drawing options, it is used. If it is not defined, the Select Box dialog opens.

• cuRved <> diRect – switches between the presentation modes of the cable

• Circuit – adds a circuit symbol at the end of the cable (electric cables only)

• Pan

• Zoom

The box and connection node symbols can be placed either at the start point or the endpoint; the circuit symbol can be placed only at the endpoint.

When the cable is completely drawn, give the endpoint (Enter).

Circuit When you select this option, the Circuit Information dialog opens, and you can define the following circuit properties:

MagiCAD Electrical


• General – general properties

• Circuit number – If you prefer, you can leave this field blank, define the circuit numbers in the switchboard schematic, and update the circuit numbers from the switchboard schematic to the groups.

• Circuit type – These are defined in the project management (Power circuit types).

• Description 1, 2, and 3 – Here you can define free description texts for the circuit. You can show these description texts e.g. in the texts or switchboard schematic.

• Power – the active power for the circuit

• Diversity factor – a factor for calculating the current. It is the ratio between the simultaneous maximum demand of a group and the sum of their individual maximum demands within the same period. This factor is currently used when transferring the network to be calculated in calculation software such as Febdok via IFC Calculation Export. It is recommended to use value 1 as the factor in the connections between switchboards.

• Cable – type of the cable and cable number. If the cable material is selected for the cable that this circuit connects to, the material is derived to this field automatically. Cable number cannot be given when installing the circuit. If a cable number is given already for the cable when installing the circuit, it is visible in the field.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Phases – Select the phases that are used by the circuit. You can also select the neutral conductor and earthing wire. Currently, these values have meaning if the network is transferred to calculation software such as Febdok for calculations.

• Protection, overload and fault current protection

• Switchboard – select the switchboard to which the group is attached. When you click the Select button, a dialog opens for switchboard selection. You can attach the circuit to a switchboard that is either in the current drawing or in another drawing in the model drawing list. When you click the Deselect button, you can disconnect the circuit from the switchboard. Note: If there are switchboard areas defined in the drawing, and the circuit is inside the switchboard area, it is not necessary to connect the circuit separately to the switchboard; it belongs automatically to the switchboard that is supplying the area. However, these kinds of circuits are not exported in the IFC Calculation Export.

• Cable packet – connection to the cable packet If you prefer, you can connect the circuit to a cable packet. Click the Connect button and the packet to which you want to connect with the cable. The cable length is calculated according to the most direct route from the circuit symbol to the shown cable packet.

• Schematic symbol – selecting the schematic symbol Click the Select Symbol button to open the dialog where you can select the symbol.

• Symbol – selecting the circuit symbol

You can modify this information later with the Part Properties function (the Circuit Information dialog opens). Then you can also change the cable material and cable number.

Other information You can cut the cable/wire with the Break Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route function. Click two points at the cable. The part between the points is removed.

If you start drawing from an open end of another cable,

MagiCAD will check for all conflicts that appear between the existing cable and the new cable and open the Different Properties dialog if it finds any conflicts. The available selections in the dialog are:

• Use all properties of the selected objects

This option will use all the properties shown in the dialog from the selected object.

• Use all properties of the current options

This option will use all the properties shown in the dialog from the currently active settings.

• Copy selected properties from the selected object

With this option on you can select the wanted properties from the selected object to the currently active properties and use those. Use double-click to copy properties.

MagiCAD Electrical


Note: The properties that are not shown in the dialog are already the same or are taken from the current settings.

Note: If linetype, installation code, xy-routing, presentation or corners are changed MagiCAD will split the cable into several entities but they will be linked together as a whole cable. Cables have four significant properties: system, material (product), cable number and status. If one or more of these is changed the cable will be cut and a junction box is forced to be installed.

Note: If a device is installed in the middle of a cable the cable will be split into two pieces. They will still have the same properties as the original though so if the original cable already had a cable number both of the two “new” cables will have the same cable number. MagiCAD gives a message if this happens.

Note: If a device is installed in the middle of a cable and the cable already has an IFC GUID MagiCAD will reset the IFC GUID. New ones will be created in the next IFC export.

Drawing wire/cable packets The pop-up menu contains the same AutoCAD options as the cable drawing function, plus Back, Options, Z, and Arrow.

If you select Options, a dialog containing the following information opens:

MagiCAD Electrical


• General – system information and status information. System type

cannot be changed. Select the System. It is possible to define a system-dependent layer for the cable packets by using the {SV} variable in the project management.

• 1D linetype – line type and width

• Elevation – the definition of the elevation: according to the highest point, the lowest point, or the startpoint of the route.

• Connection basepoint – this basepoint defines whether the cable packet is connected to the insertion point of the device or freely to the nearest point.

• Corners – corner type of the cable packet

• Sharp – sharp angle

• Rounded – rounded angle; set the radius of the corner in the Radius field

• Bevelled – bevelled angle; set the distance between the bevel and the theoretical corner point in the Distance field

You can break the cable packet with the Break Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route function. Click two points at the cable packet. The part between the points is removed.

Note: Cable packets are handled more strictly than cables. You cannot connect a packet to another packet unless they have completely the same properties. MagiCAD also forces all properties to be taken from the selected object when continuing to draw an existing cable packet.

MagiCAD Electrical


Logical connections and reports of the tele, data, and BA devices

Settings of the devices You can define whether it is possible to connect other devices to a device, and whether the device needs a power supply. These settings are made in the product dialogs in the project management.

The settings are otherwise similar to electric devices, but with tele/data/BA devices it is also possible to make the following settings:

• Connections

• Sub-devices can be connected. Max no of conn. – Here you can define whether it is possible to connect sub-devices to the device (that is, whether the device is a host device). In addition, the maximum number of host devices is given, and when this value is exceeded, the program gives a warning.

• Power supply

• Has power supply – Here you can define whether the device requires power. If this option is selected, give the voltage as Volts and the power as Watts. Also, when this option is selected, it is possible to connect to this device with an electric cable without the program giving warnings.

Defining the logical connections It is possible to make logical connections between the host device and the sub-devices, that is, defining e.g. the devices that are controlled by a router.

MagiCAD Electrical


Start making the connections by clicking the Build Logical Connection toolbar button. Next, show the device that will be the host device, and select the devices (by clicking or selecting a rectangular area) that will be supplied by the host device. Finally, accept your choices with the right mouse button.

NOTE: Before you define the connections, you can select the following options from the pop-up-menu, which opens when you click the right mouse button:

• External dwg – you can select the host device from another drawing.

• Options – here you can choose if the number of devices connected to the host device is checked (i.e. if it exceeds the maximum number that is defined for the host device):

o Do not check

o Check current drawing – the number is checked from the active drawing

o Check all model drawings – the number is checked from all drawings that are included in the Model drawings list

AutoCAD command line informs how many connections are allowed to be made to the host device and how many devices are currently connected – for example: Number of connected sub-devices: 6 (10) in all model drawings.

Checking the logical connections, report The connections can be checked, and reports can be made of the connections, with the Check and Report Logical Connections function. When you click the toolbar button of the function, the Report type dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Objects to list – select which objects are displayed

• Devices which are connected to the selected host device – the program displays the connected devices

• Devices which are not connected to any host device – the program displays the connections which are not connected to any host device

Host – select the host device whose connections you want to check

• If you click the “…” button, you can choose the host device from any drawing that is included in the Model drawings list. The Select Host Device dialog opens, and you can select the host device.

• If you want to select the device from the active drawing, the Select from current drawing option must be selected.

Drawings – select the scope of the report

• Current drawing

• All model drawings – all drawings that are included in the Model drawings list are checked.

Systems – select which systems are to be checked (All tele, data and BA systems or Selected system)

Report type – select the style of the report

• Draw to garbage layer – a line is drawn from the host device to all devices that are connected to it. The line is drawn on MAGI_GARBAGE layer, and it can be removed with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

• Text report – the program outputs a text report, which can be copied e.g. to an Excel sheet through the clipboard. The report includes the following information:

o Object ID – the device identifier, which can be set manually or defined as automatic in the Project Management dialog

o System – the system to which the device belongs

o Product description – the description that is defined in the product dialog

o Distance – the distance to the host device

Route – there are two types or routing for calculating the distance between the host device and the sub-device.

• Direct – the distance directly from the host device to the sub-device

• Orthogonal – the program calculates the distance from the host device to the sub-device with a 90° angle

If the Select from current drawing option is selected, show the device of which you want to output the report.

Drawing cable routes Cable routes are divided into two types:

• Conduits

• Cable trays / cable racks

MagiCAD Electrical


Conduits When you use this function for the first time, the Conduit Options dialog opens.

• General – system, status, conduit type, conduit diameter (default

diameter of the conduit type is defined in the Project Management)

• Linetype

• Elevation

• Presentation – curved line (Curved) or straight line (Direct line segments). If you have selected the presentation with direct line segments, you can define the “thickness” in wireframe presentation for the conduit in the W field. In 3D presentation the size of the conduit is taken from the Diameter field.

When you later use the conduit drawing function, you can define the new settings with the Options from the pop-up menu and in the command line.

Cable trays and cable racks When you use this function for the first time, the Cable Tray Options dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Tray system – system of the cable tray. The default system for the

cable routes can be set in the project management.

• Status – status for the cable tray

• Alignment – the “guidance” for drawing the tray. If the Cable tray is swapped option is selected, the tray has been rotated “sideways” (to be installed on a wall).

• 2D Linetype

• Dimensions

• Fitting types – types (appearances) for bends, reductions, and branches. In the Inner bend radius field you can define the radius of the inner bend to certain bend types. If you want to draw also the 2D filling symbol to the bends, select the Hatch bend in 2D option.

Note: If you use the reduction type none, MagiCAD will cut trays with different properties to different entities, but because of the advanced handling of trays inside MagiCAD they can still be stretched together. The same applies when starting to draw from and end part of an existing tray with different properties.

• Product – cable tray type

You can start drawing the tray from an empty space or by connecting to an existing tray (or its bend/branch). The program places a suitable branch piece automatically, or modifies the existing bend/branch, if drawing is started from an existing cable tray or its bend/branch. MagiCAD first checks for conflicts as it does with cables and conduits also when you start by connecting to a cable tray. The Different Properties dialog has the same options as mentioned before.

The Connect option is on by default when drawing is started. This way you can click the suitable location at the cable tray to which you want to connect. Note that if you want to connect to another tray, the Connect option must be on.

MagiCAD Electrical


If you connect in the middle of a cable tray with a new tray (when you finish the drawing of the new tray) the current options are forced to be used.

If you want to start drawing from an empty place, click the right mouse button and select noConnect from the pop-up menu. Next, click the location from which you want to start drawing – the Elevation dialog opens.

In the Elevation dialog you can set the elevation for drawing the cable tray. If you prefer, you can set the elevation according to a reference object.

When you draw cable tray to one direction and then backwards (i.e. on top of the recently drawn cable tray section), the cable tray section is not drawn "twice" – instead, the cable tray ends to the point where you end "reversing". You can also use the Back command from the pop-up menu.

Stretching cable trays By selecting the free end of the cable tray you can e.g. lengthen the cable tray.

By clicking on the middle of the cable tray you can move the cable tray line.

If you want to change the elevation of the cable tray, select first the Z option from the pop-up menu, which opens when you click the right mouse button. Next, click the tray whose elevation you want to change, and give a new elevation in the Elevation dialog.

If you select a bend or a branch, the bends convert according to the way you move the cursor, and the cable trays attached to the bends and branches are also moved/reshaped.

Changing the cable tray width and height The Cable Tray Dimensions dialog opens, and you can define the new width and/or height of the cable tray (max 2000 mm).

You can also choose how to change the dimensions. You can change the width evenly to both sides or to the clicked side only, and the height evenly to both sides, upwards (top), or downwards (bottom).

MagiCAD Electrical


Breaking the cable routes Select the Break Cable/Cable Packet/Cable Route function and click two points at the cable tray. The part between the points is removed.

Cable tray crossing With this function it is possible to make underpasses/overpasses of the cable trays that are drawn.

Select the Cable Tray Crossing function.

Show the two points of the cable tray (the piece between the points will move upwards/downwards).

When you have shown both points, the Height Difference dialog opens. Set a new elevation for the cable tray section and select the angle for making the underpass/overpass. You can also set the elevation using the Top of…, Center of…; and Bottom of… options.

Accept the settings with OK. The cable tray piece between the points will move to the selected elevation.

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 7. Switchboard schematic functions • 67

Chapter 7. Switchboard schematic functions

General You can create a switchboard schematic from one or several plan drawings. If your plan drawing consists of circuits, you can create a switchboard schematic automatically. All group information can be transferred to the switchboard schematic; description, fuse type, cable type, schematic symbol, circuit number, etc.

After you have created the switchboard schematic, you can change the circuit information, and if necessary, update it to your plan drawings. Likewise, if you change circuit information in your plan drawings, you can update it to the switchboard schematic.

MagiCAD Electrical controls the information that it transferred between drawings. For example, if several circuits with the same circuit number appear when you try to update the data, MagiCAD warns about it. It is, however, possible to update, but you are informed about the errors if they occur.

Creating a switchboard schematic Create a new drawing, save it, and attach it to your project (which also contains the plan drawing).

You can create and modify switchboard schema models in the project management (select Switchboard schematic def. in the Project dialog).

Switchboard schematic preview Once you have created/selected the suitable model for the switchboard schema and closed the Project dialog, you can preview your switchboard schema by clicking the Switchboard Report and Schematic Preview toolbar button. The Switchboard Report dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical

68 • Chapter 7. Switchboard schematic functions

Select the model for the switchboard schematic (Report Model). The models are defined in the project management.

Select the switchboard by clicking the Select button. The Select Switchboard dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the drawing where the switchboard is (note: only the drawings that are in the model drawing list are shown in the dialog), and select the switchboard. Close the dialog with Ok.

Select the drawing(s) you want to include in the switchboard schematic (Drawing of the circuits). If the Show only if includes groups for this switchboard option is selected, only the drawings with connections to the selected switchboard are shown.

Click OK. The Report dialog opens, containing a list of the groups that are connected to the selected switchboard.

You can copy the texts to the clipboard to be pasted to another application, e.g. Excel.

Placing the switchboard schematic Start placing the switchboard schema to the drawing by clicking the Create Switchboard Schematic toolbar button. The Switchboard Schematic dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the model for the switchboard schematic (Report Model). The models are defined in the project management. If Create header only option is selected, only the header row of the switchboard schematic is placed.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the switchboard by clicking the Select button. The Select Switchboard dialog opens.

Select the drawing where the switchboard is (note: only the drawings that are in the model drawing list are shown in the dialog), and select the switchboard. Close the dialog with Ok.

In the Base point fields you can define the precise location (X, Y) for the switchboard schematic. Alternatively, you can choose to click the location in the drawing (in this case select the Specify on screen option).

Select the drawing(s) you want to include in the switchboard schematic (Drawing of the Circuits). If the Show only if includes groups for this switchboard option is selected, only the drawings with connections to the selected switchboard are shown.

If Explode top level blocks is selected, the schematic blocks are automatically exploded when the schematic is created.

Accept your choices with OK. The switchboard schematic can be e.g. like in the following picture:

MagiCAD Electrical


Editing switchboard schematics

Edit Row Click the Edit Row toolbar button to start modifying a row in the switchboard schema. The search circle appears. Click the row you want to modify. The Switchboard Schematic Row dialog opens.

Data:

This pane shows the data that is included in the switchboard schematic. Double-click a field to modify the data in it.

Referred Circuit Symbol:

• Drawing – This field shows the name of the drawing where the group resides

• Read values from the circuit symbol – Click this button to update the data that is defined for the circuit symbol in the plan drawing, to the table.

Insert Row Click the Insert Row toolbar button to add a row to the switchboard schema. The Insert Schematic Row dialog opens.

• Empty row without data columns – You can add empty rows

without data columns (i.e. blank lines). Give the quantity in the No. of similar rows to insert field.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Empty row with data columns – You can add empty rows containing data columns (i.e. modifiable switchboard schematic rows). Give the quantity in the No. of similar rows to insert field.

• Select circuit type from project – You can add as many rows of a particular circuit type as you prefer. When you select this option and click Ok, the Select Circuit Type dialog opens and you can also select the switchboard schematic symbol if needed.

• Select circuit(s) from drawing – You can select circuits from the drawings that are included in the project. When you select this option and click Ok, the Insert Circuit dialog opens.

Select the drawings from where to search the circuits. If the Show only if includes circuits for this switchboard option is selected, only the drawings containing connections to the active switchboard appear in the list. Select the circuits to be included. If the Don't show if already in the schematic option is selected, the circuits that are already in the switchboard schematic are not shown (in this example, one circuit is included in the plan drawing). With the Select all function you can select all circuits. MagiCAD Electrical does not select the circuits that are already in the schematic.

MagiCAD Electrical


Note: When you add row(s), MagiCAD prompts you to select the row above which the new row(s) are added. If you want to add the rows to the end of the switchboard schematic, use the End option.

Insert Circuit from Plan This function is the same as Select circuit from drawing in the Insert Row function.

Delete Row Click the Delete Row toolbar button and select the row you want to delete.

Move Row Click the Move Row toolbar button and select the row you want to move. Next, show the new location.

Change Column Width Click the Change Column Width toolbar button and click the column whose width you want to change. The cursor attaches the left border of the column, and you can broaden or narrow the column by moving the border.

Add Symbol to Row Click the Add Symbol to Row toolbar button. The Select Symbol dialog opens.

Select the right subgroup, the market area/areas (Series), and the symbol you want to add.

When Explode top level block when install is selected, the schematic block is automatically exploded when it is placed. The possible sub-blocks (components) remain as blocks.

Click Ok after selecting the symbol, and then click the row where you want to add the symbol.

MagiCAD Electrical


Add Detail Symbol Click the Add Detail Symbol toolbar button. The Select Symbol dialog opens.

Select the right subgroup, the market area (Series), and the symbol you want to add. Click Ok to accept your choices.

You can place the symbol into an empty space (in this case select the noConnect drawing option) or on a line. You can also place a detail symbol in the line of a switchboard schema block. In this case MagiCAD Electrical asks: Explode selected block reference?. If you answer Yes, the block is exploded and the detail symbol can break the line, if necessary, when it is placed. If you answer No, the detail symbol is placed on the line without breaking it.

Draw Rail With this function you can draw polylines (rails) in the switchboard schema. If you click the right mouse button when you start drawing, you can set the width of the polyline. The default value is 0, and the line is thin. If the value is 1, the the polyline will have the same width than the “piece of rail” in the switchboard schema symbols.

Add Text With this function you can write free text to the switchboard schema. You can select the style and size for the text. You can also emphasize the text with reference line and borders.

You can modify an existing text with the Part Properties function. The text can be stretched with the Stretch Text function.

Updating data from plan drawings to the switchboard schematic

With the Check Data and Update from Plan Drawings function you can "download" the changes made in the plan drawings to the switchboard schematic.

MagiCAD Electrical


The Messages dialog opens containing a list of the possible changes (e.g. different description, different cable).

Click the Update button to update the changes to the switchboard schematic.

For closer look of some situation, you can zoom the corresponding circuit. Select the group and click the Zoom to Center button. MagiCAD searches the location, brings it to the center of the screen and marks it with a cross. You can remove the cross with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

Circuit Renumbering With this function you can renumber all circuits or the circuits in a selected area. Click the Circuit Renumbering toolbar button to start the function. The Schematic Numbers dialog opens.

Select the type of numbering (Increment Method) and give the first circuit number (First Number). Select with the Range options whether to renumber the circuits in the selected area (Select first and last circuit) or All circuits.

MagiCAD Electrical


Creating switchboard schematic symbols With the Create Switchboard Schematic Symbol function you can define new symbols to be used in the switchboard schematics.

First, draw the symbol to the symbol column of the switchboard schematic row. Next, click the Create Switchboard Schematic Symbol toolbar button. MagiCAD asks you to select the objects you want to include in the symbol. Select the objects and click the right mouse button. The User Symbol dialog opens.

Give the following information in the Block Properties:

• Series – Select the series where you want to add the symbol (USR = User)

• Group – Select the subgroup in which you want to add the symbol.

• Name suffix – Give the name for the symbol.

• Reset all entities to BYBLOCK – If this option is selected, MagiCAD converts all lines to BYBLOCK mode.

• Reset elevations to 0 – if this option is selected, all objects are moved to the zero elevation

• Convert source entities to block – If this option is selected, the selected object are converted to a block.

The Block name field shows the name of the symbol.

Accept your settings with Ok. MagiCAD creates the symbol and saves it to the user symbol database. The user-defined symbols appear in the symbol selection dialogs when USR is selected.

Creating detail symbols With the Create Detail Symbol function you can create new detail symbols to be used in the switchboard schematics.

First, draw the symbol in the symbol column of the switchboard schematic.

Next, click the Create Detail Symbol toolbar button. MagiCAD Electrical prompts you to select the objects you want to include in the symbol. Select the objects and accept them by clicking the right mouse button. Next, set the insertion point for the object. The User Symbol dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Give the following information in Block Properties:

• Series – Select the series where you want to add the symbol (USR = User)




• Reset elevations to 0 – if this option is selected, all objects are moved to the zero elevation

• Convert source entities to block – If this option is selected, the selected object are converted to a block.


Accept your settings with Ok. MagiCAD creates the symbol and saves it to the user symbol database. The user-defined symbols appear in the symbol selection dialogs when USR is selected.

Explode Switchboard Schematic Symbol With this function you can explode switchboard schematic blocks. This function differs from AutoCAD's EXPLODE so that the lines of the exploded block retain the layer even after exploding.

This function is useful e.g. when you want to modify an existing block and then create a new block of it.

Updating data from to the switchboard schematic to plan drawings

Updating data from the switchboard schematic to the plan drawings is done in the same way as updating data in the other direction, except the Check Data and Update from Switchboard Schematic function is used.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the switchboard schematic drawing and click Ok. The Messages dialog opens. Update the data by clicking the Update button.

Checking the switchboards and circuits With the Check Switchboards and Power Circuits function you can check what switchboards are included in the plan drawing, search circuits that are not connected, and search circuits that have no circuit number defined.

Click the Check Switchboards and Power Circuits toolbar button. The Select Operation dialog opens.

Switchboards which are referred from current drawing

When you select this option, you can check the switchboards that exist in the active drawing. When you click Ok, the Messages dialog opens, containing a list of the switchboards.

When you select a switchboard and click the Zoom to Center button in the Messages dialog, MagiCAD searches the switchboard and brings it to the center of the screen.

If you click the List Groups button in the Messages dialog, you can see a lisst of the groups that are connected to the switchboards.

All switchboards (all model drawings)

When you select this option, you can check the switchboards that exist in the drawings that are listed in the model drawing list.

Circuits that are not connected to switchboard (current dwg)

When you select this option, you can search circuits that exist in the current drawing but are not connected to any switchboard.

When you select a circuit and click the Zoom to Center button in the Messages dialog, MagiCAD searches the circuit and brings it to the center of the screen.

Circuits that have no circuit number (current dwg)

When you select this option, you can search circuits that exist in the current drawing but have no circuit number.

When you select a circuit and click the Zoom to Center button in the Messages dialog, MagiCAD searches the circuit and brings it to the center of the screen.

Circuits that are referred from the devices of the current drawing

MagiCAD Electrical


When you select this option, you can search circuits having reference to a device from the current drawing. The function also sums up the power of the devices that are connected to the circuit, and outputs the total power in the report.

Devices that are not connected to a circuit (current drawing)

With this option you can select devices with no circuit reference from the current drawing.

MagiCAD Electrical

Chapter 8. Other functions • 81

Chapter 8. Other functions

Edit Storey Properties It is now possible to give the storey location in x, y, and z direction, which makes it possible to display also the absolute elevation of the objects in the reference texts. Also, IFC Export can place the storey to the right location.

In addition, the new functions of tele/data/BA devices can calculate the distance to the host device much more accurately than without the storey information.

It is also possible to define the connections between storeys (e.g. cable routes and cable packets) with the help of the storey information. Different kinds of calculations are accurate, because the entire distance from the circuit to the switchboard can be calculated.

Click the Edit Storey Properties toolbar button. The Storey Properties dialog opens.

Storey origin in dwg – Here you can, if necessary, define the location of the storey origin (bottom-left corner). You can also set the rotation angle for the building.

MagiCAD Electrical

82 • Chapter 8. Other functions

You can also use the Move origin button to set the location and rotation angle. The location of the bottom-left corner of the storey (i.e. storey origin) and the direction of the positive x-axis are set with this function. Start the function, show the location of the corner and then show the direction of the x-axis.

In many cases the best solution is to set the corner point of the storey to the bottom-left corner of the building. However, it can be set to another location. Sometimes a guideline can be drawn from a fixed location of the building (e.g. elevator shaft) and the origin is set to the end of the guideline.

The best method to set to place the corner point is to zoom the view (zoom window) to the corner of the building and use the Snap Intersection function of AutoCAD. Press down the Ctrl key and click the right mouse button to find the function. Click the corner of the building and show the direction of the x-axis (usually to the right). To make sure that the direction of the x-axis is vertical, check that ORTHO is on (F8).

Storey origin defines an adjustment point for saving the storey information (x, y, and z coordinates, rotation angle) to the database. This information can be changed afterwards, for example, if it is necessary to move the storey in x,y-direction.

Building – If the storey list of the building is already modeled with MagiCAD Room, here you can attach the drawing to the building database (project).

• Building database – Attach the drawing to the building database with the Select button. The building database can be modified with the Edit button. With the None button you can detach the drawing from the building database.

• Storey – When you have selected the building database, select the storey which the active drawing represents.

Storey origin in building – If the drawing is not attached to a building database, you can define here the location of the storey in the building.

Connections between storeys (Connection Node) To get correct cable lengths also in the cases where the switchboard resides in another storey, it must be possible to take the cable packet from a storey to another. This is possible with the connection Node option. The same option can also be used with cable routes and single cables.

The connection Node option has replaced the Arrow option. That is, if you do not want to take the cable, cable packet or cable route to another storey yet, but you want only to place an arrow symbol to the end of the object, you can do that with the connection Node option.

Initial procedures Default symbols: The project dialog has now a new option: Connection node defaults. Using this option you can set a default symbol for the cables, cable packets and cable routes that are leading to different directions. MagiCAD uses these default symbols, for example, when a connection node is added to the upper end of a cable packet. Correspondingly, MagiCAD uses the default symbol when a connection node is read to the next storey.

Defining the location for the storey: With the Edit Storey Properties function you can define the locations of the storeys in relation to each other. For example, in case of a block of flats, set the

MagiCAD Electrical


elevation of the floor to the z value of the storey.

Making connections between storeys For example, if you intend to take a cable packet from storey 1 to storey 2, you must first draw the cable to the desired elevation (in this example, to elevation 3000 in storey 1). Next, add a connection node leading upwards to the end of the cable packet.

Then go to storey 2, and read the connection from storey 1 with the Connect Node function (command: MEFNC).

AutoCAD’s command line shows the results of the connections:

Already successfully connected nodes: 0

Now connected nodes: 0

Created connection nodes: 1

When the symbols have been read from the other storey, you can continue drawing from the connection node symbol.

Tip: If you want, for example, to draw a vertical cable tray that continues at the same location in other storeys, you can draw first a vertical tray e.g. in one storey and

MagiCAD Electrical


add connection nodes to its upper and lower ends. Next, you can create the connection nodes to the other storeys by using the Connect Node function.

Commands related to the connection nodes:

• Connect Node

• Disconnect Node

• Connection Node Report – search connection nodes from the drawing

Device connections

General With the Device Connection function you can connect several devices to a cable at the same time, or two devices together.

Connecting the devices Start by clicking the Device Connection toolbar button. The Device Connection Options dialog opens and you can select the connection type. You can also give options to the connection – for example, if you connect two devices together with a zigzag cable, you can set the distance of the “wave crests”.

When you have selected the connection type, the program prompts you to show the two devices (zigzag connection) or to select the devices and the cable (other connections).

Moving and rotating the symbol attributes With the Move Attribute function it is possible to move and rotate the fixed attribute values.

Click the Move Attribute toolbar button and select the attribute you want to move. When you have selected the attribute you can move it to the desired location. You can also rotate the attribute by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Direction from the pop-up menu.

MagiCAD Electrical


Moving the 2D symbol and 3D object of the device It is possible to place devices so that the 2D symbol and 3D object have separate insertion points. It is also possible to move and rotate the 2D symbol and 3D object separately with the Move Device Symbol function. Start the function and select the symbol whose 2D symbol or 3D object you want to move or rotate – by default, the 3D object is selected, but if you want to move the 2D symbol instead, click the right mouse button and select 2D from the pop-up menu.

When you have selected the 3D object or 2D symbol, you can move it to the desired location. You can also rotate the object by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Direction from the pop-up menu.

Defining the switchboard borders and switchboard areas

Switchboard borders With the Switchboard Border function you can draw a borderline with an arrow at its end. It is also possible to select a switchboard for the borderlines, in which case the switchboard ID is automatically displayed. It is also possible to select a reserve switchboard, whose ID can also be optionally displayed.

When you click the Switchboard Border toolbar button, the following dialog opens:

• System – select the system for the switchboard border

• Width – you can set the thickness for the switchboard border line

• Elevation – you can set a specific elevation for the switchboard border lines. However, this setting affects only the presentation.

When you have made the settings, click Ok and start drawing the switchboard border line. Then you can select the arrow by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Arrow option; the Switchboard Border Arrow dialog opens:

MagiCAD Electrical


• Primary switchboard – select the switchboard for the border

• Secondary switchboard – select the reserve switchboard for the border (optional)

• Elevation – this field displays the elevation on which the switchboard border is drawn

• Symbol – select the symbol for the border line arrow. You can also include the IDs of the primary and secondary switchboards, if you prefer.

Place the switchboard border arrow by clicking Ok and selecting the orientation of the symbol.

Switchboard area With the Switchboard Area function you can define area(s) to which you can select the switchboard that is supplying the power. It is possible to select the same switchboard for several areas.

MagiCAD Electrical


For example, if you add a circuit to a switchboard area, the circuit automatically detects the switchboard that is supplying it – that is, it is not required to connect the circuit to the switchboard.

When you click the Switchboard Area toolbar button, the following dialog opens:

• Switchboard – select the supplying switchboard

• Elevation – you can set a specific elevation for the switchboard area. However, this setting affects only the presentation.

Accept your settings with Ok, and start drawing the boundaries of the switchboard area. The area can be of any shape; however, it must be closed. When you have drawn at least two sides, close the area by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Close from the pop-up menu. You can change the size of the area afterwards e.g. with AutoCAD’s STRETCH.

It is possible to set the switchboard ID as the reference text for the switchboard area. The supplying switchboard can be changed afterwards with the Part Properties function.

Combination boxes You can construct different kinds of combination boxes in the Project Management dialog. It is possible to select several products from the project to comprise the combination boxes.

The bill of materials function can calculate the contents of the combination boxes as if they were placed as individual products.

Placing the combination box to the drawing Click the Insert Combination Box toolbar button. The Combination Box dialog opens:

MagiCAD Electrical


• Combination box – list of all combination boxes in the project

• Included devices – list of the devices that are included in the selected combination box. When you select a device, you can change the system of the selected device.

• Elevation – elevation of the symbol

When the settings are suitable, you can place the combination box to the drawing in the same way as any other device.

Extracting the combination box It is possible to “ungroup” the combination box as symbols to the drawing. The ungrouped combination box is a block, and it is placed on the active layer.

Click the Draw Combination Box Symbols toolbar button. The Select Device dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the combination box you want to extract, and click Ok. Set the block to the desired location.

MagiCAD Electrical


Cross-sections

Section marks With this function you can select the section area and draw the section marks.

The text of the section mark can contain up to eight characters (also small caps). It is also possible to define the description text for the section mark.

The cross-section area is defined with three dimensions (Size of section):

• Lower Z – the elevation of the lower surface in relation to the floor origin

• Upper Z – the elevation of the upper surface in relation to the floor origin

• Depth – default depth

In the Section mark dialog it is also possible to select the appearance of the cross-section.

You can select between the conventional section (Section) and the detailed section (Detail).

If you select Section, draw first the crossline and press enter (or click the right mouse button). Next, give the direction for the cross-section.

If you select Detail, define the area by drawing crossline around it, and finally close the area by pressing Enter (or click the right mouse button). In the Detail

MagiCAD Electrical


alternative, the section is made of the area around the boundaries, and it remains in the 3D mode.

If the Define ref.point option is selected, you can set the installation point after drawing the crossline. You can also set the elevation for the installation point in the Z field.

Boundary box is drawn around the cross-section area if the Show section mark boundary option is selected in the Drawing Preferences dialog.

The boundaries can be moved or the depth can be changed by moving the corner grips or using the STRETCH function of AutoCAD.

The properties of the sections can be changed with the Edit Section Mark function.

Making the section After you have defined the cross-section area(s), select the Make Section function and show the boundary of the cross-section area.

Next, select the objects to be included in the cross-section.

AutoCAD objects are handled as entire blocks, that is, they are not exploded

You can also choose if you want to hide the parts automatically, and if you want to show the name of the drawing in the cross-section. Please note that for the time being this applies only to MagiCAD HP&V objects.

Accept your choices with OK. MagiCAD Electrical browses through the objects and makes the cross-section image. You can then place the cross-section image to a suitable location.

Updating the section After you have made the cross-section, you can later update it if the cross-section area is modified. Select the Update Section function and click the boundary of the cross-section image. Select the items you want to update in the cross-section image.

MagiCAD Electrical


Collision Control With this function it is possible to examine the possible collisions between cable trays. It is also possible to check the collisions between other MagiCAD Electrical objects and MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation, AutoCAD, and AEC objects.

Select the collision types in the options dialog (you can open it with the Options command line option). Next define the area for the collision-check. The collision check works in the normal plan view.

Information about the collision is gathered in the Show Messages dialog. With the dialog functions you can place the error ticks to the drawing. Remove the ticks with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

You can define the minimum size for the pipes that are checked. If both pipes are smaller than the minimum size, collision is ignored.

MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation objects and ADT/AEC objects (walls, windows, etc) can be selected also from the reference drawing (Xref and/or AEC objects in the option dialog). Collision check with ADT/AEC objects requires that AutoCAD 2006 or Architectural Desktop is installed.

Show messages With this function you get the list of the collisions that may occur in the collision check.

It is possible to show error ticks at the collision locations. When you click a row in the list and click the Mark Selected Error and Zoom button, the error tick appears at the location where the collision occurs, and the area is zoomed. If you click the Mark All Errors button, all collisions are showed with error ticks. You can remove the error ticks with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

The coordinates in the Pos column are selected between Floor and UCS coordinates. If UCS coordinates are selected, only the coordinates of the active floor are showed.

Other options of this dialog are not applicable in this version of MagiCAD Electrical.

Copying and moving branches You can copy and move entire branches with the Copy Branch and Move Branch functions.

Copy Branch Click the Copy Branch toolbar button. Select the branch you want to copy. The branch is copied, starting from the selected location.

After you have selected the branch, you can use the command line options (or select them from the pop-up menu) to define the Elevation for the branch, or Connect it to another object. You can also place the branch immediately by clicking the suitable location.

MagiCAD Electrical


If you select Elevation, you can choose in a dialog whether to Drag to new position – that is, the branch can be placed anywhere in the drawing – or to Use original xy-position.

Move Branch Click the Move Branch toolbar button. The function is similar to the copying function.

Creating user-defined symbols With the Create User Symbol (2D) function you can create your own 2D symbols. The creating process of these symbols is similar to the user-defined switchboard schematic symbols.

The user-defined symbols are saved in the user symbol database. The user-defined symbols appear in the symbol selection dialogs when USR is selected.

Creating the symbols First, draw the symbol. If you prefer, you can use an existing symbol as a basis for the new symbol.

Click the Create User Symbol (2D) toolbar button. MagiCAD asks you to select the objects you want to include in the symbol. Select the objects and click the right mouse button. Next, show the insertion point of the symbol. The User Symbol dialog opens.

Give the following information in the Block Properties:




• Reset elevations to 0 – If this option is selected, all objects are moved to the zero elevation


Accept your settings with Ok.

MagiCAD Electrical


Part Properties function Click the Part Properties toolbar button, and next click the object which you want to modify/examine. With this function you can

• examine the properties of the objects

• change or give a cable number (for individual cables and cables inside a cable packet) When changing a cable number MagiCAD will try to update it for the whole cable. If for some reason MagiCAD cannot change the cable number, the action will be cancelled. This can happen if a drawing where the cable is installed is not readable/writeable (e.g. when using connection nodes to other drawings that are opened by another user).

• add information to the Object Variable fields of the parts

• replace individual products (e.g. sockets, luminaires, cable trays)

• modify information of the circuits

• modify information of the switchboards

• modify Memo texts and Prompt variables

• connect a single device to a particular circuit (with the Change Properties function you can connect several devices at the same time)

In AutoCAD 2007 and later it is possible to open the Part Properties dialog by double-clicking the object. Alternatively, you can select the object(s) and click the right mouse button. A pop-up dialog opens, and you can select the Part Properties option. If several objects are selected, a selection dialog opens.

Changing properties With the Change Properties function you can change the features of the objects (e.g. you can replace luminaire A with luminaire B; you can change the cable material; you can change the text size; you can assign a switchboard for multiple circuits etc.)

Click the Change Properties toolbar button. The Change Property dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


• Property:

• System type – Electric, data/tele, cable route, texts, general symbols, etc.

• Object type – The type of the objects you want to target the changing function. The object types vary depending on the system type.

• Property – The property whose value you want to change

• Value from – The value to be changed (if an asterisk, any value will be replaced with new). Select the value either by clicking the Show reference part button and showing an object, or selecting the object from the dialog that is opened with the "…" button.

• Value to – The new value. Select the value either by clicking the Show reference part button and showing an object, or selecting the object from the dialog that is opened with the "…" button.

• Range: Select the scope of the changing function:

• Select objects – Click the objects or define a rectangular area. You can also use the Single (selected part), Branch, or System command line options.

• Current drawing

Changing the elevation of the devices With the Change Elevation function you can change the elevation of the devices (luminaires, sockets, etc) in the drawing. If a cable is connected to the device, the cable is stretched as necessary.

MagiCAD Electrical


Click the Change Elevation toolbar button, select the devices whose elevation you want to change, and click the right mouse button. The Device Elevation dialog opens.

Connected cables adjustment – select how the cable will be stretched

• By highest point – the cable is first drawn to the elevation of the luminaire and then is connected

• By lowest point – the cable is first drawn at the elevation of the switch to the luminaire, then the elevation is changed and the cable is connected to the luminaire

Elevation – displays the elevation of the selected devices, and the new elevation can be set

• Highest selected – highest elevation of the selected devices

• Lowest selected – lowest elevation of the selected devices

• New elevation – set the new elevation for the devices

Note: When you select devices, you can utilize the commandline options: [Single part/Branch/sYstem/proDuct/Elevation]

Viewport preferences With the Viewport Preferences function it is possible to set the presentation of the objects in the drawing to the wireframe, 2D, or 3D mode. 3D presentation requires that a 3D object is selected for the device in the project management.

The settings defined in the Viewport Preferences dialog are specific to the viewport. That is, it is possible to display the dimension texts in different orientations and the objects in different presentations in each viewport (also in the layout windows).

When you click the Viewport Preferences toolbar button, the following dialog opens:

MagiCAD Electrical


Main viewport:

• Is main viewport – Here you can set the desired viewport to be the main viewport

• Follow main viewport – If you want to use the settings of the main viewport e.g. for the viewports in the layout, select this option. The viewport in question will then follow the settings of the main viewport.

Presentation options: In this tab you can set the presentation separately for:

• Cable trays – 2D or 3D

• Conduits – 1D or 3D (set the diameter in the Diameter field)

• Cables – 1D or 3D (constant diameter)

• Devices and switchboards – 2D or 3D presentation for the devices. In addition you can choose whether to show the operation areas of the devices and the switchboard areas

Dimension texts: In this tab you can choose which reference texts are displayed in each viewport and how they are displayed

MagiCAD Electrical


Show: Choose the orientation of the drawing in which the texts are displayed in the active viewport:

• All – all texts

• Placed in the current view – only the texts that are set in the active viewport; in addition you can choose other views besides the active view with the “and in the selected views” options

Orientation: Choose the orientation for the texts in the viewport:

• By view – according to the view (that is, the texts are “straight” also in the isometric view

• By original UCS – according to the UCS settings

Defaults:

• Load default preferences – With this function you can load the default settings to the active viewport. The default settings can be saved either to the drawing or the project (the selection is made in Project Project settings)

• Save as drawing defaults / Save as project defaults – With this function you can save the active settings to the drawing or the project (the selection is made in Project Project settings). The values can be loaded in the new viewports with the Load default preferences button.

You can visualize the 3D objects in the 3D mode with AutoCAD's VIEW, SHADE, and other suitable commands.

Text functions There are two toolbar buttons and commands for the texts: placing/editing the texts, and stretching/moving the texts.

The text styles are defined in the Project Management. The values are updated to the drawing with the Update Drawing Data function.

MagiCAD Electrical


Placing texts to the objects Click the Text toolbar button. The Text dialog opens. Select the text style and accept it with Ok.

Place the text (which contains object-specific data) by clicking the object. The text attaches the object. At this stage you can select the location and position for the text. Click the right mouse button, and a pop-up menu with the following options open (you can also select these options at the command prompt):

• Midpoint (m) – places the end of the reference line at the midpoint/line of the object

• Direction (d) – you can freely choose the direction of the text

• Add objects (a) – you can define a common text for several objects

After selecting the suitable option(s), place the text on a suitable location.

The reference text can be changed afterwards with the Change Properties function.

Placing free texts You do not have to attach any object when you place free text.

After you have selected the text style, you can set the elevation for the text before placing it (use the Elevation option). Set the elevation and place text on a suitable location.

Moving and stretching texts You can move/stretch the text by starting the Stretch Text function and selecting the text. Midpoint and Direction options can also be used.

Updating drawing data With this function you can update information of the devices, texts, and layers (for example, change the user code of luminaires).

Click the Update Drawing Data toolbar button. The Update Drawing Data dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the objects you want to update (Object Properties).

Select the range where you want to direct the function (Range). If you choose Select objects, click the objects or selected them by showing a rectangular area. Alternatively you can direct the function to the Current Drawing.

It is also possible to update the colors and linetypes. In that case, select the corresponding option.

If group references have been defined for the devices, you can update the group and switchboard codes also from other drawings than the current drawing when the Update referred codes from other drawings option is selected.

If the Update room information option is selected, the program updates the room IDs to the objects and their reference texts. This option is available only if the drawing is attached to a MagiCAD Room project.

Report functions

With the Reports function you can create various kinds of reports (bills of materials) about MagiCAD Electrical objects. You can, for instance, create a bill of materials about the quantity of luminaires, cable routes (including lengths), etc.

You can define report styles in the Report definitions (Project Management).

Click the Reports toolbar button. The Report Properties dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


Selection set: You can save different kinds of report definitions. You can preselect a BOM report style, drawings, systems, etc, and then save the selection set. The selection set is saved to the project – that is, the saved definitions can be used in all drawings that belong to the same project.

• Save – save the selected settings

• SaveAs – save the selected settings with a different name

• Delete – remove the selected definition

• Rename – rename the definition

Report Model: Select here the report type (e.g. bill of materials / luminaires)

Range: With this option you can choose the scope for the report function

• Select objects – Select the objects you want to include in the report.

• Current drawing – The report includes all objects of the current drawing.

• Selected room – You can select a room whose objects are included in the report (can be used if MAGIROOM application is loaded and rooms are defined)

• All rooms of the current drawing – The report is made from all rooms of the current drawing (can be used if MAGIROOM application is loaded and rooms are defined)

• Selected drawings – Select the drawings whose objects you want to include in the report. If the list does not contain all drawings, the missing drawing is not likely included in the model drawing list. You can add it by clicking the the Add/remove model drawings button.

Options: You can check if there are objects "on top of each other" (ie. too close to each

MagiCAD Electrical


other) if you select the Check duplicate positions option and give the minimum distance of the insertion points (dx, dy, dx).

If Check duplicate positions is selected and there are parts too close to each other, a warning dialog opens, showing the coordinates of the places where this occurs. You can select a location and click the Zoom to Center button; if the duplicate position is in the active drawing, the location is zoomed to the middle of the screen.

If you click the Abort – Mark errors button, all duplicate positions in the active drawings are marked.

If you select Ignore – Continue, the devices are summed to the report despite of their being duplicate. If you have selected several drawings as the scope of the report, the program shows the occurrences of duplicate positions drawing by drawing and finally sums all devices to the report if the function is not canceled.

You can remove the error marks from the drawing with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

Systems: With this option you can choose which system(s) the report includes

• All systems

• Selected system

Accept your choices with Ok.

DIALux interface

With the DIALux Import function you can read the luminaires directly from the file that is created by the DIALux program. You can also utilize the spaces that have been modeled with MagiCAD Room when you work with DIALux.

Working procedure (MagiCAD Room phase is not required):

1) MagiCAD Room Click the DIALux Export toolbar button, and save the file (extension .STF) to a suitable directory. Next, select the space or spaces you want to transfer to DIALux and click the right mouse button. The DIALux Export - Rooms to Export dialog opens containing the spaces to be transferred to DIALux. Transfer the spaces by clicking the Ok – Export button.

MagiCAD Electrical


2) DIALux Start DIALux and open the .STF file you created. Place the luminaires in the rooms. When you have completed working with DIALux, save the drawing as an .STF file (File / Export / Save STF file …)

3) MagiCAD Electrical Place the luminaires defined in DIALux to the drawing with the DIALux Import function. Click the DIALux Import toolbar button and open the .STF file that has been saved with DIALux. The Mapping List dialog opens, containing all luminaires that would be transferred.

System – Here you can select the system for the luminaires.

Installation – Select the installation method of the devices:

• By ucs – Use this option, if you are certain that the space in DIALux and the space in AutoCAD have the same insertion point. For example, this option is recommended if you have imported the space from MagiCAD Room.

• Drag position – When this option is selected, you can select the installation point for the luminaires. Use this option e.g. if you have created the space in DIALux.

Product mapping – connection between the luminaires in DIALux and the luminaires in MagiCAD Electrical project.

• If MagiCAD Electrical project contains the same luminaire as the luminaire that is imported (same ordering no.), the Import checkbox is selected automatically.

• If the project does not contain a similar product, make the connection with the Select product to map with function. Select the luminaire from the list, and click the Select product to map with

MagiCAD Electrical


button. A list will open, containing the luminaires that are included in the project. Select the luminaire and click Ok.

When you have made the settings, place the luminaires by clicking the Ok – Import button.

Clear garbage layer

With this function you can remove the objects from the MAGI_GARBAGE layer (for example, crosses made by the report function).

User preferences With this function you can set the paths for the symbols and product databases. You can also change the size of the search circle with this function.

Start the User Preferences function. The following dialog opens:

Product models: Set the path for the product databases.

2D user symbols: Set the path for the user-defined symbol databases

2D common symbols: Set the path for the common 2D symbol libraries (with MCS file extension), for example, the databases that are included in the program

Blocks: Set the path for the 3D blocks (device symbols)

Search circle: Here you can set the size for MagiCAD cursor (search circle). If the circle is too small, it may be difficult to point to the desired location (for example, end of the cable).

MagiCAD Electrical


Hiding cables, cable packets, and conduits With the Hide Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit function it is possible to hide certain parts of these objects. The objects does not actually break, it remains continuous.

Show two points at the cable/cable packet/conduit to hide the desired part. You can move the hidden part with AutoCAD’s STRETCH.

You can restore the parts with the Reset Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit Hide function. Start the function and click the object close to the hidden part.

Showing cable, cable packet and conduit routes With the Show Cable/Cable Packet/Conduit function it is possible to view the complete route of a cable, cable packet or conduit. MagiCAD draws the route on the MAGI_GARBAGE layer so it can be removed with the Clear Garbage Layer function. By using this show function you can check that MagiCAD has understood the correct route for a cable, cable packet or conduit and that connection nodes work properly if you have used any.

Clip+Rotate, Restore from Clip+Rotate With the help of the Clip+Rotate function you can easily edit the system in the desired side view.

The function first asks you to show the front edge of the selected group of parts and then asks you to show the rear edge. In the basic situation, the selected parts are rotated to the active view so that the viewpoint is from the front.

It is possible to affect the function with the following command line option:

• oBject – the selection is not made using the front and rear edges; instead the program prompts you to show an object (which defines the direction) and the coverage of the selection area in relation to the object.

In the Options window you can make the following settings:

• Viewport – is the rotated image brought to the same view, or does the program ask you to show another available view

• Distances – these settings affect the handling of the selected set of objects. Width defines the width of the area. The Bottom and Top settings do not affect the group of objects, but they define the default elevation that is zoomed to the display.

With the Restore from Clip+Rotate function you can restore the original view. If several views are in use, the restoring function must be used in the view where the side view appears.

Version check (MEVER function) This function does not have a toolbar button. Type MEVER at the command line and press Enter.

MagiCAD shows at the command line the version numbers of the application that is running and the application which saved the current drawing.

MagiCAD Electrical


Cable markings MagiCAD Electrical has two different methods to use descriptive symbols including properties of the selected cable: Intelligent function, which uses the symbol representing cable properties; and the other function, which can be used for placing any symbol.

Intelligent symbols The symbols are set to the cables in the project management (Project Management / Cables).

Click the Cable Markings toolbar button. Next, click the cable where you want to attach the symbol. The symbol is placed to the showed location.

Other symbols (not recommended) This function does not have a toolbar button. To use this function type MEDS at the command prompt and press Enter. The symbol selection dialog opens.

Place the selected symbol by clicking the object.

You can select the following options either in the pop-up menu or at the command prompt:

• Options (o) to select the symbol

• Direction (d) to rotate the symbol to the desired position

Removing the object removes also this symbol.

Revision markings

Revision mark Click the Revision Mark toolbar button. The Revision Mark dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


General:

• Revision variable – Write the marking (variable) for the revision symbol. The variable appears in the layer name if the {RV} variable is used in the Layer definitions (Project Management).

• Style – Text style

• Height – Text height

• Elevation (UCS): – Elevation of the revision mark.

System: Select here the system where the revision symbol is connected (if any).

• None – The revision mark is not connected with any specific system

• Select from reference part – If you choose this option, you can select the system by showing a part of it. In this case, the revision mark is drawn to the layer of the system (the layer name of the revision marks must contain the {SV} variable)

Symbol: Select the symbol for the revision mark.

Accept the settings with Ok. Before you place the symbol, you can change its direction or modify the settings (choose the corresponding option from the pop-up menu).

Revision cloud Click the Revision Cloud toolbar button. The Revision Cloud dialog opens.

MagiCAD Electrical


General:

• Revision variable – Write the marking (variable) for the symbol. The variable appears in the layer name if the {RV} variable is used in the Layer definitions (Project Management).

• Elevation (UCS): – Elevation of the revision cloud.

System: Select here the system where the revision cloud is connected (if any).

• None – The revision mark is not connected with any specific system

• Select from reference part – If you choose this option, you can select the system by showing a part of it. In this case, the revision cloud is drawn to the layer of the system (the layer name of the revision clouds must contain the {SV} variable)

You can define the arc length with the Arc length command line option (show the start point and the endpoint).

Modeling user-defined products Modeling process of the products has been described in a separate manual.

Interoperability with other MagiCAD applications

MagiCAD Heating & Piping and Ventilation With the Part Properties of HP&V objects function you can examine the properties of the objects drawn with MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation.

With the MagiCAD HP&V Viewport Preferences function you can change the settings of the HVAC drawing. The presentation of ducts and pipes can be switched between 1D/2D/3D, insulation visibility can be changed, colors of the ducts and pipes can be changed, etc.

MagiCAD Room If MagiCAD Room is installed, reports can be made from rooms that are defined to the project with MagiCAD Room. (Selected room / All rooms of the current drawing selections in the Report Properties dialog.

MagiCAD Electrical


IFC Export

About IFC IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) is an international standard for defining the product models in the building services. It is a method for sharing and distributing the information between different software applications.

A MagiCAD drawing can be saved in the IFC format and this way transferred e.g. to the CAD application that is used by the architect. The geometrical and technical information of electrical and HVAC objects are transferred with the help of an IFC file.

IFC versions 2x2 final and 2x3 can be used in MagiCAD. The version is selected when starting to create the IFC file.

Creating an IFC file (IFC Export) Start the function with the corresponding button or typing command MEIFO and pressing Enter. The IFC Export dialog opens.

Select the desired option (create or append). Give a name for the new IFC file, or select an existing IFC file.

Next, select the MagiCAD objects you want to include in the IFC file.

Note: if you want to select all MagiCAD Electrical objects, type ALL at the command prompt and press Enter twice.

Schema for new IFC files

MagiCAD Electrical


Select the IFC version.


This option is used to define which kind of storey origin (coordinate system) is used in the IFC file

• MagiCAD Room storey origin – Select this option if you have defined the storey location in MagiCAD Room.

• WCS – World Coordinate System. Select this option if you are not sure about the type of the storey origin.

• UCS – User Coordinate System

Export options

Here you can select which data is written to the IFC file in addition to the geometry and general data.

• Add own properties – Write all information defined in MagiCAD Electrical (P1… P5 variables, O1 … O4 variables, etc).

• Add cables – Write also the cables to the IFC file but without 3D geometry.

• Add protective devices – The circuits are written to the IFC file as protective devices.

• Add cost data – IFC information for the cost calculation are written from all devices (at the moment works with the Norwegian Eldata program by using the property set Pset_ElectricalCostData)

Create new IFC file…

This function creates a new IFC file, which contains the selected MagiCAD Electrical objects. Note: Each storey must be saved to a separate IFC file.

Append to existing IFC file…

With this function you can write MagiCAD Electrical objects to an existing IFC file. An IFC file can be, for example, provided by the architect or created with MagiCAD Room.

If the storey list has been defined to the IFC file (with architectural application or with MagiCAD Room), select the storey where you want to place the objects. If storeys are not defined in the IFC file, each storey must be saved to a separate IFC file.


This option defines which storey origin (coordinate system) is used in the IFC file:

• WCS – World Coordinate System. Select this option if you are unsure about the origin.

• UCS – User Coordinate System (origin of the user coordinate system)

Remove building system parts from file…

With this option you can remove MagiCAD objects (electrical and HVAC objects) from an existing IFC file.

Other IFC exports (IFC Calculation export and IFC Calculation Import) There are also two other IFC export buttons in the MC-E Project/General and MC-E IFC menus: IFC Calculation Export and IFC Calculation Import.

MagiCAD Electrical


• IFC Calculation Export (MEICE)

With this function it is possible to export the whole electrical power system or only the electrical power distribution system to calculation software such as Febdok. After running the command there are two options for export range:

o All circuits This option exports the whole electrical power system with every device connected behind a circuit that is connected to a switchboard.

o Circuits between switchboards This option only exports the switchboards and everything between them This is used when only the distribution system is wanted to be dimensioned.

• IFC Calculation Import (MEICI)

With this function you can import your electrical power system back to MagiCAD from calculation software such as Febdok and update all the cables back to your drawings. Additional information is updated also for protective devices. This is shown in the circuit dialog’s PD Code field.

MagiCAD Electrical


Note: You have to connect everything you want to export with cables and circuits. You can only have one main switchboard so that MagiCAD and the calculation software know what the “starting point” is. This means that there has to be only one switchboard that is not connected to any other switchboard via cable and circuit. If MagiCAD finds several possible main switchboard candidates it gives a message and the export is canceled.

Note: To make calculation software read everything correctly please define the number of used phases for junction boxes and switches also. An incorrect number might be understood wrong by calculation software. This applies to all other devices too. Switchboards are automatically handled as three phase devices.

Note: Circuits that are not connected to a switchboard are not exported. You can see the circuits that fail the export in a message when running the export. Also circuits that are not connected to a switchboard but are in the area of a switchboard will not be exported.

Note: If you don’t define phases for circuits then calculation software might handle them wrong. In such cases some software such as Febdok may read the phases from the previous device that is located upstream so because of the handling of switchboards as three phase devices the circuits without phase information will most likely be handled as three phase circuits.

General things: IFC Schema is 2x3ge. Cable types get their name from cable description. Cable lengths are written for the cables as well as the installation code. Cables have to have exactly the same name in both MagiCAD and in the calculation software to understand the cable types.

Other functions

Drawing cleaning utility With this utility you can change all colors to a desired color in the architectural drawing, and also run AUDIT, RECOVER, and PURGE.

Open the architectural drawing, click the Drawing Cleaning Utility toolbar button in the MC-E Edit II toolbar, select the functions you want to use and the color, and click Ok.

Importing the symbol libraries MagiCAD Electrical contains symbol databases for the following market areas (i.e. symbol series): FIN, SWE, NOR, DEN, and IEC. MagiCAD Electrical contains a command (MESYIMP) for importing the other 2D symbol libraries, which you have possibly made yourself, to the program.

You can import the symbols from one .dwg file or from all .dwg files that belong to a particular symbol series and reside in the selected directory.

NB: This command does not apply to the symbols that you have created with the Create User Symbol function. MagiCAD Electrical converts these symbols automatically to the user symbol database in case the program is upgraded from earlier versions.

This command is not included in the toolbars.

MagiCAD Electrical


Changing the AutoCAD attribute value of a MagiCAD symbol If an AutoCAD attribute value is defined for a MagiCAD symbol, its value can be changed with the MEATTE command.

Explode function of MagiCAD Electrical Sometimes it is necessary to explode MagiCAD objects to AutoCAD blocks. This can be done with the explode function of MagiCAD Electrical.

Start the function by typing command MEEXPLODE at the command prompt.The Explode Options dialog opens.

Warning – after exploding the objects are AutoCAD objects, and they cannot be restored to MagiCAD objects.

Resulting entity type – By default, the objects are exploded as AutoCAD blocks, but they can also be exploded as lines. Select the object types you want to be exploded as lines.

Checking the connections With the MECOS function it is possible to check which devices are connected to a circuit with a cable, and to a switchboard through the circuit.

Type command MECOS at the command prompt. Next, show the circuit or the switchboard. MagiCAD marks the connected devices with a circle. The circles are drawn on MAGI_GARBAGE layer, and they can be removed from the drawing with the Clear Garbage Layer function.

MagiCAD Electrical


Functions that are not recommended

AutoCAD's functions WBLOCK: All connections between the symbols and reference lines will be lost if you move contents from a drawing to another so that you make a WBLOCK and select the Explode option in the Insert dialog.

Attribute definitions in MagiCAD Electrical Tag Description Implemented in these groups SC System code Devices, power groups, switchboards, cables

S1,..,S4 System variables 1 – 4 Devices, power groups, switchboards

PC User code of device Devices

PP Product code of device Devices, cables

PD Product description Devices, cables

P1,..,P5 Product variables 1 – 5 Devices, cables

IC Installation class code Devices, cables

IP IP class code Devices

EX EXE class code Devices

AC Cable code Power groups, cables

GN Power group number Power groups

BC Switchboard code Power groups, switchboards

B2 Secondary switchboard code

Switchboards (used in the border arrows)

DL Length (or depth) Switchboards, devices

DW Width Switchboards, devices

DH Height Switchboards, devices

O1, O2 Object variable 1 - 2 Devices, cables

NC National code Devices, cables

LS Light source Luminaires


MagiCAD Room

MagiCAD Room Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. General 1 About MagiCAD Room.............................................................................................................1 Possibilities of the building database.........................................................................................1

Chapter 2. How to start 2 Principles of using the program; demo projects.........................................................................2 Creating/selecting a project .......................................................................................................3

Selecting an existing building database.......................................................................7 Drawing the rooms ....................................................................................................................8 Installing the origin....................................................................................................................9

Chapter 3. Building - Project data 10 Building - Project.....................................................................................................................10 Storeys .....................................................................................................................................12 3D preview ..............................................................................................................................13 Rooms......................................................................................................................................15 Summary..................................................................................................................................15 Other project data ....................................................................................................................16

Layer and color settings.............................................................................................17

Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room functions 19 List of functions.......................................................................................................................19 Project......................................................................................................................................20 Edit Storey Properties ..............................................................................................................20 User Preferences ......................................................................................................................20 Show Room Objects (Read Storey from Database).................................................................20 Hide (remove) Storey ..............................................................................................................21 Part Properties (and room data) ...............................................................................................21 2D mode / 3D mode.................................................................................................................23 Clear Garbage Layer................................................................................................................23 Edit Storey ...............................................................................................................................23 DIALux Export…....................................................................................................................23

Chapter 5. MagiCAD Room Edit functions 24 List of functions.......................................................................................................................24 Draw wall ................................................................................................................................25 Install window .........................................................................................................................26 Install door...............................................................................................................................27 Install column ..........................................................................................................................27 Install beam..............................................................................................................................29 Define room.............................................................................................................................30 Erase MagiCAD Room object .................................................................................................32 Stretch or move wall ................................................................................................................32 Change wall height ..................................................................................................................33 Set wall joint (break wall)........................................................................................................33 Move door or window .............................................................................................................33

iv • Contents MagiCAD Room

Part properties..........................................................................................................................34 Save, calculate, and update texts..............................................................................................34 Close edit mode .......................................................................................................................35

Chapter 6. Calculations 36 Heat losses ...............................................................................................................................36 Heat loss calculation method ...................................................................................................37

Heat loss through the structures................................................................................. 37 Ventilation................................................................................................................. 37 Leakage .....................................................................................................................37

Calculating floor areas .............................................................................................................38 Calculating the room volume...................................................................................................38

Chapter 7. Data exchange with other software 39 IFC data transfer ......................................................................................................................39 Transferring the output to e.g. Excel .......................................................................................40

Chapter 8. Other information 41 Canceling the changes, AutoCAD’s UNDO............................................................................41 Copying rooms ........................................................................................................................41 MagiCAD Room templates, project file ..................................................................................42 Exceptions ...............................................................................................................................42 User code of the room..............................................................................................................42 Virtual wall ..............................................................................................................................43

Chapter 9. Using MagiCAD Room with other MagiCAD applications 44 Heat losses ...............................................................................................................................44 Bill of materials .......................................................................................................................44 IFC Export ...............................................................................................................................44

MagiCAD Room


Chapter 1. General

About MagiCAD Room MagiCAD Room is a product model based program for handling room data (spatial data).

The room data is common for the entire building design process, including e.g. HVAC and electrical design. For this reason the software is carried out with a database common for all participants.

The participants can have views to the building database and thus access all data that is stored in the building database. It is also possible to reserve a part of it for modifying, and prevent other users from editing the data at the same time. After the changes have been made, the data is stored to the database, and the revised data is again available for other users.

Possibilities of the building database Room-specific bill of materials can be mentioned as one practical example of the usage of the room model. The applications utilizing the model (MagiCAD Heating & Piping and Ventilation, MagiCAD Electrical) can, for instance, create a bill of materials, information grouped room by room.

The building database model also facilitates calculations that are specific to a particular room. The initial data for heat loss calculations and cooling calculations, as well as examining the energy consumption in the building, can be defined.

This program version contains heat loss calculation. Other calculations will be implemented in the future releases.

The building database needs to be defined only once, and it can be utilized for the whole life cycle of the project, from the early stages of the design and construction process to the use and maintenance of the building.

MagiCAD Room



Principles of using the program; demo projects Start the program, and see its demo projects. The demo projects reside in the Demo Projects subdirectory of the program directory. Open, for example, Floor_1.dwg with the File/Open... function of AutoCAD. Then you can examine the project information with the Project function, examine the room-specific information with the Part Properties and Room Data function, etc.

Note that in this mode (view mode) you cannot edit the room geometry. You can only change the input values of the room (e.g. temperatures) and calculate the heat losses. (MagiCAD Room layers are locked.) When you want to draw and edit objects, you must switch the program to the edit mode with the Edit Storey

function. At this stage MagiCAD Room asks whether the information of the storey is read from the building database.

In most cases, the information is read from the database (that is, Yes is selected). However, if the data is not yet in the database for some reason (for example, the rooms have been copied and pasted from another storey), No is selected. In the latter case, the program switches to the edit mode without updating the drawing with the data in the building database.

The main principle is that all drawing and editing is performed in the edit mode using the functions of the MagiCAD Room Edit toolbar.

All drawing and editing functions of AutoCAD (ERASE, COPY, UNDO, etc) can also be used, but e.g. the Stretch or Move Wall function of MagiCAD Room is made particularly for the wall objects of MagiCAD Room.

When the program is in the edit mode, the changes are made to the drawing instead of the database, and for this reason e.g. the heat loss calculation

MagiCAD Room


performed in the Part Properties and Room data function does not work in the same way as in the view mode. When it is intended to save the data and perform the calculation after (or during) editing, the Save, calculate, and update texts function shall be used. When this function has been used, the data is updated to the building database, and the entire project (all storeys) have been calculated, taking also the possible heat transfer between storeys into account. It is also possible to examine the heat losses of individual rooms with the Part Properties and Room Data function.

When the edit mode is closed, MagiCAD Room asks whether the changes will be saved to the building database.

If you answer No, MagiCAD Room reads the information from the database and restores the drawing unless you have used the saving function.

If you want to restore the data in the edit mode, you can use AutoCAD’s UNDO function and save, or close the edit mode without saving.

Creating/selecting a project First, create and save a new drawing or open an existing drawing you want to include in the project. The existing drawing can be, for example, a drawing created with MagiCAD Heating&Piping, Ventilation, or Electrical.

If you use an existing drawing that already has the storey information defined (MagiCAD Electrical), you can view the information with the Edit Storey Properties function. If the information has not been defined, they can be input at this stage.

The Storey Properties dialog opens:

MagiCAD Room


Storey origin in dwg – Here you can define the location of the storey origin (bottom-left corner). You can also set the rotation angle for the building.

You can also use the Show origin button to set the location and rotation angle. The location of the bottom-left corner of the storey (i.e. storey origin) and the direction of the positive x-axis are set with this function. Start the function, show the location of the corner and then show the direction of the x-axis.

In many cases the best solution is to set the corner point of the storey to the bottom-left corner of the building. However, it can be set to another location. Sometimes a guideline can be drawn from a fixed location of the building (e.g. elevator shaft) and the origin is set to the end of the guideline.

The best method to set to place the corner point is to zoom the view (zoom window) to the corner of the building and use the Snap Intersection function of AutoCAD. Press down the Ctrl key and click the right mouse button to find the function. Click the corner of the building and show the direction of the x-axis (usually to the right). To make sure that the direction of the x-axis is vertical, check that ORTHO is on (F8).

Storey origin defines an adjustment point for saving the storey information (x, y, and z coordinates, rotation angle) to the database. This information can be changed afterwards, for example, if it is necessary to move the storey in x,y-direction.

Building – If the storey list of the building is already modeled with MagiCAD Electrical, here you can attach the drawing to the building database (project).

• Building database – Attach the drawing to the building database with the Select button. The building database can be modified with the Edit button. With the None button you can detach the drawing from the building database.

• Storey – When you have selected the building database, select the storey which the active drawing represents.

MagiCAD Room


If the building and the storey list does not exist yet, start defining it with the Select... button.

The Available projects list shows the building databases that exist in the directory or in the path towards the root directory. If there are no building databases in the path, the list window is empty.

If you select a building database from the list and click the Select button, the selected building database is taken into use.

If you want to create a new building databases, click the New... button.

If you want to cancel this function, click Cancel.

Storey origin in building – If you intend to attach the drawing to a building (which is the case when MagiCAD Room is used), it is not necessary to give this information.

Creating a new building database Click New... in the Select Building Databases dialog. The New Building Database dialog opens.

Give the name for the database, and select the directory where you want to save the project (Location).

Select the template database. The templates are saved in the Template subdirectory of the MagiCAD Room program directory.

A template database is a building database containing only the basic project information, not any room data. You can select a database supplied with the

MagiCAD Room


program (or a database modified from it), or use any of your existing databases as the template.

Accept your choices with OK. The Storey Properties dialog opens again.

Storey: - Select the storey, which the active drawing represents, with the Select function.

If you want to detach the drawing from the building database, click the None button.

With the Edit…function you can open the project dialog, in which you can manage the information that covers the entire project (i.e. building). Here you can manage all storeys of the building.

MagiCAD Room


The left pane shows a tree of the types of data that is defined for the project. When you click a tree item, the more detailed view of the contents appears in the right pane.

The data types are described later in this manual.

In the Storey pane you can add/remove/copy storeys (New storey, Delete storey, Copy Storey).

Selecting an existing building database Select the building database from the list of available databases and click Select. Continue as described in the previous chapter.

MagiCAD Room


Drawing the rooms All modifications to the rooms’ geometry are made in the edit mode.

Click the Edit Storey button to switch the edit mode on. The following dialog opens.

In most cases, the information is read from the database (that is, Yes is selected). However, if the data is not yet in the database for some reason, No is selected. In the latter case, the program switches to the edit mode without updating the drawing with the data in the building database.

When the edit mode is on, the MagiCAD Room Edit toolbar appears.

Draw the walls and place the doors and windows. You can also define new structures in the project.

Define and place the room data for each room with the Define Room function. The room data definition appears as a text label in the drawing

When you have done your modifications, click the Close Edit Mode button.If the objects have been changed, you can at this stage decide whether they will be saved to the building database. You can save the objects in the database any time with the Save function.

The contents of the text label can be defined with the same function that is used for reading the information from the database, that is, Read Storey from the Database.

MagiCAD Room


Installing the origin When a storey is created, its corner point is given in the storey dimensions dialog as the (x,y,z) coordinates (e.g. 0,0,0) and the possible rotation angle. With the help of this information, the storeys (drawings) are placed adjacently and/or on top of each other, that is, the locations of the storeys in relation to each other are defined in the project data.

If the storeys are on top of each other, their (x,y) values are the same, and the z value is defined according to the storey height, for instance, (0,0,0)/ (0,0,3000)/(0,0,6000) – assuming that the origins in the storeys (i.e. drawings) are all placed to the same reference point, for example, the lower left corner of the building. The exact storey height does not have a meaning elsewhere than in the 3D preview, as long as the storeys are not inside each other (that is, they must have different z values). However, the heights of the walls are significant e.g. in heat loss calculations.

The origin must be placed for the drawing, either by typing the coordinates at the command prompt or by showing it with the mouse, before starting drawing the room objects. The z value of the origin is selected to be the same as the 2D architectural drawing, because then it is placed right below the storey drawn with MagiCAD Room. Otherwise this value has no meaning e.g. from the calculations’ point of view.

In the view mode it is possible to move the origin to the desired place, for instance, to align it according to a particular spot in the architectural drawing. When the origin is moved, the entire storey is moved correspondingly.

The (x,y) change of the origin made in the edit mode affects the location of the storey in the building database. If, for example, the storeys that are on top of each other are not correctly located in relation to each other, the same reference point must be selected for each storey to place the origin, and the storey must be saved. The locations of the storeys can be checked with the 3D preview function in the project data.

With the help of the corner points of the storeys, which are given in the project data, the storeys can be moved when necessary. If, for example, invalid values have been defined for the corner points (x,y,z, and the possible rotation angle) in the beginning, the values can be changed and the result can be checked with the 3D preview function. If you intend to adjust the storeys that are on top of each other to the right locations, do this as described earlier; replace the origins in the edit mode and save the storey.

MagiCAD Room

10 • Chapter 3. Building - Project data

Chapter 3. Building - Project data

Building - Project This view applies to the entire building.

Double-click the right pane to edit the general project information. The Project Description dialog opens.

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 3. Building - Project data • 11

• Automatic calculations – select this option if you want the calculations

be updated automatically

• Outside temperature – this temperature is used in the heat loss calculations.

• Slabs – select this option if you want to create horizontal surfaces (slabs) automatically.

• Roof slab – this structure is used as the default roof slab. Background temperature, usually the outside temperature, is used in the heat loss calculations. For each room it is possible to define an exceptional roof slab with different background temperature.

• Floor slab – this structure is used as the default floor slab. Background temperature, e.g. the temperature of the ground, is used in the heat loss calculations. For each room it is possible to define an exceptional floor slab with different background temperature.

• Intermediate slab – this structure is used as the default “floor” between different storeys. For each room it is possible to define an exceptional slab.

MagiCAD Room


Storeys It is possible to define storeys to the project as many as possible. The rooms modeled in the same AutoCAD drawing form an entity that is saved in the building database as a storey.

The locations of the storeys in relation to each other are defined in the project data. The storeys can be adjacent or on top of each other. When the storeys are on top of each other, MagiCAD Room assumes that the structure between the storeys is an intermediate floor, and calculates the heat transfer between the storeys.

Storey-related functions:

• New storey – creates a new storey

• Delete storey – deletes the selected storey and all its information

• Copy storey – copies the selected storey and asks the name and location of the new storey.

When you select the storey from the list and double-click the right pane, the following dialog opens:

In this dialog you can define the Name, Position (x,y,z) and the possible Rotation angle of the storey for the project database.

It is possible to define a default height for the room (Default height [mm]). This default height is used with all new rooms that are defined in the building.

MagiCAD Room


The default height is also transferred to MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation when the building information is read from the building database (.mrd file).

Renumbering the rooms It is possible to renumber the rooms when the storey is copied. Replace the characters that you want to remain unchanged in the room number (=User code) with a question mark (?).

If some room number does not match the format, it is asked separately.

Renumbering can also be done separately. Select the rooms to edit, click the right mouse button, and select menu option Change value in the column on the room number column.

3D preview With the 3D preview function of the project dialog you can examine all storeys in the same view and, for example, check that the storeys are located correctly in relation to each other (applies only to the storeys that are on top of each other).

You can rotate the image of the building (press left mouse button down), and examine each part of it by selecting the item from the project tree.

MagiCAD Room


MagiCAD Room


Rooms This view shows a list of rooms that have been defined to the storey. The location of the active room in the storey is showed with red lines.

Double-click the room to review/edit its data. NOTE ! The possible problems in the area calculation of complicated spaces are displayed in the Note-column.

With the Heat loss analysis function you can calculate the heat losses of the room.

Please note that MagiCAD Room calculates the entire project (all storeys and all rooms), which means that heat transfer with the rooms in upper/lower storeys may appear in the list of heat losses.

Summary This view shows the summary of the calculations that have been performed in the project.

MagiCAD Room


Area and volume contains e.g. net areas and volumes.

Airflows contains the supply and exhaust airflows.

Structures contains the gross heat transfer through the structures. Because internal heat transfer may occur in the building (depending on the inner temperatures), the summary should not be interpreted as the total heat loss at the outer surface, however, it describes well the share of each structure in the heat losses.

Ventilation contains the heating demand in the rooms, caused by supply air, exhaust air, and leak. It does not contain the heating power that is needed at the air handling unit.

Total heat losses contains the total heat loss of the rooms at each storey. It does not contain the heating power that is needed at the air handling unit.

Other project data

Area methods view shows a list of the criteria how the floor areas are calculated.

MagiCAD Room


Double-click the right pane to modify the criteria.

Walls view shows a list of the wall structures that have been defined for the project.

To add, remove, or modify a wall definition, click the right mouse button. The Add/Delete/Properties popup menu opens. To modify a wall definition you can either double-click the wall on the right pane, or select Properties from the popup menu. If you add or modify a wall, the Wall dialog opens.

Windows view shows a list of the window elements that have been defined for the project. If the dimensions are not given, they will be defined during installation. The installation height is the default elevation for the lower edge of the window.

Doors view shows a list of the door elements that have been defined for the project. Default installation height is the default elevation for the lower edge of the door.

Slabs view shows a list of the roof and floor slabs that have been defined for the project.

Layer and color settings This is the place where MagiCAD Room layer and color settings are defined.

MagiCAD Room



Layer definitions

• Name– name of the layer

• Color – color of the object. This color setting is the default color, which will be created when the object is created to the drawing. These values can be changed also from AutoCAD’s layer management.

2D and 3D presentation

• Color – color of the object, ByLayer selections is available. If ByLayer is selected, the color is defined according to the settings of the Layer definitions.

Colors will be updated automatically when exiting from the Project dialog. The colors are also updated when using Show Room Objects or 2D/3D functions.

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room functions • 19

Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room functions

List of functions This toolbar is a standard AutoCAD toolbar, and it is always present when MagiCAD Room menu is loaded and set to be visible.

Project

Edit Storey Properties

User Preferences

Show Room Objects (read storey from the database)

Hide Room Objects (hide storey)

Part Properties and Room Data

2D mode

3D mode

Clear Garbage Layer

Edit Storey

DIALux Export…

Drawing Cleaning Utility

Help

MagiCAD Room

20 • Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room functions

Project This section contains functions to create/select the building database, to define general properties and initial values for the project, storeys, structures, etc, and to view the heat loss analysis of the rooms. These functions are described earlier in this manual in chapter “Project data”.

Edit Storey Properties This function is used for defining the storey properties, that is, the location of the storey origin and which building database the storey is included.

This information is common with MagiCAD Electrical and later also with MagiCAD Heating&Piping and Ventilation.

User Preferences This function contains setting the size of the search circle. The search circle is active, for instance, when drawing the wall the Connect option is on.

You can set the size of the search circle between 1 and 100 pixels. Type the size to the Circle size (pixels) field.

Show Room Objects (Read Storey from Database) This function is used to define the room information that is displayed in the drawing (text label of the room), and to read the storey from the building database.

MagiCAD Room


If the program is in the edit mode, this function does not read the information from the building database, thus it can be used only for defining the data that is displayed in the drawing.

Hide (remove) Storey This function removes the storey information from the drawing. This function is not available in the edit mode.

Part Properties (and room data) This function is used for examining and changing the properties of the selected object: wall, window, door, or room.

The information of the walls, windows, and doors can always be examined, but the information can be changed only in the edit mode (Change function is activated only in the edit mode ).

MagiCAD Room

22 • Chapter 4. MagiCAD Room functions

When you want to examine or change the room data, click the text label of the room.

In the room data you can also define the information of the roof slab and floor slab to be different from the information defined in the project data.

Heat loss calculation is performed with the Heat loss analysis function. The list shows the heat loss of each structure and the selected structure (wall, window, or door) appears in different color in the wireframe presentation.

MagiCAD Room


2D mode / 3D mode This function switches MagiCAD Room objects between 2D and 3D modes.

Clear Garbage Layer This function clears MAGI_GARBAGE layer, which contains information of temporary nature. Error ticks appear on this layer.

Edit Storey This function activates the edit mode and invokes the MagiCAD Room Edit toolbar. When you start this function, the following dialog opens.

In most cases, the information is read from the database (that is, Yes is selected). However, if the data is not yet in the database for some reason (for example, the rooms have been copied and pasted from another storey), No is selected. In the latter case, the program switches to the edit mode without updating the drawing with the data in the building database.

DIALux Export… The DIALux Export… function transfers the selected rooms to the DIALux program (with the help of a *.STF file). The inner boundaries of the rooms in the storey coordinate system are written to the transfer file. The transfer file is read by the DIALux program. DIALux project including the rooms is automatically created in the DIALux program.

MagiCAD Room

24 • Chapter 5. MagiCAD Room Edit functions

Chapter 5. MagiCAD Room Edit functions

List of functions This toolbar is visible when the edit mode is on.

Draw Wall

Install Window

Install Door

Install Column

Install Beam

Define Room

Erase MagiCAD Room Object

Stretch or move Wall

Change wall height…

Set Wall Joint (break wall)

Move Door or Window

Save, Calculate, and Update Texts

Close Edit Mode

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 5. MagiCAD Room Edit functions • 25

Draw wall When you use the function for the first time, the Wall Options dialog opens.

First, select the wall group:

• Exterior – exterior walls

• Interior – interior walls

• Structural – load-bearing interior walls

• Virtual – not an actual wall structure; used for dividing a space into several room areas and to connect together rooms that are inside each other

Next, give the Height for the wall.

If the thickness of the wall is defined in the project data, the Thickness field is disabled and its value cannot be changed.

When needed, select also the alignment for wall drawing, that is, which edge or alternatively centerline follows the cursor.

Commandline options The wall drawing function has the following commandline options. To select a commandline option, type its hotkey on the commandline or click the right mouse button and select the item from the popup menu.

• Connect / noConnect (c) – When Connect is on, the search circle is visible and drawing must be started from an existing wall (by default connect is on). When you want to start drawing from an empty space, select noConnect. It is also possible to create rooms without wall connections. In this case, the connecting walls must be at a distance less than 100mm from each other. This makes it possible to create rooms e.g. by copying walls with AutoCAD’s COPY function.

MagiCAD Room


• Options (o) – This option opens the Wall Options dialog, in which you can change the wall definitions.

• Back (b) – Returns to the previous point, when drawing the wall.

Install window When you use the function for the first time, the Window Options dialog opens.

First, select the window type.

Next, give the dimensions and installation height (elevation) for the window. The enabled selections and fields (that is, what dimensions can be given) depend on which dimensions are predefined in the project data.

• Maximum width – height and elevation are given in the dialog, the width is maximum that fits in the place

• Maximum height – width is given in the dialog, the height is maximum that fits in the place

• Maximum width and height – the window is as large as fits in the place

• Define width during installation – height and elevation are given in the dialog, the width is defined by showing two points on the wall

• Define dimensions – dimensions and elevation are given in the dialog

MagiCAD Room


It is also possible to select the installation method, that is, choose whether to install one or several windows at the time.

• Show installation point – one window is placed with one click.

• Serial installation – several similar windows are installed in a row. Give the number of windows and the gap between the windows.

Commandline options The drawing function has the following commandline options:

• Options (o) – This option opens the Window Options dialog, in which you can change the window drawing definitions.

Install door When you use the function for the first time, the Door Options dialog opens.

First, select the door type. The types are defined in the project data..

Next, give the dimensions and installation height (elevation) for the door. The enabled fields (that is, what dimensions can be given) depend on which dimensions are predefined in the project data.

Select the opening direction of the door and show the location on the wall.

Install column When you use the function for the first time, the Column Options dialog opens.

MagiCAD Room


Select the shape and give the dimensions for the horizontal column. Length[mm] represents the height of the column.

Accept your choices with Ok and click the location where you want to place the column. The Elevation dialog opens.

You can give the elevations by typing them in the dialog fields. When you change the value of one field, the values are updated according to the height of the column.

Alternatively, you can define the elevation for the column according to another MagiCAD Room object; in this case, select one of the Top/Center/Bottom of … options and show the reference object in the drawing. When you have showed the object, the program returns to the Elevation dialog.

Accept the elevation with Ok. The column is placed in the drawing.

Commandline options The drawing function has the following commandline options:

• Direction (d) – With this option it is possible to rotate the (rectangular) column to the suitable angle.

• Options (o) – This option opens the Column Options dialog, in which you can change the column drawing definitions.

To select a commandline option, type its hotkey (represented in parentheses in the list) or click the right mouse button and select the item from the popup menu.

MagiCAD Room


Install beam When you use the function for the first time, the Beam Options dialog opens.

Give the dimensions for the beams and accept them with Ok. Place the beam in the drawing. The elevation for the beam is defined and the commandline options are used in the same way as with the columns.

MagiCAD Room


Define room The room is defined inside an area that is limited with walls. Select the Define Room function, show the space, and give the input values.

Room

• The User code (room number or similar unique value) must always be given for the room.

• Note – This field can contain e.g. information related to the usage and loads of the building to be shared with other design disciplines.

• Room height [mm] – used for calculating the volumes, and in IFC data transfer.

• Area and volume – MagiCAD Room calculates the area and volume according to the calculation criteria defined in the project data. The areas and volumes that are used in heat loss calculations are always defined according to the centerlines of the structures.

Ventilation

• By manual values – if this is selected, the airflows can be set manually

o Supply airflow [l/s]

o Extract airflow [l/s]

MagiCAD Room


• Primary flow for automatic values – Select the primary airflow, if you are going to give the airflow according to area, or how many times per hour

o Supply

o Extract

• By area – here you can define airflow by area

• By times per hour – here you can define how many times per hour the air should be changed

• Extract airflow by percent of supply <> Supply airflow by percent of extract – here you can set how many percent is the airflow compared to primary airflow

• Leak factor [1/h] – the leakage air describes the uncontrollable air transfer through the structures. The leakage air is calculated according to the room volume (per hour; the value is usually 0.1 … 0.2).

Temperatures

• Temperature set point for heating [°C] – the desired indoor temperature of the room

• Supply airflow [l/s]

• Supply air temperature [°C]

• Extract airflow [l/s]

• Transfer air temperature [°C]

• Tansfer air temperature = outside temperature – select this option if the transfer air is outside air. Transfer airflow = extract airflow – supply airflow.

• Leak factor [1/h] – the leakage air describes the uncontrollable air transfer through the structures. The leakage air is calculated according to the room volume (per hour; the value is usually 0.1 … 0.2).

Slab exceptions

The default values (type, background temperature) for roof slab, floor slab, and intermediate floor have been defined in the project data. When needed, you can define the exceptions for the roof and floor slabs.

• Roof slab – the type of the roof slab

• Area coverage from room area [%] – the percentage of the exception area

• Use outside temperature – select this option if the backgound temperature is the outdoor temperature, which is given in the project data.

• Temperature [°C] – here you can set the temperature that is used when the heat loss is calculated

• Floor slab – the type of the floor slab

• Area coverage from room area [%] – the percentage of the exception area

• Temperature [°C] – here you can set the temperature that is used when the heat loss is calculated

When the rooms are defined, their data is in the drawing but not yet in the database. Update the storey information to the database with the Save, Calculate

MagiCAD Room


and Update texts function if you want to calculate and examine the heat losses during editing.

• Total heat loss [W] – the total heat loss of the room

• Manual value – if this option is selected, you can define a constant heat loss for the room. This value overrides the calculated heat loss.

• Heat loss analysis – this function calculates the room’s heat losses

You can edit room data afterwards with the Part Properties function.

When the storey is in the edit mode and the Room dialog is closed with OK after making the changes – or if the storey information is otherwise modified – the Heat loss analysis function of the Room dialog is disabled until the storey information is saved in the database.

When the room data is changed with the Part Properties function in the view mode (that is, when edit mode is switched off), the storey is saved and calculations are performed automatically. In the view mode it is also possible to change the room data in the project dialog.

Heat loss calculation is described in chapter Calculations / Heat losses.

Note! Room values can also be set in the Project Management dialog. With Shift and Ctrl buttons, several rooms can be edited at the same time.

Erase MagiCAD Room object Click the MagiCAD Room object you want to erase. You can erase objects one by one until you stop the function with Enter or Cancel.

MagiCAD Room objects, e.g. several rooms at a time, can also be removed with AutoCAD’s ERASE function, but in this case the entire wall is removed and doors or windows cannot be removed separately.

If you want to remove only a part of the wall, first divide the part using the Set Wall Joint (break wall) function.

Stretch or move wall With this function you can stretch or move wall objects.

Click the Stretch or Move Wall toolbar button and select the wall. To stretch the wall, grip to the end point of the wall and stretch it to the suitable length.

To move the wall, grip to the wall, and connecting walls and installed objects stretch/move correspondingly.

Moving function does not move the borderline of the wall. It is placed correctly when the storey has been analyzed and saved with the Save, Calculate, and Update Texts function.

MagiCAD Room


If you want to cancel the changes made with the stretch/move function, use AutoCAD’s UNDO function.

Change wall height With this function you can change wall height..

Click the Change Wall Height toolbar button and select the walls. The program shows the highest and lowest value of the wall heights. Give the new height of the selected walls in the New height [mm] field.

Set wall joint (break wall) With this function you can divide a wall into several parts to make it possible to define different properties for different parts of the wall.

Change the properties (wall type, dimensions, exception) with the Part Properties function.

Move door or window Select the door or window and show the new position for it.

MagiCAD Room


Part properties When the program is in the edit mode, information of the objects can be changed with the Part Properties / Change function. Click the wall, door, or window, and select Change in the Properties dialog.

Save, calculate, and update texts This function checks the room definitions, performs heat loss calculation, saves the room data, and updates the text labels of the rooms if they contain updated data (e.g. calculated heat loss).

The saving function checks the walls that are bounding the rooms, and draws the borderlines on the centerlines of the walls. If the borderline is not created, the boundaries of the room are not properly defined.

The saving function gives a warning if there are several rooms with the same use code or if the room does not have a user code.

MagiCAD Room


You can locate the rooms by selecting a warning from the list and clicking Zoom center. The location of the warning, marked with a tick, appears on the center of the screen. Use the Clear Garbage Layer function to remove the ticks from the screen.

If you want to save the storey despite the warnings, click Ignore – save anyway.

If the Show errors after saving option is selected, the program places the ticks to all rooms where this error occurs.

Close edit mode This function closes the edit mode. If MagiCAD Room objects have been changed since the last save, the program gives the following message:

Click Yes to update the building database.

Click No if you do not want to save the changes. The storey is restored to the situation of the most recent saving.

Click Cancel if you want to cancel the function.

MagiCAD Room

36 • Chapter 6. Calculations

Chapter 6. Calculations

Heat losses When you click the Heat loss analysis … button in the Room dialog, the Heat Loss dialog opens.

The list shows only the structures where heat transfer occurs (that is, there is a temperature difference over the stucture).

• Type – the type of the structure

• User code – the identifier of the structure

• Area [m2]

• U [W/m2K]

• dT [°C] – temperature difference

• Q[W] – heat loss

• Note – notification

o The User code of the room which is behind the structure (adjacent rooms, or rooms above/below).

o Exception, if an exceptional area and background temperature have been defined

• Structural heat loss [W] – total heat loss through the structures

• Supply air heat loss [W] – effect required to warm the supply air to the indoor temperature

• Exhaust/transfer air heat loss [W] – effect required to heat the exhaust/transfer air to the indoor temperature

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 6. Calculations • 37

• Leak heat loss [W] – effect required to heat the leakage air

• Total heat loss [W] – total effect required for heating

Note: If the building contains several storeys on top of each other, the program automatically checks whether there are rooms with different indoor temperature above/below the active room.

Room picture

This window pane shows the shape of the active room. When you select a structure from the Heat loss analysis pane, the structure is presented with a red line.

Heat loss calculation method

Heat loss through the structures The heat loss is calculated with the following formula:

Øtransmission = Σ (U * A * (T1 – T2))

T1 = inside temperature of the room (temperature set point for heating ) T2 = temperature behind the structure; another room in the same or different storey, outdoor air, temperature of the ground, or temperature defined for the exception structure.

Ventilation This calculation handles the effect that is needed to heat the supply air and transfer air to the room temperature.

The effect required to heat the supply air and transfer air is calculated with the following formula:

Øvent = 1,2 * qv * (T1 – T3)

qv = supply airflow or transfer airflow [l/s] T1 = inside temperature of the room T2 = air temperature Transfer airflow is the remainder of supply airflow and exhaust airflow. The above formula does not consider the heating of the air from outdoor temperature to supply air temperature. MagiCAD Room does not calculate the Air Handling Units.

Leakage The effect required to heat the leakage air (additional airflow) is calculated with the following formula:

Øleakage = 1,2 * (nleakage * V/3600) * (T1 – T4)

nleakage = leak factor [1/h] V = volume of the room [m3] T1 = inside temperature of the room T4 = outside temperature

MagiCAD Room

38 • Chapter 6. Calculations

Calculating floor areas You can define how the program calculates the areas of the floors. The definitions are made in the Area methods part of the project dialog.

Select the Project function, choose Area methods, and click the list with the right mouse button. The following dialog opens.

Exterior wall:

The area is calculated from the exterior walls using one of the following options: Inner surface, Centerline, Outer surface

Interior wall:

The area is calculated from the interior walls using one of the following options: Inner surface, Centerline, Outer surface

Structural wall:

The area is calculated from the structural walls using one of the following options: Inner surface,Centerlin,Outer surface

If the Subtract the column area option is selected, the areas of the columns are excluded when the areas are calculated.

Note: The heat loss calculation always uses the midpoints of the walls when calculating the floor area.

Calculating the room volume The room volume is calculated according to the same criteria as the floor area. Beams and columns that reside in the room are subtracted from the volume.

Note: The heating demand calculation uses the midpoints of the walls when calculating the room volume.

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 7. Data exchange with other software • 39

Chapter 7. Data exchange with other software

IFC data transfer IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) is an international standard for defining the product models in the building services. It is a method for sharing and distributing the information between different software applications.

IFC data transfer in MagiCAD Room is divided into three functions: IFC export, IFC import, and “IFC Space Update” import. The functions are centralized in the project management dialog.

For IFC export, the structures in MagiCAD Room have been complemented with horizontal surfaces, i.e. floor slabs and roof slabs (ifcSlab).

After IFC functions the program creates a report containing the number of transferred objects and the success of transferring.

IFC Export This function exports all storeys and structures from MagiCAD Room to an IFC file. The structures to export consist of floor slabs, roof slabs, beams, columns, walls, and the doors and windows that are attached to the walls. Besides the structures, the spatial definitions (ifcSpace) and spatial data is exported to the file. The spaces to export are defined according to the inner surfaces of the walls that outline the space in MagiCAD Room. The height of the space is the room height given by the user.

A floor is automatically generated to the space. Roof slabs are generated to the spaces that are not outlined with upper storeys (typically the rooms in the top storey).

The data that is attached to the spaces consists of name, identifier, supply and exhaust airflows, heat loss, and room temperature in the heating situation. In addition, the room temperature and cooling demand*) in the cooling situation are also attached to the spaces.

*) By default, these values are zero, because MagiCAD Room does not calculate cooling demands. However, these values can be set by the IFC Import or IFC Space Update function, if they have been calculated with external calculation software.

MagiCAD Room

40 • Chapter 7. Data exchange with other software

IFC Space Update This function is used to read to the MagiCAD Room spaces the data of the corresponding IFC spaces (ifcSpace). The rooms and IFC spaces are connected with the GUID. The imported data consists of name, identifier, supply and exhaust airflows, heat loss, cooling demand*) and the room temperatures in the heating and cooling situations.

IFC Space Update function switches off the automatic calculations and generation of the horizontal surfaces (slabs).

*) The value of the cooling demand [W] can be displayed with the help of the room property text.

IFC Import This function imports the storeys and rooms (ifcSpace) and the spatial data. The imported data consists of the same type of information that is exported with the IFC Export function.

IFC Import function switches off the automatic calculations and generation of the horizontal surfaces (slabs).

Structures are not imported.

Transferring the output to e.g. Excel The results appearing in the project information can be transferred e.g. to Excel through the clipboard.

Select one or more rooms in the room data of the project (hold the Ctrl button down and select the rooms with the mouse or arrow buttons) and click the right mouse button. Select the Copy calculations to clipboard function from the popup menu.

The summary information can be copied to the clipboard in the same way. Select e.g. Summary/Structures, click the right mouse button, and select the Copy calculations to clipboard function from the popup menu. Please note that all summary information is copied to the clipboard at the same time, regardless of which summary information you have selected.

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 8. Other information • 41

Chapter 8. Other information

Canceling the changes, AutoCAD’s UNDO With AutoCAD’s UNDO function you can cancel the changes you have made to the drawing.

If you have saved the storey to the database and want to cancel your changes, you can use AutoCAD’s UNDO and save the storey again. If you have closed the edit mode, switch to the edit mode again, restore the desired situation, and save the storey.

Copying rooms For copying the rooms you can use AutoCAD’s COPY and MIRROR commands or copy/paste functions. If you copy rooms to a different storey (i.e. to a different drawing), close the edit mode after copying, select the other drawing active, switch to the edit mode, and paste.

Note: Do not copy rooms from a project to another. The project data can be defined in different ways in different projects, which means that the structures in the drawing cannot get the data from the project.

MagiCAD Room

42 • Chapter 8. Other information

MagiCAD Room templates, project file MagiCAD Room template means the basic project information, which can be used as a basis when creating a new project (wall structures, windows, doors…). In other words, a template is a project file without any room definitions.

When you have create one or several template files, you can save them e.g. to the Template subdirectory of the program directory.

Note: When you edit the project data of the active project, do not remove structures that have been used in any drawing of the project.

Exceptions With the exception information it is possible to set the background temperatures of the walls and intermediate floors to be different from the temperatures that are defined in the project data.

When the exception information is given for a wall, it should be given only for the walls that are against the outdoor temperature. To avoid confusion, always draw the exterior walls using the Exterior wall type.

If you want to define an exception only to a certain part of the wall, first divide the wall using the Set Wall Joint (break wall) function.

User code of the room User code should always be given for a space (room), because a room without the user code does not appear in the building database.

If there is a space without the user code behind the wall (or base floor or roof), MagiCAD Room suggests the temperature of it as the outdoor temperature.

MagiCAD Room

Chapter 8. Other information • 43

Virtual wall Virtual wall should be used when the walls of the spaces do not form a closed space but the spaces are intended to be defined as different rooms.

With virtual walls it is also possible to define several “rooms” with different data in the same space. The program does not handle the virtual walls in the calculations.

MagiCAD Room

44 • Chapter 9. Using MagiCAD Room with other MagiCAD applications

Chapter 9. Using MagiCAD Room with other MagiCAD applications

Heat losses You can examine, and if necessary, modify the room data (e.g. indoor temperature, airflows) and calculate the heat losses for individual rooms an the entire building.

Bill of materials When the MagiCAD HP/V/E drawing is attached to a MagiCAD Room project, the location (room) can be listed in the bill of materials.

When MagiCAD Room is installed on the workstation, the BOM function loads the necessary program modules automatically.

IFC Export MagiCAD Heating&Piping, Ventilation, and Electrical contain the IFC Export function to transfer HVAC and electrical objects to an IFC file.


MagiCAD Product Modeller

MagiCAD Product Modeller Contents • iii

Contents

Chapter 1. General 5 About MagiCAD Product Modeller........................................................................................... 5

Chapter 2. How to start 6 General.......................................................................................................................................6 Creating a new database ............................................................................................................7 Modifying an existing database ................................................................................................. 7 MagiCAD Product Modeller functions......................................................................................8

Chapter 3. Ductwork devices 10 Ductwork components .............................................................................................................10

Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 10 Modeling dampers.....................................................................................................13 Result.........................................................................................................................16

Air terminal devices (Outdoor, Supply, Extract and Exhaust)................................................. 17 Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 17 Modeling an air terminal device................................................................................19 Result.........................................................................................................................21

Fans..........................................................................................................................................23 Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 23 Modeling a fan...........................................................................................................24 Result.........................................................................................................................24

Cleaning covers .......................................................................................................................26 Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 26 Modeling a cleaning cover ........................................................................................27 Result.........................................................................................................................27

Chapter 4. Heating/water system devices 28 Pipe components......................................................................................................................28

Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 28 Modeling an ordinary valve.......................................................................................30 Result.........................................................................................................................31 Modeling an automatic zone valve............................................................................32

Heating/Cooling devices..........................................................................................................33 Modeling a radiator ...................................................................................................33

Water radiator ..........................................................................................................................36 Modeling a water radiator .........................................................................................36

Water devices...........................................................................................................................38 Modeling water points...............................................................................................38

Sprinklers.................................................................................................................................40 Modeling a sprinkler..................................................................................................40

Chapter 5. Sewers (sewer points and components) 42 Sewer points ............................................................................................................................42

Modeling sewer points ..............................................................................................42 Sewer components ...................................................................................................................43

iv • Contents MagiCAD Product Modeller

Starting modeling ...................................................................................................... 43 Modeling component sizes ........................................................................................45

Chapter 6. Electric, tele, data and building automation devices 47 Electric devices........................................................................................................................47

Modeling a single product ......................................................................................... 47 Modeling a product family ........................................................................................ 50

Tele, data and building automation devices.............................................................................53



Chapter 1. General

About MagiCAD Product Modeller MagiCAD Product Modeller is meant for modeling products (either by end-user or manufacturer) for MagiCAD design program.

With MagiCAD Product Modeller it is possible to model e.g. air terminal devices, duct/pipe components, water and sewer points, radiators, cooling beams, and electric devices. This manual guides you to model these products.

Fig. 1. An example of a supply air device modeled in this manual




General Start MagiCAD Product Modeller from it shortcut in MagiCAD folder. A blank QpdModel dialog opens.

1 2

Fig. 2. A blank QpdModel dialog

In the left pane (1) you can browse the modeled product groups. The products that are modeled into the selected product group are shown as a list in the right pane (2).

You can preview and modify the products by selecting a product from the list and clicking the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens (available when at least one product is modeled) with the following options:

o New… – Start modeling a new product

o Delete – Remove the product from the database

o Edit Data… – Modify the product data

o View Properties… – Preview the device

You can either model products into existing databases or create a completely new database. In MagiCAD's product database directory (usually the Products



subdirectory of MagiCAD program directory) you can modify databases whose filename begin with User; you cannot modify the manufacturer databases as they are protected with passwords.

Creating a new database Select New from the File menu. Select the directory where you want to save the database (eg. D:\Databases). Next give a name for the database (eg. Common) and accept it by clicking the Open button.

You can also define a password for your database to prevent unauthorized persons to modify the database. Select Edit File Header... from the File menu. The QpdModeller – File Header –dialog opens.

1

2

3

Fig. 3. Defining a password for the database

You can write general information about the database in the Notes field (1).

Give the password in the Password for database and Re-enter password fields (2). Password must be entered twice to make sure that it is correctly typed.

You can also type the manufacturer name in the Manufacturer field (3). This information is common to all devices modeled in the database.

Accept the settings by clicking the Ok button. Alternatively you can reject the settings by clicking the Cancel button.

Now you can start modeling the products.

Modifying an existing database Open the database for modeling by selecting Open from the File menu (or by clicking the Open Database... button in the QPDModeller main window). Select the database.



MagiCAD Product Modeller functions Start modeling devices with the Insert function. The Insert pulldown menu contains the product types you can model:

o Ductwork (ductwork devices and components)

Component

• Flow Damper…

• Fire Damper…

• Silencer…

• Other…

Device (air terminal devices)

• Outdoor…

• Supply…

• Extract…

• Exhaust…

Fan

Cleaning cover

o Heating/Water System (devices and components)

Component

Radiator Valve…

Zone Valve…

Stop Valve…

Other Valve…

Other Component…

Heating/Cooling Device

Radiator…

Other Device…

Water

Water radiator…

Water device…

Sprinkler…

o Sewer

Component…

Device…

o Electric Devices

Boxes…

Sockets…

Switches…

Luminaires…

Heaters…

Equipment…



Other devices…

Tele and Data Devices

Main units…

Sub-units…

Sockets…

o Tele and data devices…

Audio and video devices…

Signal devices…

Fire alarm devices…

Security devices…

Other devices…

Building automation

Substations and routers…

Controllers…

Probes and buttons

Actuators

Other BA products


10 • Chapter 3. Ductwork devices

Chapter 3. Ductwork devices

Ductwork components In this example we model a damper with the size of ø160.

NB: Other ductwork devices are modeled mainly in the same way. When you model eg. a damper, the program selects the symbol. When you model an OtherComponent, you can select the symbol yourself – and you can also use the UserSymbol alternative, in which case you can draw the symbol yourself.

Starting modeling Start modeling the damper by selecting Insert Ductworks Component Flow Damper... from the pulldown menu. The Product Model dialog opens.

1

2

3

Fig. 4. Product Model dialog

1) Model Type

Select here whether to model the product by velocity (the first option) or by airflow (the second option).

If the product is modeled by velocity, all sizes have the same pressure drop and sound data curve. If the product is modeled by airflow, each size has its own curves.


Chapter 3. Ductwork devices • 11

2) Connection Sizes

If the product is modeled by velocity, the Connection Sizes selection is active. Select there whether to model circular or rectangular devices.

o List of diameters – All sizes of the circular ducts are added to the list

o List of rectangles – All sizes of the rectangular ducts are added to the list

o Rectangle range – Minimum and maximum sizes (height, width) and the step between the sizes are given

3) Damper type

Select here whether to model a normal damper or a damper with constant airflow.

In this example we model a normal damper by airflow. Accept the settings by clicking the Ok button. The main dialog of modeling opens.

1 2

3

4

5

Fig. 5. Main dialog of product modeling

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. FD (Flow Damper). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Flow Damper). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.

o Market Area – Here you can define all market areas in which you want to include the product (ie. show in the selection lists). If you leave this field blank, the product is shown in all market areas.



The available market areas: fin, swe, gbr, deu, nor, fra, esp, ita, pol, dnk, cze, prt, hun, nld, isl, est, ltu, lva, rus, bel, chn, tur

o Version – Here you can enter eg. the modeling date.

2) Shape / 3) Geometric model

Select the appearance for the device. If you use a Shape definition, the possible alternatives are box and cylinder. Alternatively you can use a Qmodel (MagiCAD version 2004.9 or later).

If you select Qmodel, the Select Model dialog opens.

Fig. 6. Model selection dialog

Storage

Select the location from where to select the Qmodel.

Current project – from the active project

Local modelfolders – from a local Qmodel directory

Magi.Net – from a web server

Models

This window contains a list of Qmodels you can select.

Browse the desired model active, and select it by double-clicking the model or accepting the selection with Ok.

Preview

This window contains the selected Qmodel. You can rotate the model when the left mouse button is down. If you have a wheel mouse, you can zoom the model by scrolling the wheel and move the model by pressing the wheel down.

If you want to see the dimensions of the model, select Lines and dimensions

4) Sizes

Model the device sizes in the Sizes pane. Start by clicking the New... button. You can modify existing devices afterwards with the Edit... function. You can remove sizes by selecting the sizes and clicking the Delete button.

The modeling process is described in the next section.

5) Preview…



With this function you can preview the modeled sizes.

Modeling dampers Start modeling by clicking the New... button in the Sizes pane. The modeling dialog opens.

1 2

4

3

5 6

78

Fig. 7. Product modeling dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, containing eg. the connection size (FD-160).

o Product code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. FD-160). If Productcode is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.


2) Operation Range

Give here the operation range:

o Qv-min (l/s) – minimum airflow

o Qv-max (l/s) – maximum airflow

o dp-min (Pa) – minimum pressure drop

o dp-max (Pa) – maximum pressure drop

3) Dp-Curves

Give one point from each pressure drop curve in this dialog. Click the New... button. The dpCurve dialog opens.



Fig. 8. Modeling pressure drop curves of an adjusting device

Give the preset (adjustment) value of the pressure drop curve in the Adjustment value field. Give a point from the pressure drop curve in the qv (l/s) and dp (Pa) fields. For example, give the following values for your sample device:

o Adjustment=0, qv=50, dP=180



You can modify existing points by selecting the point and clicking the Edit... button. You can remove a point with the Delete button.

NB. It is enough to model only open/closed positions for a device with a damper.

4) Sound Attenuation

Give here the attenuations of the device by octave bands (the attenuations are presented in the manufacturer's brochure/catalog). The device usually has one set of attenuations, and these values are suitable for all curves.

Start entering the attenuations by clicking the New... button. The Sound Attenuation dialog opens.

Fig. 9. Sound attenuations by octave bands

If there are different attenuations for each curve, give the number of the curve in the Adjustment field. If there is only one set of attenuations for the device, leave the Adjustment field blank. If the Adjustment value is given to one curve only, it is ignored.

Enter the attenuations by octave bands in the dLw [dB] fields.

5) Sound Generation

Input the sound generation of the device in this dialog. Start modeling the sound curves by clicking the New... button. The Sound Generation dialog opens.



Fig. 10. Sound data modeling dialog

Sound generation is modeled by defining at least two intersection points of sound and pressure drop curves (eg. 20dB and 30 dB, and pressure drop curve) – either from all pressure drop curves, or at least from the open/closed curves. The program calculates the values for other sound curves.

Give the preset (adjustment) value of the pressure drop curve in the Adjustment field. Next, give the flowrate qv [l/s] or pressure drop dp [Pa] from the intersection of the pressure drop curve and the sound curve. The program calculates the other value (the intersections are read from the characteristics of the manufacturer).

Next, input the sound generation by octave bands in the Lw [dB] fields. That is, give the sound level + correction factor (presented in the manufacturer's brochure/catalog). In this example we model the 25dB and 35dB sound curves, correction factors for the device being as follows:

63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

20 18 14 11 2 -3 -12 -21 Fig. 11. Correction factors of the device by octave bands

The intersections of the pressure drop curves are the following:

Adjustment dB qV dp

0 25 40

0 35 60

1 25 80

1 35 60

2 25 100

2 35 150 Fig. 12. Intersections of the pressure drop and sound curves

Input the values in the Sound Generation table. In the LpA10m2 EndR=A we see the sound pressure level of the device. When you click the Check LW-data button, the program checks that the sound data is given correctly.

Tip: Once you have modeled the first sound information, you can use the Copy button to copy the data. Then you can give the new adjustment value and intersection points, and add/reduce sound of the device with the –1dB and +1



dB buttons (for instance, if you copy the 25dB curve, you can add 10 dB to it, which means that you model the 35dB curve).

6) Dimensions

When you have given the sound data, give the dimensions for the device.

• D: outer diameter

• L: length

• Duct [mm]: connection size

Fig. 13. Sound data and dimensions of the sample device

If a Qmodel has been selected, the dimensions are given in the Device Shape dialog, which opens with the Edit Shape... button.

Result When the sound data and dimensions are given for the device, you can preview the device with the Preview button (7). In this example, the preview appears as follows:

Fig. 14. Preview of the modeled product



If you are satisfied with the result, close the preview (click the Close button) and accept the product by clicking Ok (8). Then you have modeled one size and you can start modeling the next one.

When you have modeled all sizes you need, stop modeling the device by clicking Ok in the main dialog. The modeled device the appears in the right pane of the QpdModeller main dialog. The dialog has ID, Code and Description as the header.

Air terminal devices (Outdoor, Supply, Extract and Exhaust)

The air terminal devices are modeled in the same way as the dampers. However, it is possible to model an air terminal device without a damper.

In this example we model a supply air device without a damper (a device with a damper is modeled in the same way as a damper).

Starting modeling Start modeling by selecting Insert Ductworks Device Supply… The New air device dialog opens.

Fig. 15. Selecting the flow control type

o No damper (single dp curve): The device does not contain a damper (ie. it has only one pressure drop curve)

o Normal damper: The device contains a typical damper

o Constant-qv damper: The device contains a CAV damper

Select No damper, and accept your selection with OK. The main dialog of device modeling opens.



1 2

3

4

Fig. 16.Main dialog of device modeling

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. SAD (Supply Air Device). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Supply Air Device). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.

o Market Area – Here you can define all market areas in which you want to include the product (ie. show in the selection lists). If you leave this field blank, the product is shown in all market areas. The available market areas: fin, swe, gbr, deu, nor, fra, esp, ita, pol, dnk, cze, prt, hun, nld, isl, est, ltu, lva, rus, bel, chn, tur


2) Shape / 3) Geometric model

Select the appearance for the device. If you use a Shape definition, the possible alternatives are box and cylinder. Alternatively you can use a Qmodel (MagiCAD version 2004.9 or later).

If you select Qmodel, the Select Model dialog opens.



Fig. 17. Model selection dialog

Storage

Select the location from where to select the Qmodel.

Current project – from the active project

Local modelfolders – from a local Qmodel directory

Magi.Net – from a web server

Models

This window contains a list of Qmodels you can select.

Browse the desired model active, and select it by double-clicking the model or accepting the selection with Ok.

Preview

This window contains the selected Qmodel. You can rotate the model when the left mouse button is down. If you have a wheel mouse, you can zoom the model by scrolling the wheel and move the model by pressing the wheel down.

If you want to see the dimensions of the model, select Lines and dimensions

4) Sizes


Modeling an air terminal device The following figures represent the attenuations, correction factors, and sound/pressure drop intersection points of the device that is modeled as an example.

63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

8 -1 0 -1 -2 -2 -5 -9 Fig. 18. Correction factors for the sound power level



63 125 250 600 1K 2K 4K 8K

15 11 6 4 7 3 4 5 Fig. 19. Attenuations of the device

dB qv dP

25 30

30 60 Fig. 20. Intersections of the pressure drop curve and sound points

Start modeling the sizes by clicking the New... button in the Sizes pane. The modeling dialog for device sizes opens.

The dialog is similar to adjusting device (eg. damper), but only one pressure drop curve is modeled. The sound points are modeled for the pressure drop curve. In addition, it is possible to model a throw length curve for a supply air device.

1

5

2

4 3

6

7

Fig 21. Device modeling dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here the same ID as in the main dialog, but complete it eg. with the connection size (SAD-160).

o Product code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. SAD-160). If Productcode is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.


2) Operation Range

Give here the operation range of the device:

o Qv-min (l/s) – minimum airflow

o Qv-max (l/s) – maximum airflow



o dp-min (Pa) – minimum pressure drop

o dp-max (Pa) – maximum pressure drop

3) Dp-Curve

Give here one point from the pressure drop curve of the device.

4) Sound Attenuation

Enter here the sound attenuations by octave bands (presented in the manufacturer's brochure/catalog).

5) Sound Generation

Enter here the sound generation of the device. This is modeled in the same way as with adjusting devices (eg. damper).

6) Dimensions

Enter here the dimensions of the device. Give the connection size in the Duct[mm] field. Next, click the Edit Shape button. The dimension modeling dialog opens.

Fig. 22. Modeling the dimensions of the device

Give the dimensions in the Values[mm] fields. You can select between the Dim values and Dim names options whether to show the dimensions (Dim values) or parameter names (Dim names) in the Preview window.

Tip: If the device has a rectangular connection duct, give eg. 200x100 as the size in the Duct[mm] field.

7) L02

With this function you can model throw lengths for the device.

Result You can preview the modeled device by clicking the Preview button. The sample device appears in the preview as follows:



Fig. 23. Preview of the modeled device

If you are satisfied with the result, accept the product by clicking Ok.

When you have modeled all sizes you need, accept your modeling by clicking Ok in the main dialog. The device then appears in the list of modeled devices.



Fans The fans are modeled in the same way as the other ductwork components/devices.

In this example we model a roof fan with circular connection.

Starting modeling Start modeling by selecting Insert Ductwork Fan… The Fan dialog opens.

Fig. 24 main dialog of fan modeling

General

The corresponding data as with the other ductwork components / devices is given.

Type

Select the type of the fan. Roof (installed to the end of the duct) or Axial (installed in the middle of the duct like duct component)

Duct connection

Select duct connection type, Circular or Rectangular

Geometric model

Select the appearance for the device. The Select Model dialog opens as with other ductwork components / devices and the appropriate Qmodel should be selected.

Sizes




Modeling a fan A fan is modeled as duct component / air terminal device with the following exceptions

Fig 24. Fan modeling dialog

Dp-Curves

Give here at least three points from the pressure drop curve of the fan (maximum speed). Both curve end points must be included. Also fan efficiency can be given (not mandatory)

Sound Generation

Enter here the sound generation of the device. At least two points with the same flow must be given. The points should be given so that the whole fan operating area is covered.

Result You can preview the modeled device by clicking the Preview button. The sample fan appears in the preview as follows:



Fig. 26. Preview of the modeled fan


When you have modeled all sizes you need, accept your modeling by clicking Ok in the main dialog. The fan then appears in the list of modeled fans.



Cleaning covers The cleaning are modeled in the same way as the other ductwork components/devices, but without any technical data.

In this example we model a plug type cleaning cover.

Starting modeling Start modeling by selecting Insert Ductwork Cleaning cover… The Cleaning cover dialog opens.

Fig. 27. Main dialog of Cleaning cover modeling

1) General

The corresponding data as with the other ductwork components / devices is given.

2) Type

Select the type of the cleaning cover. Plug (installed to the end of the duct), Component (installed in the middle of the duct like duct component), Duct side (installed on the duct side) or Oval duct side (oval, installed on the duct side)

3) Duct connection

Select duct type, Circular or Rectangular

4) Geometric model

Select the appearance for the device. The Select Model dialog opens as with other ductwork components / devices and the appropriate Qmodel should be selected.



5) Sizes


Modeling a cleaning cover A cleaning is modeled as duct component / air terminal device without any technical data.

Fig 28. Cleaning cover modeling dialog

Result You can preview the modeled device by clicking the Preview button. The sample fan appears in the preview as follows:

Fig. 29. Preview of the modeled fan


When you have modeled all sizes you need, accept your modeling by clicking Ok in the main dialog. The fan then appears in the list of modeled fans.


28 • Chapter 4. Heating/water system devices

Chapter 4. Heating/water system devices

Pipe components In this example we model a zone valve. Other pipe components are modeled in the same way.

Starting modeling Start modeling the zone valve by selecting Insert --> Heating/Water System --> Component --> Zone valve… The main dialog of pipe component modeling opens.


Chapter 4. Heating/water system devices • 29

1 2

3

4

5

Fig. 30. Main dialog of pipe component modeling

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. ZV (Zone Valve). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Zone Valve). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) 3D Symbol

If you want to model the valve in 3D, you have two alternatives to define its appearance:

o Qmodel – Select the Qmodel as with the ductwork components

o Predefined shape – Select the shape definition.

In this example we have selected shape 1302.



3) Sizes

Model the valve sizes in the Sizes pane. Start modeling the sizes by clicking the New... button. You can modify existing devices afterwards; in that case click the Edit... button. You can remove sizes by selecting the size and clicking the Delete button.

4) Preview

You can preview existing devices with the Preview function.

5) Type

With this option you can define the valve as an automatic zone valve.

Modeling an ordinary valve

Preset value 1 2 3 4

Kv value 1,6 4,0 7,1 11 Fig. 31. Kv values of the example valve

Start modeling the valve by clicking New... in the Sizes pane. The valve modeling dialog opens.

1

3

2

4

Fig. 32. Valve modeling dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here an unique ID for the device. Next give eg. the connection size of the device (ZV-50)



o Product Code – Give here the product code of the device. This value appears in MagiCAD in the selection lists and dimension texts (eg. ZV-50). If Product Code is not given, ID appears instead in MagiCAD selection lists.

o Version – Here you can give eg. the modeling date..

2) Dimensions

Give here the dimensions of the device.

o Size/DN [mm] – Connection size

o Length [mm] – Length

If you model the valve with 3D dimensions, click the Edit Shape / Qmodel button to model the dimensions. In addition the document contains further information about dimension parameters.

3) Dp-range

Give here the limits of the operation range:

o dp-min (kPa) – minimum pressure drop

o dp-max (kPa) – maximum pressure drop

4) Dp-Curves

Here you can define the preset (adjustment) values for the valve. Start modeling the adjustment values by clicking the New… button. The dpCurve dialog opens.

Fig. 33. Input dialog for adjustment values

You can define the adjustment values either by giving the flowrate (qv [l/s]) and pressure drop (dp [kPa], intersection from the curve) or giving the kv value for the adjustment value (the kv value for each adjustment value is presented in the manufacturer's brochure/catalog).

The kv value for the sample device is given earlier in this chapter.

You can edit the devices afterwards by selecting the size and clicking the Edit… button. You can remove sizes by selecting the size and clicking Delete.

Result Click the Preview button to preview the modeled device. Our sample device appears in the preview as follows:



Fig. 34. Preview of the modeled valve

If you are satisfied with the result, accept it by clicking Ok in the device modeling dialog.

Modeling an automatic zone valve Select the Automatic valve option in the checkbox and start modeling by clicking the New... button in the Sizes dialog. The valve modeling dialog opens.

1

2

4

3

5

Fig. 35. Valve modeling dialog

1) General

o ID: Give the unique identifier for the device. In addition to the ID, give e.g. the connection size of the device (ZV-2-50)



o Product Code: The value of this field appears in the selection lists of MagiCAD, and it can be used in the dimension texts (e.g. ZV-2-50). If the product code is not defined, ID is showed in the selection lists of MagiCAD.

o Version: In this field you can give e.g. the modeling date of the device.

2) Dimensions

Give the dimensions of the device in these fields.

o Size/DN [mm]: Connection size of the valve

o Length [mm]: Length of the valve

If you model the valve with 3D dimensions, click the Edit Shape / Qmodel button to model the dimensions. In addition the document contains further information about dimension parameters.

3) DP-Curve Reference Point

Give here the values of the valve that is completely open.

4) Diagram DP-Range

Give here the limits of the operation range:

o dp-min (kPa): Minimum pressure drop

o dp-max (kPa): Maximum pressure drop

5) Setting Range

o pMin [kPa]: Minimum differential pressure that can be set to the line

o pMax [kPa]: Maximum differential pressure that can be set to the line

o qvMin [l/s]: Minimum flowrate of the size

o qvMax for dpMax [l/s]: Maximum flowrate of the size with the maximum differential pressure that can be set to the line

Heating/Cooling devices This example guides you to model a radiator. Other Device is modeled mainly likewise.

Modeling a radiator Start modeling a radiator by selecting Insert --> Heating/Water System --> Heating/Cooling Device --> Radiator… The radiator modeling dialog opens.



Fig. 36. Radiator modeling dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. HR (Heating Radiator). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Heating Radiator). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.

o Code mask – In this field you can define the format of the product code in the bill of materials. With the {B} and {H} parameters you can determine the place of the radiator width and height on the product code. In our example the product code appears as HR-Height-Width in the bill of materials.



2) Shape

Select here whether you want to use a conventional radiator shape definition (Box) or a Qmodel.

3) Geometric model

If you use Qmodel, select the model to this field.

4) Connections

The picture in this pane shows the possible radiator connections when shapes are used. Give the connections that are allowed with this radiator in the Allowed connections field.

5) Sizes

2



Model the radiator sizes in the Sizes pane. Click the Add... button. Give the width of the radiator in the B [mm] field, and the height of the radiator in the H[mm] field. You can delete sizes by selecting a size and clicking the Delete button.

6) Power params

Give here the power calculation factors (MagiCAD uses these factors when calculation radiator capacities). Methods 1-3 are based on the EN442 and 6 based on DIN4703-3 standards (the factors can be obtained from the manufacturer). Formula 5 suits well especially for calculating the capacities of old radiators.

Method no. Formula Notes

- - Capacities are not calculated

1 0cbT THK Δ⋅⋅=φ EN-442

2 )( 10 HccbT THK ⋅+Δ⋅⋅=φ EN-442

3 cm

HccbT qTHK ⋅Δ⋅⋅= ⋅+ )( 10φ EN-442

4 cm

HccbT qTHK ⋅Δ⋅⋅= ⋅+ )( 10φ

5

6 φ = φn * (ΔT/ ΔTn) n DIN4703-3

Fig. 37. Heating capacity formulae of the radiators

Parameters Formulas 1-5 Formula 6

Param 1 KT Height

Param 2 B φn

Param 3 C0 n

Param 4 C1

Param 5 C Fig. 38. Explanations for the parameters in the heating capacity formulae

7) Volume params

Enter here the coefficient for the water volume formulae.

Formula no. Formula Notes

- - Water volume is not calculated

1 dHbLHaV +⋅+⋅⋅=

2 dLcHbLHaV +⋅+⋅+⋅⋅=

Fig. 39. Water volume calculation formulae of the radiators

⎟ ⎠ ⎞

⎜⎝⎛ −

−⋅⋅= room

outinbT TTTHK

2φ



Parameters Formula 1 Formula 2

Param 1 a a

Param 2 b b

Param 3 d d

Param 4 d Fig. 40. Explanations for the parameters in the water volume formulae

8) Preview

Once you have given all input data, you can preview the radiator by clicking the Preview button.

Fig. 41. Preview of the radiator

If you are satisfied with the settings and want to accept the radiator, click Ok in the radiator modeling dialog. The radiator then appears in the list of modeled products.

Water radiator

Modeling a water radiator Start modeling the water radiator by selecting Insert --> Heating/Water System --> Water -->Water radiator… The water radiator modeling dialog opens.



1

2

3

6

4

5

Fig. 42. Water radiator modeling dialog

1) General

o ID – Give a unique identifier for the device, for example, HWR. ID is showed in the selection lists of MagiCAD only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in the selection lists of MagiCAD and it clarifies which device is in question. If Code is not defined, ID is showed in the selection lists of MagiCAD.

o Codemask – This field defines the appearance of the product code in the bill of materials. With the {B} (width) and {H} (height) parameters you can define where the width and height are presented in the code. In this example, the bill of material contains HWR-Width-Height.

o Market Area – Here you can list the market areas where the product appear in the selection lists. If you leave this field blank, the product appears in all market areas. The available market areas: fin, swe, gbr, deu, nor, fra, esp, ita, pol, dnk, cze, prt, hun, nld, isl, est, ltu, lva, rus, bel, chn, tur

o Version – You can type e.g. the modeling date in this field.

2) Shape

Select here whether you want to use a conventional radiator shape definition (Box) or a Qmodel.

3) Geometric model

If you use Qmodel, select the model to this field.

4) Connections

The picture in this pane shows the possible radiator connection when shape is used. Give the connections that are allowed with this radiator in the Allowed connections field.

5) Sizes



Model the radiator sizes in the Sizes pane. Click the Add... button. Give the width of the radiator in the B [mm] field, and the height of the radiator in the H[mm] field. You can delete sizes by selecting a size and clicking the Delete button.

8) Preview

Once you have given all input data, you can preview the radiator by clicking the Preview button.

If you are satisfied with the settings and want to accept the radiator, click Ok in the radiator modeling dialog. The radiator then appears in the list of modeled products.

Water devices

Modeling water points Start modeling water points by selecting Insert --> Heating/Water System --> Water Device… The water point modeling dialog opens.

1

5

4

32

7

6

8

Fig. 43. Modeling dialog of water points

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. SHOWER. ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Shower). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.

o Market Area – Here you can define all market areas in which you want to include the product (ie. show in the selection lists). If you leave this field



blank, the product is shown in all market areas. The available market areas: fin, swe, gbr, deu, nor, fra, esp, ita, pol, dnk, cze, prt, hun, nld, isl, est, ltu, lva, rus, bel, chn, tur


2) Device Type

Select here the type of the water point:

o Cold and hot water

o Cold water only

o Hot water only

3) Flow type

If either Cold water only or Hot water only is selected, further specification of the water point is given in the Flow Type options:

o Normal – normal water point

o Fire hydrant

o Constant – constant flowrate

4) Flow Data

Give the nominal flowrate and the pressure drop in the qv [l/s] and dp [kPa] fields.

5) Dimensions

Give here the dimensions for the water point:

o Distance between connection points [mm]

o Default value for installation height [mm] – you can change the installation height when you select the water point

o Connection size [mm]

6) Sewer Point Location

Here you can set the default distances between the water and sewer point:

o dx [mm] – distance in X axis

o dy [mm] – distance in Y axis

7) 2D-Symbol

The dimensions are updated in the 2D Symbol window.

8) 3D-Symbol

Here you can select the 3D symbol for the water point. Click the Qmodel… button to select the Qmodel for it. It is possible to define also the dimensions for some models with the Params…function. However, define the dimensions so that they match with the values that are given in the Dimensions fields.

Once you have entered the data for the water point, accept it by clicking the Ok button. The modeled water point then appears in the list of the modeled products.



Sprinklers

Modeling a sprinkler Start modeling the sprinkler by selecting Insert Heating/Water System Sprinkler… The sprinkler modeling dialog opens.

1

3

2

4

Fig. 44. Modeling dialog of sprinklers

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. SPR-15. ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Sprinkler-15). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) Installation definitions

Select here the installation alternatives for the sprinkler.

3) Technical

Here you can define technical properties for the sprinkler:

o Nominal release temperature [°C]

o Response class

o STD – Standard response

o RS – Response special

o QR – Quick responce



o Size/DN [mm] – Connection size

o k-factor [dm3/min 1bar] – how many liters per minute flows through the nozzle at the pressure of one bar)

5) 3D-Symbol

Here you can select the 3D symbol for the sprinkler. Click the Qmodel… button to select the Qmodel for it. Define the dimensions for the sprinkler with the Params…function.

Once you have entered the data for the sprinkler, accept it by clicking the Ok button. The modeled sprinkler then appears in the list of the modeled products.


42 • Chapter 5. Sewers (sewer points and components)

Chapter 5. Sewers (sewer points and components)

Sewer points

Modeling sewer points Start modeling the sewer points by selecting Insert --> Sewer --> Device… from the pulldown menu. The sewer point modeling dialog opens.

1 5

4

2 3

6

Fig. 45. Modeling dialog of sewer points

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. SP-1 (Sewer Point). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Sewer Point-110). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.


Chapter 5. Sewers (sewer points and components) • 43



2) Dimensions

Give here the dimensions of the sewer point:

o Diameter [mm] – outer diameter

o Height [mm] – height

o Connection size [mm] – connection size

3) 2D-Symbol

Select here the symbol for the sewer point.

4) Default values

Give here the default nominal flow and height level for the sewer point in the qv [l/s] and H-installation [mm] fields. You can choose other values when you select the sewers.

5) 3D-Symbol

Here you can select the 3D symbol for the sewer point. Click the Qmodel… button to select the Qmodel for it. It is possible to define also the dimensions for some models with the Params…function. However, define the dimensions so that they match with the values that are given in the Dimensions fields.

6) Preview

Click the Preview button to have the preview of the dimensional drawing.

Once you have given the information, accept the product with the Ok button. The sewer point appears in the list of the modeled products.

Sewer components

Starting modeling Start modeling sewer components by selecting Insert --> Sewer --> Component… The modeling dialog opens.



1

5

2

4

3

Fig. 46. Main dialog of sewer component modeling

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. SC-1 (Sewer Component). ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Cleaning Cover). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) Symbol Group

Select here the symbol for the sewer component.

Tip: It is possible to draw 2D symbols (User Symbol) for all components in MagiCAD.

3) Sizes

Model the the sewer component sizes in the Sizes pane. Start by clicking the New... button. You can modify existing devices afterwards with the Edit... function. You can remove sizes by selecting the sizes and clicking the Delete button.


Chapter 5. Sewers (sewer points and components) • 45

NB: If a Qmodel is used, it is possible to define dimensions for the model in the size modeling dialog.

4) 3D-Symbol

You can select a 3D symbol for the sewer component. Select a suitable Qmodel with the Qmodel… function.

5) Preview

By clicking the Preview button you can preview the modeled sewer components.

Modeling component sizes Click the New... button in the Sizes pane (3) to add new sizes. The size modeling dialog opens.

1

2

Fig. 25. Size modeling dialog of the sewer components

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, containing eg. the connection size (SC-1-110).

o Product code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. Cleaning Cover-110). If Productcode is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.


2) Dimensions

Give here the dimensions of the component:

o Size/DN [mm] – connection size of the component

o Length [mm] – length of the component

o Qmodel – if you have chosen to use a Qmodel in the main dialog, you can give here the dimensions for it. However, define the dimensions so that they match those given in the Dimensions fields.

Once you have entered the data for the sewer component, accept it by clicking the Ok button.

Define the other sizes likewise.



When all sizes are modeled, accept the product by clicking the Ok button in the main dialog of pipe component modeling. The sewer component then appears in the list of the modeled products.


Chapter 6. Electric, tele, data and building automation devices • 47

Chapter 6. Electric, tele, data and building automation devices

Electric devices All electric devices are modeled in the same way, however, luminaires have a n additional field (light source). The devices can be modeled either as individual products or product families.

As an example we model a luminaire. Start modeling by selecting Insert Electric devices Luminaires... The Product... dialog opens.

Fig. 48. Selection of the model type

In this dialog you can select to model either an individual product or a product family.

Modeling a single product Select Single product. The Product Model dialog opens.


48 • Chapter 6. Electric, tele, data and building automation devices

1

2

3 5

4

6

Fig. 49. Product model dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. L1-58W. ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. L1-58W). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) Main Dimensions

Here you can define the main dimensions for the device.

o Length [mm] – length/width

o Width [mm] – depth

o Height [mm]

3) Data

Here you can define technical data for the device.

o Active power [W]

o IP Class

o Light source



4) 3D-symbol

Here you can select a 3D symbol for the device. Set the Qmodel option active and click the Qmodel... button. The Select Model dialog opens.

A

B

C

Fig. 50. Select Model dialog

In this dialog you can select a Qmodel for the product.

A) Storage

You can search Qmodels from the following locations:

o Current project – models that are included in the active project

o Local modelfolder – Qmodel directory on a local drive

o Magi.NET – web server

B) Models

Available Qmodels.

C) Preview

Preview window of the Qmodel. It is possible to rotate and zoom the model in the preview window.

o Faces – the model is showed ”rendered”

o Lines and dimensions – the dimensional drawing of the model is showed

Select the Qmodel and accept it for use with Ok.

If the model is made to be scalable, you can define its dimensions. Give the dimensions with the Params…function in the Device Shape dialog. However, define the dimensions so that they match with the values that are given in the Main Dimensions fields.

5) Default Values

Here you can define default values for the device. At the moment you can define the default installation elevation H-installation [mm].

6) Preview

Preview button opens a preview dialog where you can examine the modeled device.



Accept your choices with Ok. The device then appears in the list of modeled products.

Modeling a product family Select Product Family. The Product Model dialog opens.

1 4

2

3

5

6

Fig. 51. Product model dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. L2-58W. ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. L2-58W). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) Data

Here you can define data that is common to all devices in the product family.

o IP Class



3) Default Values

Here you can define default values for the devices (not yet applicable).

4) 3D-symbol

Here you can select a 3D symbol for the devices. Set the Qmodel option active and click the Qmodel... button. The Select Model dialog opens.

A

B

C

Fig. 52. Select Model dialog

In this dialog you can select a Qmodel for the product.

A) Storage

You can search Qmodels from the following locations:

o Current project – models that are included in the active project

o Local modelfolder – Qmodel directory on a local drive

o Web – web server

B) Models

Available Qmodels.

C) Preview

Preview window of the Qmodel. It is possible to rotate and zoom the model in the preview window.

o Faces – the model is showed ”rendered”

o Lines and dimensions – the dimensional drawing of the model is showed

Select the Qmodel and accept it for use with Ok.

5) Sizes

Add all sizes to the product family in the Sizes window pane. Start modeling by clicking the New… button. You can modify the devices afterwards by selecting the device and clicking the Edit… button. You can remove sizes by selecting the size and clicking the Delete button.

Modeling the products is described in the following chapter.



6) Preview

Preview button opens a preview dialog where you can examine the modeled device.

Accept your choices with Ok. The device then appears in the list of modeled products.

Modeling the products Click the New... button in the Sizes window pane (5) . The Product Size dialog opens.

1

2

3

4

Fig. 53. Product Size dialog

1) General

o ID – Give here a unique identifier for the product, eg. L2-2X58W. ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists only if Code is not defined.

o Code – This value appears in MagiCAD's selection lists, and it can be used for clarifying what kind of product is in question (eg. L2-2X58W). If Code is not defined, ID is shown in MagiCAD's selection lists.



2) Data

Here you can define technical data for the product.

o Active power [W]

o Light source

3) Main Dimensions

Here you can define the main dimensions for the device.

o Length [mm] – length/width

o Width [mm] – depth

o Height [mm]



If you have chosen to use a Qmodel and the model is made to be scalable, you can define the dimensions of the model. Give the dimensions with the Qmodel Params…function in the Device Shape dialog. However, define the dimensions so that they match with the values that are given in the Main Dimensions fields.

4) Preview

When you click the Preview button you can examine the modeled device.

Tele, data and building automation devices These devices are modeled in the same way as electric devices.


54 •

MagiCAD 2008.5 Users Guide

Documents

Transcript of MagiCAD 2008.5 Users Guide